Home

AT&T System 25 r1v1 Reference Manual

1. Hardware And Software Parameters The following is a listing of maximums for hardware and software parameters Attendant Consoles Direct Trunk Termination Direct Extension Selector Automatic Route Selection ARS Patterns Subpatterns Per Pattern Routes Per Subpattern Facility Restriction Levels Cabinets Circuit Packs Common Control Circuit Pack Slots Per Cabinet Call Coverage Individual Covered Stations Call Coverage Groups Receivers per covered station or group Call Pickup Groups Members per group Conference Members Dial Codes Personal Dial Codes PDCs Floating Personal Dial Codes FPDCs Data Dial Codes DDCs 8 2 Hardware And Software Parameters Contd Direct Group Calling DGC Groups Members per group Emergency Transfer Units ETUs Voice Terminals per ETU Modem Pool Circuit Packs per cabinet Conversion Resources per circuit pack Paging Zones Parked Calls System Per Voice Terminal Attendant DXS Console Trunk Groups System Delay Announcements Direct Group Calling Delay Announcement Directed Night Service Delay Announcement Account Code Digits SMDR or Call Accounting System Models 100 200 300 or 500 Speed Dialing Numbers System Speed Dialing Numbers 100 189 Personal Speed Dialing Numbers 20 26 per station Repertory Dialing plus Speed Dialing Digits System Administration Terminal Toll Call Allowed Lists Total Entries all lis
2. 2724 30C 1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 A25 73 1 ADU EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT PLUG ENDED EIA CORD PEC 2169 001 7344 ADU EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT RECEPTACLE ENDED EIA CORD PEC 2169 004 2488 ADAPTER MODULARIZES 20120 TRANSFORMER 40082 ADAPTER POWER ADAPTER PEC 21691 20210 TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC TRANSFORMER C7 MODULAR CORD DBAP 87 FURNISHED BY INSTALLER t PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL SMDR DUTPUT DEVICE CALL ACCOUNTING SYSTEM NOTE PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT OR MULTILINE VOICE TERMINAL WITH DATA BUTTON DIALS PORT X DDC TO ESTABLISH DATA CONNECTION ZTN 82 Figure 4 42 Typical Peripheral Equipment On Premises Switched Connections 4 82 SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET OCTOPUS CABLE TE LEGEND ZTN 82 CALL PROCESSOR CP CO OR PRIVATE LINE CIRCUIT PART OF CONNECT VIA TAE X SIP Z600A ADAPT TELCO CENTRAL OFFICE TYPICAL PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT TYPICAL MODEM C1 MODULAR CORD 080 87 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE 90780 2720 05P C3 EIA CROSS OVER CORD M7U 87 2724 30C 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE MODULAR JACK 2750 25 f PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL SMDR OUTPUT DEVICE Figure 4 43 Typical Peripheral Equipment Off Premises Direct Connection 4 83 25 PART OF CABI
3. Requires a protection unit For each port circuit the signaling mode is selected by option switch settings shown on Figure 3 17 The signaling type is administrable for each port UNPROT n PORT 1234 SMPLX SMPLX SMPLX SMPLX PROT PORT 4 PORT 3 H PORT 2 PORT 1 E amp M E amp M E amp M Figure 3 17 Tie Trunk TN 760B Circuit Pack Option Switches Table 3 D summarizes the conditions present as the transmit and receive control signals for each signaling type TABLE 3 D Signaling Type Summary SIGNALING TRANSMIT RECEIVE TYPE Off Hook Off Hook open bat open bat An open circuit is preferred over voltage 3 37 Auxiliary Trunk TN 763 The Auxiliary Trunk Circuit Pack interfaces four ports provided for client provided equipment CPE and the TDM bus It is connected to the CPE by up to three pairs of wires The transmission pair T and R carry voice signals and touch tone control signals T and R also provide a loop start seizure indication to the CPE The seizure pair SZ and 571 provide seizure indication to the CPE The signal pair S and S1 provide answer supervision and or make busy information from the CPE Depending on the application the transmission pair only or all three pairs are connected to the CPE shows the following Auxiliary Trunk unique circuitry e Ground detector circuit e Port Input Output I O circuit e Four port circuits
4. and 90V ac at 0 16A On the front of the supply is a green Light Emitting Diode LED which when lighted indicates that the 5V dc is available and within limits The LED may be viewed through the slotted area on the front cover and is just behind the fan located at the top left edge of the cabinet Mounted on the back of the cabinet Figure 4 2 is the copper grounding block with four terminating positions an AC input power receptacle a power On Off switch 1 ON 0 and twelve 25 pair connectors The ground block is connected to DC ground on the carrier backplane at a location near the power supply The 25 pair connectors provide an interface between cross connect wiring and the CPs immediately behind each connector Two slots are provided in the rear cover just above the 25 pair connectors for the Time Division Multiplex TDM bus extender cable The TDM cable is used to connect 2 or 3 cabinet systems together in a daisy chain configuration and provides control and data signals between Cabinets The Cabinet 1 ground block is connected to the system s single point ground using 6 AWG wire Separate 6 AWG wires are then connected from the Cabinet 1 ground block to Cabinet 2 and 3 ground blocks The Cabinet 1 ground block is also connected to the Coupled Bonding Conductor An information label is provided across the top portion of the rear panel on each cabinet The label provides cabinet identification input electrical requirem
5. Figure 8 3 Asynchronous Data Unit Allowable Cable Distances 8 8 The following call progress tones TONE Busy Tone Confirmation Tone are generated by the system FREQUENCY 480Hz 620Hz 350 Hz 440 Hz PATTERN In Milliseconds 500 on 500 off repeated 100 on 100 off 100 on 100 off 100 on followed by silence Dial Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone Call Waiting Recall Dial Tone Preferred Route Queuing Tone ARS 350 Hz 440 Hz 480Hz 620Hz 440 Hz 480 Hz 440 Hz 350Hz 440Hz 440 Hz 8 9 Continuous 250 on 250 off repeated 1200 on 4000 off repeated 200 on not repeated 100 on 100 off 100 on 100 off 100 on 100 off followed by continuous tone Five 50 ms tones 50 ms apart not repeated Indicator Lamp Signal The following lamp signals are provided at multiline voice terminal line appearances LAMP SIGNAL PATTERN In Milliseconds MEANING gt w Flashing 500 on 500 off repeated Broken 50 on 50 off repeated Transfer Conference Fluttering gated on off every 500 ms in progress 350 on 50 off repeated Port Specifications The following tables provides interface specifications for System 25 line and trunk port circuits supported by System 25 DATA TERMINAL PORTS Note STATION TYPE CIRCUIT PACK DATA TERMINAL SPECIFICATIONS RS 232C Data Line RS 232C compatible DTE must furnish Compatible Data TN
6. NOTE PEC 21691 includes 2012D transformer 248B and 400B2 adapters and D6AP cord Figure 4 47 7341 2 4 ADU Local Power Connections 4 87 SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART oF OCTOPUS PART OF SIP to DICTATION gt EQUIPMENT NOTE LEGEND TN 742 ANALOG LINE CP ZTN 78 TIP RING LINE CP B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WPS0780 PEC 2720 05P C5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 W1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER NOTE IF CUSTOMER DICTATION EQUIPMENT REQUIRES A CONTACT CLOSURE A TN763 AUXILIARY TRUNK CP MUST BE USED REFER TO PAGING SYSTEM USING AUXILIARY TRUNK CP FOR TYPICAL CONNECTION INFORMATION Figure 4 48 Dictation System Connections FCC Registered 4 88 SYSTEM 25 PART OF OCTOPUS PART CABLE SIP LEGEND TN 742 ANALOG LINE CP ZTN 78 TIP RING CP B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05P C5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 R1 E1CM 50 RINGER OR EQUIVALENT 31019 W1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 4 49 External Alert Connections 4 89 25 OCTOPUS PART OF CABLE SIP LEGEND 742 ANALOG LINE CP ZTN 78 TIP RING CP B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE MOH KS2
7. START POOLED POOLED POOLED co STOP FACILITY FACILITY FACILITY OVERFLOW ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS FLAG TIME 101 102 ROUTING PATTERNS 1 8 CODE CODE CODE 110 120 130 140 FRL 0 3 FRL 0 3 FRL 0 3 FRL 0 3 111 121 131 141 a ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ALL ROUTES 100 BUSY POOLED POOLED POOLED co FACILITY FACILITY FACILITY OVERFLOW ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS FLAG OVERFLOW FLAG SET AND CO TRUNK AVAILABLE CODE CODE CODE 210 220 230 240 FRL 0 3 FRL 0 3 FRL 0 3 FRL 0 3 211 221 221 241 ROUTE SELECTED ROUTE CALL VIA DDD NETWORK DIGIT TRANSLATIONS TABLE ASSOCIATED WITH POOLED FACILITY DELETE DIGITS 1 10 ADD DIGITS 1 5 7005 Figure 2 2 Automatic Route Selection Routing Pattern 2 34 CALL ACCOUNTING SYSTEM CAS Description Call Accounting Systems help customers control telephone use and manage associated costs The following AT amp T Call Accounting Systems are available for use with System 25 e Models 200 300 500 and 2000 AT amp T PC 6300 Software Based System The System 25 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR interface provides several customer options for obtaining telephone use and cost information e Direct output to a printer Refer to the SMDR feature description for additional information e Direct
8. A microprocessor on a station port circuit pack port controller continually monitors associated port circuits for switchhook status change and button presses When a user goes off hook the port controller detects the change The port controller sends an off hook up link message along with port identification to the Call Processor Network Controller CPNC via the TDM bus The CPNC accepts the message and forwards it to the Operating System OS via the Arch Angel Driver Interface The OS checks a message directory to determine which task 1 software module is to receive the message A function of the OS referred to as the transformer determines it has a message for the Station Call Processing task and queues the message in RAM The Station Call Processing task retrieves its message and interprets it as a call origination The task determines whether there is an idle call appearance button System Access button on the called voice terminal If so two available time slots are reserved for the connection The task sends downlink messages to the port circuit via the OS The messages instruct the port circuit to listen for dial tone on a specified time slot and to light the call appearance status LED on the terminal When the user dials the first digit the port circuit determines the digit dialed It then listens to appropriate time slots on the TDM bus for the two tones used to generate an equivalent DTMF signal It the removes
9. None Administration None Hardware Requirements None 2 137 TRUNKS Description Provides a private communications link between System 25 and another PBX Incoming tie trunk calls may be directed to the attendant to a voice terminal or a data endpoint Service may be either automatic immediate dial delay dial or wink start Dial pulse or touch tone signaling is supported on both incoming and outgoing calls and may be different for incoming and outgoing calls Considerations Tie Trunks provide for efficient communications between company employees at different locations This provides a private network whose control and utilization can be managed Interactions e Conference A tie trunk that is part of a conference counts as one of two allowable outside parties e Direct Group Calling Only automatic incoming tie trunks can be directed to a DGC group e Personal Lines When a dial in tie trunk is assigned as a Personal Line and the line is used for outgoing service at the same time that a call is coming in on the line the terminal may be connected to the incoming call even though the call is intended for another terminal that shares the line For this reason it is recommended that tie trunks not be assigned as Personal Lines Administration Trunk Port Assign Trunk Type And Number Assign Class Of Service Code 0 15 Assign Facility Access Code Default 102 Allow Dial Access Yes No
10. PAGE 2 STATIONS 13 STATIONS 14 601 603 YES YES OPEATOR INTERNATIONAL NUMBER DIALED ON TOLL CALL ALLOWED LIST 64 CODES MAY BE DIVIDED INTO 4 LISTS OF ANY LENGTH TOLL ALLOWED 1 3 CALL ROUTED CALLING USER VIA LOCAL RECEIVES SYSTEM CO FACILITY REORDER TONE NO Y ROUTE CALL VIA LOCAL CO FACILITY STATION USER RECEIVES SYSTEM REORDER TONE ROUTE CALL VIA INTERNATIONAL ROUTING PATTERN 402 Figure 2 1 Automatic Route Selection Flow Chart Sheet 1 of 2 2 32 FROM PAGE 1 OUTSIDE HOME NPA FNPA NUMBER DIALED NUMBER DIALED NUMBER DIALED WITHIN HOME NPA ON FNPA ON SPECIAL NUMBERS LIST EXCEPTION YES CALL ROUTED ALL 800 900 LIST VIA ASSOCIATED AND TELEX 510 ROUTING PATTERN 610 710 AND 810 CODES 800 30 5 CALL ROUTED VIA LOCAL CO FACILITY CALL ROUTED VIA ASSOCIATED AREA CODE ON NPA ROUTING TABLE 300 YES _ ROUTING PATTERN NUMBER DIALED ON HOME NPA EXCEPTION LISTS HOME AREA CODE CALL ROUTED ON NPA ROUTING P VIA ASSOCIATED TABLE 300 ROUTING PATTERN 500 YES NO CALL ROUTED CALL ROUTED VIA LOCAL VIA CO FACILITY ASSOCIATED ROUTING PATTERN Figure 2 1 Automatic Route Selection Flow Chart Sheet 2 of 2 2 33 ROUTING SUBPATTERNS RSP AND RSP ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3
11. 104A 617A 601A 600A CODE COMCODE 103786828 403613003 100963990 103104220 103116943 103982658 103946653 103946646 845412956 T System 75 PECs are listed System 25 PECs may now be available Check before ordering 4 99 5 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION General The System software consists of switched services administrative and maintenance software This software runs on top of the real time operating system software Switched Services Software The switched services software provides voice and data call processing This software resides in the Call Processor and Memory Circuit Packs which are collectively referred to as the Common Control circuitry and in the 8 bit on board microprocessors located in the port and service circuits The switched services software uses the operating system to provide a process based message passing execution environment The operating system scheduler provides scheduling for the software according to process priority Administrative Software The administrative software provides the control for system rearrangement and change via the System Administration Terminal SAT This software resides in the Memory Circuit Pack and performs the following functions e Organizes the translation data for administrable entities in the system in a form that can be viewed and changed at the System Administration Terminal e Tests entered data for consistency with data p
12. 2 67 DICTATION SYSTEM ACCESS Description Permits access to and control of customer owned dictation equipment by voice terminal users Dictation systems may be connected either via single line voice terminal ports the preferred method or via auxiliary trunk ports if the dictation equipment requires a separate contact closure for proper operation The dictation system is accessed by dialing a PDC oppressing a DSS button Considerations Allows users to access and control shared dictation equipment Interactions Direct Inward Dialing DID A DID number may match the dictation system access code This allows an outside caller to access the dictation equipment Administration System e Requires a port assignment on a ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line or TN 742 Analog Line CP A port on a TN 763 Auxiliary Trunk CP must be used if the dictation equipment requires a separate contact closure for proper operation Voice Terminal Station Port e Assign DSS access buttons as desired Hardware Requirements Customer provided dictation equipment Port on ZTN 78 TN 742 or TN 763 CP as required Refer to Section 4 Dictation Equipment for additional information 2 68 DIRECT GROUP CALLING DGC Description Allows incoming calls to be directed to a specific group of terminals up to 32 DGC groups each including up to 10 members may be set up A terminal can be in only one DGC group Incoming calls on any trunk can be direct
13. Ground Detector Circuit This circuit determines if an answer supervision or make busy singnal from the CRP is present The ground detector s inputs come from the port circuits as an analog current to the 48 volt dc supply Its output is a port control point to the port I O circuit Port Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders for communication between the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor Port Circuits The four port circuits are identical Each port circuit consists of a codec hybrid circuit line transformer relay driver battery polarity sensor and surge protection circuit The codec is a 4 wire circuit that converts the analog signal from the CPE to a PCM data signal It converts an incoming PCM data signal from the NPE to an analog signal The hybrid circuit converts the 4 wire analog signal from the codec to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the CPE by a line transformer The relay driver buffers and inverts the relay drive signals from the port I O circuit so that a logic high input operates the appropriate relay The relays control circuitry that provide the proper interfaces for CPE The surge protection circuit provides lightning surge protection for the circuit pack The circuit pac
14. The following materials are required A Single Cabinet System 1 15 AMP 3 Wire Dedicated Branch Service 1 4 Box RACO 230 or Equiv 1 4 Cover RACO 807 or Equiv 1 Ground Bar Square D or Equiv 2 Recpt Hubbell 526215 AMP or Equiv Multiple Cabinet System 2 15 AMP 3 Wire Dedicated Branch Service 2 4 Box RACO 230 or Equiv 2 4 Cover RACO 807 or Equiv 1 Ground Bar Square D or Equiv 4 Recpt Hubbell 526215 AMP or Equiv Typically multiple cabinet systems can be powered from a single phase 120V ac 60 Hertz service two 15 amp circuits required There are no phase restrictions between cabinets Therefore the two 15 amp circuits required may be derived from single or three phase service The receptacles shall be located at least 1 foot above the floor Receptacles shall not be located further than 4 feet from the cabinets 9 6 TWO SEPARATELY FUSED 15 AMP CIRCUITS GROUND ITE GREEN QP1 B015 TWO 15 AMP CKT BRKRS OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT g LOAD CENTER NEUTRAL INSULATED FROM LOAD ENTER gt GROUND Lon 2 ul cx H lt e E els 18 2 a 0 240 30 SINGLE PHASE MAIN SINGLE POINT BOX RACO 230 Se a OR EQUIVALENT HUBBELL RECPTS 5262 15 AMP OR EQUIVALENT 4 COVER RACO 807 OR EQUIVALENT APP
15. and their PDC twice The PDC logout procedure is similar after going off hook and receiving dial tone the user enters followed by their PDC and then by a 0 A 0 entered at a voice terminal will log out all PDCs and FPDCs logged in at that voice terminal Confirmation Tone is returned to a user who completes the procedure correctly The following call types or features are voice terminal oriented associated with stations rather than PDCs and do not follow a user who logs in at another terminal e Automatic Intercom Calls e Directed Night Service calls e DGC Group Calls e DSS Calls Manual Signaling Message Waiting Outward Toll Restriction Personal Line Calls Considerations Call Following provides maximum flexibility to system users who are away from their voice terminals In addition visitors can receive calls by logging in an assigned FPDC Call coverage treatment at the away station is not the same as that given to calls directed to the away station See Coverage feature descriptions for additional information 2 43 Interactions Refer to the Personal Dial Code feature description Administration None Hardware Requirements None 2 44 CALL PARK Description Allows a user to place a call on hold and then pick up the call from any voice terminal in the system It is used in three typical applications e Call Park user places a call on hold and then picks it up at another v
16. 0 6 seconds on and 4 0 seconds off e A repeated one burst pattern indicates a call from an internal user The tone is one second on and three seconds off Abbreviated Alerting In addition to the above the system provides an abbreviated alerting signal on incoming calls to off hook multiline voice terminals These calls will ring just once The status LED associated with the incoming call will continue to flash after the abbreviated ring The user may place their current call on hold and answer the incoming call if desired Considerations Distinctive Ringing enables a user to handle each call in an appropriate manner Abbreviated alerting alerts the called party to an incoming call but does not provide the continued distraction of ringing Interactions e Call Coverage Covering stations receive distinctive ringing depending on the origin of the call receiving coverage Administration None required Hardware Requirements None 2 76 END TO END SIGNALING Description Allows multiline voice terminals to send touch tone signals over the DDD network and allows single line and multiline users to send touch tones over dial pulse trunks The 7300H series voice terminals do not generate touch tones when a dial pad button is pressed The End To End Signaling feature provides for the conversion of signals generated by these terminals to touch tones Dialed numbers are toned out for a default duration of 60 ms f
17. 1 if required by the serving Central Office Numbers preceded by a 0 are routed over the local CO pooled facility Typically a dialed 7 digit number consists of a CO code and exchange number in the form NNX YYYY where 2 9 X 0 9 and Y 0 9 A 10 digit number consists of an area code CO code and exchange number in the form NPA NNX YYYY where 2 9 P 0 1 A 2 9 0 9 and Y 0 9 An ARS pattern can consist of two subpatterns time of day determines which subpattern is selected each consisting of up to three routes associated Facility Restriction Level FRL codes described below and CO overflow flags A route is identified by specifying a Facility Access Code for the pooled facility trunk group A trunk group can be used in more than one ARS pattern and more than once within a pattern Each route in a pattern has an associated FRL 0 3 This FRL may differ each time the facility is specified as a route A facility with a FRL of O is least restricted to callers a FRL of 3 is the most restricted Similarly each station in the system is assigned an FRL 0 3 A terminal assigned of 0 has the least ARS privileges 1 routes with FRLs of 1 3 are restricted a FRL of 3 provides the most privileges A stations FRL must be equal to or greater than the routes FRL to use the route The ARS feature when accessed selects a pattern as follows Emergency Number Calls routed via the local CO
18. 2 IF RANGE IS LESS THAN 2000 FEET FROM SYSTEM CABINET USE ZTN 78 IF RANGE IS MORE THAN 2000 FEET BUT LESS THAN 1300 LODP RESISTANCE FROM CABINET USE 742 FURNISHED BY INSTALLER 1 INCLUDES TELEPHONE TERMINAL Figure 4 45 Typical ADU Connections Supporting Data Terminal And Single Line Voice Terminal 4 85 SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP Y ADAPT MP90851 gt LEGEND TERMINAL ZTN 79 HYBRID LINE TN 726 DATA LINE C P WP90851 L1 MODULAR Y ADAPTER 2750 05 B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C7 MODULAR CORD D6AP 87 SEE BELOM Pi KS22811 POWER SUPPLY SEE BELOW 1 7800H SERIES VOICE TERMINALS 1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE Z3A5 ADU FT PLUG ENDED CORD FURNISHED BY INSTALLER PEC 62506 INCLUDES Z3A5 ADU AND ONE D8M CORD C1 62510 INCLUDES P1 AND C7 VOICE TERMINAL Figure 4 46 Typical ADU Connections Supporting Data Terminal And 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminal 4 86 TO RS 232C DEVICE OPTIONAL SINGLE LINE S 2 TELEPHONE JACK AC POWER 222 OUTLET lt 20120 POWER TRANSFORMER 248B ADAPTER 400B ADAPTER D6AP 87 CORD 4 PAIR 08 CORD 2725 076 gt N gt WALL JACK lt lt Q gt r mI D8AM 87 CROSSOVER CORD IF REQUIRED
19. 2991605 2993C04 AND 2991005 TEN BUTTON MET SETS USE ZD8AJ 87 ADAPTER CORD C9 AND C1 7203M SET 12 BUTTON MET SET USES Ci ONLY 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE MODULARIZES 2012D TRANSFORMER POMER ADAPTER 15 18V AC TRANSFORMER MODULAR CORD D6AP 87 21691 NOTE ONLY SET WITH BUILT IN SPEAKERPHONE 2993004 REQUIRES TRANSFORMER AND ADAPTERS OTHERWISE PLUG C1 INTO B1 DIRECTLY FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 4 34 Ten Button Met Set Connnections 4 74 SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE 8 PART OF SIP VOICE TERMINAL t TYPICAL ADJUNCT LEGEND ZTN 79 HYBRID LINE CP 1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05 SPECIAL CORD FURNISHED WITH ADJUNCT T1 7300H SERIES VOICE TERMINALS EXCEPT 34 BUTTON DELUXE W1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER 1 TYPICAL ADJUNCTS S102A SPEAKERPHONE PEC 3163 HFU 502A HEADSET ADAPTER 3164 HFA Figure 4 35 Typical Adjunct Connects for 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminals Except 34 Button Deluxe Set 4 75 SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE 2 PART OF SIP t TYPICAL ADJUNCT LEGEND ZTN 79 HYBRID LINE CP B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE CABLE WP90780 2720 05P C8 SPECIAL CORD FURNISHED WITH ADJUNCT
20. Cable B25A 15 DE D181524 includes 278A Adapter KS22911 L1 Pwr Unit D4BY Cord 14ft D181321 kit zener D181575 includes KS233395 Interface 2012D Transformer 36A Voice Coupler Emergency Trans Unit 2 B25A Cables DE D8W 87 Cord TN 742 TN 735 TN 753 TN 760B TN 763 TN 758 TN 748 TN 726 73 1 73 4 20120 248 40082 D6AP 87 WP90780L1 COMCODE 105105514 103942857 102937620 403242639 105105522 10009968 100017334 105105530 103871844 403242639 102999059 105031181 103984118 100017334 103786794 103556957 103556882 103557062 103975645 103557161 103557112 103557112 103556791 103963963 103964185 102600517 102802103 103848859 102937620 405010612 DESCRIPTION APPARATUS CODE COMCODE 2720 05X Splitter CBL Tie Trunk OR6015 4038364150 2720 06X Splitter CBL CO Trunk 6016 403836620 2720 02 Adapter 600 103946646 2720 TO3 Mod 110 Adapter 601A 103946653 2724 30C RS232X Over Cable M7U 87 i 2724 38X Mod ADU Cord D8AM 87 104154430 4 2725 07G Mod Cord D8W 87 2750 A17 Adapter Cord ZD8AJ 2750 A24 Mod RS232 Adapt Male 355A 105012637 2750 A25 4 8232 Adapt Female 355 105012645 2750 05 Voice Data Y Adapter WP90851L1 405010620 2771 JIDX System Wiring i i Time And Materials 2772 JA1 New System Wiring I Run Firm Price 2772 JA2 Reuse System Wiring i 4 Run Firm Price 2772 JC1 System Wiring
21. DETECTORS REGISTERS SYSTEM CLOCK Figure 3 19 Service Circuit ZTN 85 3 41 EZ Bus Buffers There are four bus buffers the circuit pack The clock driver and receive buffers interface three system clock signals 2 048 MHz 8 kHz and 160 kHz to the TDM bus Two buffers interface the system tones see between the TDM bus and the Service Circuit Circuit Pack Music is not provided by the Service Circuit but may be provided a port interface on a Tip Ring Line Circuit Pack ZTN 78 SAKI This circuit functions the same as in the SAKI in the common circuitry for the intelligent port circuits On Board Microprocessor With External RAM This circuit functions the same as the microprocessor in the common circuitry for the intelligent port circuits In addition it tells the dual port RAM in the time slot table circuit the appropriate time slots in which to place a tone The external RAM also has work space for complex tones i e those tones that vary with time Clock Circuit The clock circuit consists of a 20 48 MHz oscillator various dividers and shift registers The clock circuit runs independently from the rest of the Service Circuit circuitry The clock circuits start running when the circuit pack is first powered up and is not controlled by the on board microprocessor The output of the 20 48 MHz oscillator is fed to the clock divider The divider divides by 10 2560 and 128 These circuits produce the 2 048 M
22. Default Yes Assign To DGC Group Group Number 1 32 or 0 for none Default 0 Make This a Directed Flex Night Service Trunk Yes No Default Yes Assign Night Service Delay Announcement 1 2 or 0 for none Default 0 Dial Inward Capability Tone or Pulse Default Pulse Hardware Requirements Requires port interfaces on a TN 760B Tie Trunk CP 2 138 TOUCH TONE AND DIAL PULSE SERVICES Description All single line voice terminals and MET sets are equipped with thouch tone dial pads that generate Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF signals when dial button is pressed The 7300H series MERLIN voice terminals are equipped with touch dial pads that generate digitally coded signals when a dial button is pressed Touch Tone Dial Pads On outgoing calls on trunks requiring touch tone signals cut through dialing is provided Where the trunk requires dial pulse signals conversion of the touch tone signals to dial pulses is provided until an end of dialing signal is detected Touch Dial Pads On outgoing calls on trunks requiring touch tone signals all dialed digits are converted to touch tone signals Where the trunk requires dial pulse signals the dialed digits are converted to dial pulses until an end of dialing signal is detected Cut through is then provided and all subsequent digits are converted to touch tone signals A user may elect to indicate the end of dialing by pressing subsequent digits are imm
23. Dial numbers To program a button or Personal Speed Dial number 1 Press a System Access button 2 Go off hook 3 Dial 4 4 Dial the PDC to be associated with a Flex DSS button or the telephone number or account code to be associated with a REP DIAL button For Repertory Dial numbers and numbers associated with Speed Dialing dial every place a 1 5 second pause is required in the digit string Should the number require more digits than are free in the common speed dial repertory dial memory approximately 5000 digits Reorder Tone will be returned after step 4 5 Press the button the Flex DSS or Repertory Dial number is to be assigned to or dial the Personal Speed Dial code 20 26 the telephone number is to be associated with 6 Listen for Confirmation Tone The terminal will remain in program mode until the user goes on hook or timeout occurs 10 seconds 7 Hang up programming is complete In addition to the above procedure MERLIN terminal users may follow this alternative procedure 1 Slide Test Program switch to P 2 Go off hook on a System Access button 3 Complete Steps 4 through 7 above 4 Slide Test Program switch to the center off position If a user enters program mode and does not press any buttons for 60 seconds the system will provide a burst of ringing and reset the timer for subsequent reminders 2 118 Note deprogramming steps below only required if you want to remove
24. Figure 4 16 4A Speakerphone System 4 40 Figure 4 17 5101 5102 Speakerphone 4 41 Figure 4 18 Attendant Consoles 4 44 Figure 4 19 Model 23A1 Attendant Direct Extension Selector DXS Console 4 46 Figure 4 20 Asynchronous Data Unit ADU 4 48 Figure 4 26 10B Emergency Transfer Unit ETU 4 64 Figure 4 27 Emergency Transfer Unit Connections 4 65 Figure 4 29 On Premises Single Line Voice Terminal Connections 4 69 Figure 4 30 Out Of Building Single Line Voice Terminal Connections Figure 4 31 Off Premises Station Single Line Voice Terminal Connections 4 71 Figure 4 32 On Premises 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminal Connections 4 72 Figure 4 33 Out Of Building 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminal Connections Figure 4 34 Ten Button Met Set Connections 4 74 Figure 4 35 Typical Adjunct Connections For 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminals Except 34 Button Deluxe Set 4 75 Figure 4 36 Typical Adjunct Connections For 34 Button Deluxe Voice Terminal Includes Attendant Direct Trunk Console Figure 4 37 Typical Adjunct Connections For 12 Button MET Set iii Figure 4 38 Attendant Direct Trunk Console Connections 4 78 Figure 4 39 Attendant Direct Extension Selector Console Connections 4 79 Figure 4 40 Typical Peripheral Equipment On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet 4 80 Figure 4 41 Typical Peripheral Equipment On Premises Direct Connections Greater Than 50 Feet From System Cabinet 4 81 Figure 4
25. Provides a recorded announcement to an outside caller who has been placed in queue for a DGC group Direct Inward Dialing An incoming DID call may match a DGC group access code Direct Station Selection DSS A DSS button can be assigned to a DGC group The associated LED lights steadily when all stations in the group are busy Modem Pooling Modem Pooling supports calls to data endpoints that are part of a DGC group While an incoming data call is in a DGC group queue the caller receives ringing The conversion resource is inserted if the call is completed to a digital endpoint Personal Lines An outside line directed to a DGC group can be assigned button appearances in addition to the DGC group assignment When an incoming call is ringing at a DGC group the status LED on the voice terminal button appearance lights steadily indicating that the line is busy If the call goes unanswered for a pre determined number of rings and no delay announcement is provided ringing will be transferred to all button appearances of the line and the status LED will flash busy Station Hunting Calls directed to a DGC group do not hunt Station Message Detail Recording SMDR For an incoming call to a DGC group which is connected to an announcement and never answered 0 will be reported in the STN field of the call record If the call is answered by a station after receiving the announcement that station will be listed in the STN field Ad
26. TABLE 4 A Total Port Circuit Packs Per System 4 TABLE 4 C Supplemental Voice Terminal Power Supplies 4 43 TABLE 4 D Z3A Asynchronous Data Units ADUs 4 49 TABLE 8 A Central Office Trunk Recommendations 8 17 3 5 TABLE 2 D Data Features 5 7 1 OVERVIEW This manual provides general technical information on AT amp T System 25 System 25 It includes a description of the system its hardware and software features and services environmental requirements and technical specifications This manual is intended to serve as an overall technical reference for System 25 Organization The manual is divided into 12 Sections The remaining Sections are as follows 2 FEATURES AND SERVICES 3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SECTION 4 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION e SECTION 5 bOFTWARE DESCRIPTION e 6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION 7 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS e SECTION 10 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION e SECTION 11 GLOSSARY e SECTION 12 INDEX 1 1 System 25 Overview System 25 is an advanced digital switching system which integrates voice and data communications It not only provides the features of a state of the art PBX but goes a step further by allowing digital data to be switched point to point without first being converted to analog format This capability can be used to set up connections between data terminals word processors personal computers and host comput
27. Terminal x hunts to Terminal y 2 Terminal y hunts to Terminal z and 3 Terminal z does not hunt An incoming call to a busy terminal in the chain will hunt in one direction only Hunting will be toward the terminal that does not hunt Circular Hunting Example Voice terminals x y and z are arranged for circular hunting as follows 1 Terminal x hunts to Terminal y 2 Terminal y hunts to Terminal z and 3 Terminal z hunts to Terminal x An incoming call to a busy terminal in the chain hunts in one direction until it finds an idle terminal and then rings at that terminal Any call coverage options assigned to that terminal will then be invoked If the hunt finds all terminals busy it will stop at the called terminal Any call coverage options e g call coverage on busy assigned that voice terminal will then be invoked Combinational Hunting Example Voice terminals w x and y all hunt to terminal z An incoming call to a busy w x or y voice terminal will ring at terminal z and any call coverage options assigned that terminal will be invoked If terminal z is busy the call remains at the called voice terminal Any call coverage options assigned the called terminal will then be invoked 2 127 Considerations Station Hunting provides several flexible alternatives to insure that calls do not go unanswered Note that only calls to busy terminals will hunt once a call begins ringing at a terminal it will remain there unl
28. Up to two TN 748 Tone Detectors may be provided in a system TN 758 Pooled Modem Provides two integrated 212 modem compatible conversion resources for switched connections between analog endpoints modems or a digital endpoint and an analog endpoint A maximum of two TN 758s 4 conversion resources is permitted in each cabinet 4 8 Station Port Circuit Packs e 726 Data Line Provides eight ports for Asynchronous Data Units ADUs Used for in building service within 2000 feet of the system cabinets Data speeds from 300 bps to 19 2 Kbps are supported Service beyond 2000 feet at less than 19 2 Kbps is supported see Section 8 Technical Specifications Extends a serial communications link from the system to data equipment over standard station wiring e TN 735 MET Line Provides four ports for Multibutton Electronic Telephone MET sets Used for in building service within 1000 feet of the system cabinets e TN 742 Analog Line Provides eight ports for single line voice terminals with or without a message waiting lamp Also supports Off Premises Stations OPS and out of building service Auxiliary equipment interfaces are also supported Used for service within 24 000 feet of the system cabinets Five voice terminals may be bridged onto each port Only two terminals may be off hook simultaneously on each port otherwise transmission may be degraded NOTE The Off Premises Stations must be FCC registered e ZIN 78Tip
29. deactivated or canceled has been accepted 11 3 Console See Attendant Console Coverage Call A call that is redirected from he called party s personal dial code to an alternate answering position when certain criteria are met Coverage Path The order in which calls are redirected to alternate answering positions Coverage Point The attendant positions as a group Direct Group Call DGC group Coverage Answer Group or a voice terminal extension designated as an alternate answerimg position in a coverage path Covering User The person at an alternate answering position who answers a redirected call DCE Data Communications Equipment DDC Data Dial Code DDD Direct Distance Dialing DID Direct Inward Dialing DGC Direct Group Call DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTU Digital Tape Unit DTMF Dual Tone Multifrequency DXS Direct Extension Selector Data Channel A communications path between two points used to transmit digital signals Data Communications Equipment DCE Refers to a specific RS 232C interface connector configuration DCE devices are designed to interface directly pin for pin to Data Terminal Equipment DTE The transmit and receive pins are reversed from that of a DTE interface modem is example of a DCE device Data End Point Two general groups those having a DTE type interface which encompasses almost all of the data terminal devices and the group of DCE inter
30. feature description After going off hook on a System Access button receiving system dial tone and dialing a facility access code the user will be connected to an idle trunk provided the terminal is not access restricted and provided that dial access is permitted to trunks in the group The LEDs associated with the System Access button will be lighted and the user may complete the call Single line users do not receive LED indications of the status of the pool An attempt to originate a call on a busy facility will result in Reorder Tone fast busy Considerations Pooled Facility Dial Access provides users of single line terminals or multiline voice terminals without Pooled Facility Access FACILITY buttons access to the system s pooled facilities Interactions e Direct Inward Dialing DID Access to pooled facilities via DID is permitted This includes access to WATS FX Tie trunks private lines dictation equipment and paging systems This access is provided by selecting facility access codes so that they will match DID numbers Outward and Facility Access Restriction see Calling Restrictions terminal can be denied access to some or all pooled facilities For example a dial 9 restricted terminal will receive Reorder Tone when 9 is dialed Toll Restriction see Restrictions Denies the use of pooled facilities for toll calls but does not block access to the pooled facilities Administratio
31. or 2157 Incoming DID numbers that don t match any dial code may optionally be directed to the Attendant Console or to Reorder Tone If the DID number received is a valid dial code the caller is provided either Ringback Tone Busy Tone or the tone from a pooled facility e g Dial Tone as soon as addressing is completed Busy Tone is provided if and only if the call cannot be completed to the intended voice terminal and cannot be provided coverage DID calls appear at System Access buttons on multiline voice terminals they do not have other button appearances These calls can be forwarded transferred to a covering station answered via Call Pickup Hunt or directed to a DGC Group A DID call is not automatically covered on the Attendant Console DID trunks may utilize DID Immediate Start Wink Start or Delay Dial protocols Refer to Section 11 for a brief description of each of these trunk types Considerations Direct Inward Dialing frees the attendant from handling certain incoming calls Interactions e Attendant Camp On DID calls are not provided Attendant Camp On treatment nor will they appear on the Attendant Console Return On Busy or Return On Don t Answer buttons unless they are first answered at the attendant position and are subsequently extended by the attendant Attendant Direct Extension Selection DXS Console LEDs respond to DID calls just as they do for other outside calls When a user answers a DID call the
32. 1 7305H02B VOICE TERMINAL 34 BUTTON DELUXE Wi 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE C7 MODULAR CORD D6AP 87 P1 KS 22911 POWER SUPPLY PEC 62510 Z400F ADAPTER FURNISHED BY INSTALLER TYPICAL ADJUNCTS 5102 SPEAKERPHONE 3163 HFU 502A HEADSET ADAPTER PEC 3164 HFA Figure 4 36 Typical Adjunct Connections For 34 Button Deluxe Voice Terminal Includes Attendant Direct Trunk Console 4 76 SYSTEM 25 PART OF OCTOPUS TYPICAL ADJUNCT LEGEND TN 735 MET LINE B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C8 SPECIAL CORD FURNISHED WITH ADJUNCT T1 7203M SET 12 BUTTON MET SET W1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE 248B ADAPTER MODULARIZES 20120 TRANSFORMER 40082 ADAPTER POWER ADAPTER PEC 21691 20120 TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC TRANSFORMER C7 MODULAR CORD 06 87 FURNISHED BY INSTALLER T TYPICAL ADJUNCTS 101 SPEAKERPHONE 31711 500 31712 Figure 4 37 Typical Adjunct Connections For 12 Button MET Set 4 77 SYSTEM 25 PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP ATTENDANT CONSOLE T 1 LEGEND ZTN 79 HYBRID LINE CP Bi TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P 1 7305H02B
33. 2 If the endpoint answers the displayed message is ANSWERED internal calls only Then if the handshake succeeds a data connection is established For outside calls when the system has finished dialing the message COMPLETED is displayed 3 If the handshake fails because a connection cannot be established between endpoints e g a port optioned at 9600 baud attempts to talk to a conversion resource that can only talk at 300 or 1200 baud the user receives INCOMPATIBLE FAR END DISCONNECTED and the data endpoint goes on hook If the far end does not answer the caller must press Break to terminate the call attempt If the disposition of the call is such that TRY AGAIN or BUSY indicating reorder or intercept and busy respectively is received the switch sends DISCONNECTED to the data terminal which goes on hook Answering Endpoint When the dialed end point is alerted the user receives INCOMING CALL the called terminal will auto answer if it is turned on If the handshake succeeds a data connection is established and the CONNECTED message is displayed if so optioned If the handshake fails the user receives INCOMPATIBLE FAR END DISCONNECTED and the data endpoint goes on hook 2 55 TABLE 2 Call Progress Messages for Data Terminal Dialing Displayed Message Application Meaning Placing a call Equivalent to dial tone Enter any required facility number followed by the dialed number and a RETURN RINGING
34. 42 Typical Peripheral Equipment On Premises Switched Connections 4 82 Figure 4 43 Typical Peripheral Equipment Off Premises Direct Connections 4 83 Figure 4 44 Typical Peripheral Equipment Off Premises Switched Connections 4 84 Figure 4 45 Typical ADU Connections Supporting Data Terminal And Single Line Voice Terminal 4 85 Figure 4 46 Typical ADU Connections Supporting Data Terminal And 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminal Figure 4 47 73 1 2 4 ADU Local Power Connections 4 87 Figure 4 48 Dictation System Connections FCC Registered 4 88 Figure 4 49 External Alert Connections 4 89 Figure 4 50 Music On Hold Equipment Connections FCC Registered 4 90 Figure 4 51 Music On Hold Equipment Connections Non Registered 4 91 Figure 4 52 Paging Equipment Connections Using CO Trunk Ports FCC Registered 4 92 Figure 4 53 Paging Equipment Connections Using Auxiliary Trunk Ports FCC Registered Or Non Registered 4 93 Figure 4 54 Delay Announcement Equipment Connections FCC Registered 4 94 5 4 8 6 Figure 5 1 System Software Partitioning Figure 8 1 Single Line Voice Terminal Allowable Cable Distances Figure 8 3 Asynchronous Data Unit Allowable Cable Distances 8 8 Figure 9 1 Typical System 25 Equipment Area Floor Plan 9 2 Figure 9 2 Typical System 25 Equipment Area Elevation Plan 9 3 Figure 9 3 AC Power Distribution Multiple Cabinet System 9 7 ix LIST OF TABLES 2 TABLE 2 C Attendant Features
35. 500 720 contains a complete set of operating instructions for the Model 703 Data Terminal This document may be of use to customers who want to use the terminal for other purposes in addition to system administration All the information needed to use the terminal as a SAT is included in the System 25 Administration Manual 555 500 500 The SAT can be connected to the system cabinets in several different ways e A direct connection within 50 feet when sharing the same AC outlet as the system cabinets e A direct on premises connection at a distance greater than 50 feet from the system cabinets e A direct off premises connection via the Central Office OPS or CO trunk e An on premises switched connection e An off premises switched connection Maximum cabling distances from the system cabinets are provided in Technical Specifications Installation details are provided in the System 25 Installation and Test Manual 555 500 100 4 50 SAT may also be provided by the customer It must be RS 232C compatible terminal with the following characteristics Display The minimum display size is 16 lines by 80 columns The port provides both carriage return and line feed characters to position the cursor at the start of the next line Destructive scrolling is also expected new lines added at the bottom of the screen and top most lines disappear Full duplex operation is required Alphabetic ASCII characters in both upper case and l
36. 726 signals on ADU pins 2 TD and 20 DTR Terminal Via ADU and ground on either pin 1 or 7 The ADU furnishes signals on pins 3 RD and 8 CD The CD signal is also tied to pins 5 CTS and 6 DSR Some data terminals may require auxiliary power when used with a 73 1 Z3A2 or Z3A4 ADU the Z3A5 always requires local power The lists data terminals that have been tested and are known to operate properly without auxiliary power Note Refer to Cable Distance Limitations for supported data rates 8 11 Port Specifications Contd DATA TERMINALS Do Not Require Local Power Data Requires Z3A1 Requires Terminal or Z3A2 ADU Z3A4 ADU ADDS Viewpoint ConCept HDS 108 x Datamedia Elite 1521 x Hazeltine 1510 x Hewlett Packard 2621A 2623A 2640 2645 2645A Teletype BLIT 1 68000 based 5620 MAC 80 based 5420 Requires Originate Disconnect Switch Port Specifications Contd VOICE TERMINAL PORTS STATION TYPE CIRCUIT PACK SPECIFICATIONS Tip and Ring Tip Ring Line Single Line Sets ZTN 78 Analog e Analog signals modulated over DC loop eLoop Voltage 24V dc el Pair Interface Tip and Ring e Signaling Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF only eREN max 1 2 eDC Current max 35 mA eLoop Range 24 AWG 2 000 feet eln building service only Tip and Ring Analog Line Single Line Sets TN 742 Analog e Analog signals modulated over DC loop el Pair Interface Tip an
37. 77 Loop Start Trunk Provides eight ports for loop start CO FX or WATS trunks Refer to Section 11 for Ground Start and Loop Start definitions Ground Start trunks are recommended for use where possible Trunk specifications are provided in Technical Specifications Circuit Pack Compatibility The following System 75 CPs may be used in System 25 if required The TN 742 Analog Line may be used instead of the ZTN 78 Tip Ring CP The TN 742 supports bridged stations and out of building or Off Premises Stations OPS the ZTN 78 does not The TN 762B Hybrid Line Version 4 or later may be used instead of the ZTN 79 The TN 747 CO Trunk may be used instead of the ZTN 76 Ground Start Trunk or the ZTN 77 Loop Start Trunk Circuit Pack Features All system CPs have the following features Solid state circuitry mounted 7 6 by 14 1 inch printed wiring board TN type e Color coded face plate labels identify the CP type and function White Control Purple Port or System Resource e Individual circuit functions all contained on one e Metal tab for grounding e Locking tab type handle provides easy insertion or removal of a CP e Port CPs may be inserted or removed with power On and the system processing calls Only the calls utilizing circuits on a removed CP will be affected Note Power must be turned off when replacing the following CPs Memory ZTN 81B Call Processor ZTN 82 Service Circuit ZTN
38. A separate Data button must be provided for each data terminal that the voice terminal can transfer calls to The Data button status LED provides status indications for the data endpoint Dark Data endpoint is idle e Winking Data endpoint is reserved e Flashing Data endpoint is being alerted to an incoming call e Steadily Lighted Data endpoint off hook busy The Data button status LED will wink only when a voice terminal reserves a data endpoint by Data Call Preindication Data Call Origination Using One Button Transfer to Data A voice terminal user after calling a DDC or a PDC to reach an analog data endpoint receives either answer tone or called party answer respectively The user then transfers the call to the associated data terminal by pressing DATA and hanging up The called party may also use One Button Transfer To Data to transfer the call to a data terminal An inside call cannot be transferred via One Button Transfer To Data until the far end answers If a handshake failure occurs after One Button Transfer To Data the data call will be disconnected and the data terminal left in the idle on hook state Note Even if the associated data terminal is optioned for autobaud the call will be set up at the highest common speed that the calling and called data terminals are administered for independent of the current data terminal settings Data Call Preindication A multiline voice terminal user by going off
39. Attendant Return Coverage On Busy allows the attendant to service calls not answered within specified time intervals This provides the calling party better service and results in fewer lost calls Interactions e Attendant Camp On Calls released when Busy Tone is heard will be camped on e Attendant Console As long as an Attendant Console remains active the call will return to the attendant who transferred it e Attendant Direct Extension Selection If a call to a Floating PDC FPDC is returned to the attendant on the RTN BUSY button the FPDCs status LED on the DXS Console will flash during ringing and light steadily when the call is answered Administration System e Assign number of seconds before unanswered camped on calls return to Attendant Position 1 120 seconds or 0 for No Camp On Default 30 seconds Hardware Requirements None ATTENDANT RETURN COVERAGE DON T ANSWER Description Allows unanswered calls extended by the attendant to be returned to the attendant for additional service Calls that are not answered after a specified number of rings will transfer ringing to the Return On Don t Answer RTN DA button on the Attendant Console If the called voice terminal has call coverage the timing for return begins only after the coverage station begins ringing When the RTN DA button is busy calls will continue to ring at the called station until the button is idle To answer a returned call the at
40. Busy 2 DSS User programmed Flex DSS numbers 3 Login PDCs logged in at a home station or an away station remain logged in there 4 DGC Availability Unavailability If a voice terminal has been removed not removed from a DGC group the terminal will remain in that state 5 Repertory Dial Numbers 6 System Translations All system station features programmed with the SAT are retained Considerations Power Failure Transfer provides emergency incoming and outgoing telecommunications service to a number of predesignated single line voice terminals This is particularly important for organizations providing public services such as fire police medical etc Interactions None 2 116 Administration None Required 2 Hardware Requirements H An Emergency Transfer Unit is required for each five Power Failure Transfer terminals Terminals connected to Ground Start trunks must be equipped with a 55 1 Ground Start Button Only FCC registered single line voice terminals may be used for PFT stations Rotary sets must be used for dial pulse PFT trunks These sets can only be used during a PFT Refer to Section 4 10 Emergency Transfer Unit for additional information Connectivity information is also provided 2 117 PROGRAM Description Multiline voice terminal users can program Repertory Dial REP DIAL and Flex DSS FLEX DSS buttons Multiline and single line terminal users can program personal Speed
41. CP Figure 3 6 Equipment Connected To System 25 Via The Call Processor And Port Circuit Packs Sheet 1 of 3 PART OF DIGITAL SWITCH SAT DTU SMDR CAS ON PREMISES ZTN 82 CALL DIRECT CONNECTION REQUIRED FOR CONNECTIONS gt 50 FEET 2 SMDR CAS OR NOT SHARING SAME AC OUTLET 3 DTU 4 RESERVED SAT SMDR 23A1 4 ADU 726 TN DATA LINE 726 DATA LINE CP CAS ON PREMISES SWITCHED CONNECTION ZTN 82 CALL TIME PROCESSOR CP MULTIPLEX SAT SMDR CAS OFF PREMISES DIRECT CONNECTION MODEM MODEM 212 TYPE 212 TYPE SAT SMDR CAS OFF PREMISES SWITCHED 1 MODEM 212 BUS ZTN 82 CALL PROCESSOR CP 742 ANALOG LINE ZTN 76 GROUND START TRUNK CP OR ZTN 77 LOOP START TRUNK TN 726 DATA LINE CP TOFF PREMISES STATION OR CO TRUNK ZTN 82 CALL PROCESSOR CP Figure 3 6 Equipment Connected To System 25 Via The Call Processor And Port Circuit Packs Sheet 2 of 3 3 14 PART OF DIGITAL SWITCH RS 232C 726 EQUIPMENT HOST COMPUTER DATA LINE CP Z3A1 2 4 SINGLE LINE 742 VOICE TERMINAL ANALOG LINE OR ZTN 78 TIP RING LINE CP 2500 TYPE OR 71014 DATA TERMINAL pg_ogoc EQUIPMENT HOST COMPUTER MULTILINE VOICE TERMINAL 7300H TYPE TN 726 DATA LINE CP Ww ZTN 79 ATL LIN
42. In general it carries out commands received from the Common Control and reports status changes to it The external RAM stores control channel information and port related information NPEs Network Processing Element Each port circuit pack contains one or two NPEs The Analog Line ATL Line Tip Ring Data Line Ground Start Loop Start and DID Trunk circuit packs contain two NPEs The MET Line Auxiliary Trunk and Tie Trunk Circuit Packs contain one NPE The NPEs perform switching network functions for the port circuits Under control of the on board microprocessor an NPE can connect a port circuit to any one of the TDM bus time slots More specifically it allows a port circuit to talk on one time slot and listen to the same time slot NPE sidetone and on up to four other time slots at the same time In 2 wire circuits that provide their own sidetone the NPE sidetone is not used Circuit Pack Address Leads Seven leads 0 6 are tied to corresponding logic levels to uniquely identify each CP slot in the system including multiple cabinet systems The logic values on leads BA4 and BAS are used to identify the cabinet Cabinet 1 2 or 3 and are tied via the cabinet address plugs to either 5V dc or ground as appropriate Lead BA6 is tied to ground TOM BUS LEADS BUS BUFFERS PORT SPECIFIC CIRCUITRY NETWORK BUS CIRCUIT PACK ADDRESS LEADS ADDRESS AND DATA BUS ON BOARD MICRO PROCESSO
43. North American NPA each with an associated ARS Routing Pattern All NPAs are assigned Routing Pattern 1 by default FNPA Special Numbers List Routes all 800 900 and Telex 510 610 710 and 810 numbers via the local CO trunk group not administerable FNPA Exception List One List with up to 32 eight digit numbers Each entry has an associated ARS Routing Pattern Digit Translations Tables One per trunk group pooled facility 16 tables maximum A system can have up to eight ARS Routing Patterns assigned Each pattern can contain up to six routes three per subpattern Interactions Calling Restrictions Outward Restriction and Toll Restriction when administered prevent calls from routing via ARS Pooled facility access restrictions do not apply In fact the recommended arrangement to insure that users make maximum use of ARS is to block dial access to most trunk groups so that users must dial the ARS access code to place calls Pooled Facility Button Access Multiline voice terminal users who have pressed FACILITY to activate the busy to idle reminder must wait until all queued ARS users have been serviced Administration System ARS Specify your area code HNPA ARS Access Code 1 9999 Default 9 International ARS Routing Pattern Number 1 8 No default 2 30 Three Emergency Numbers Lists 7 digit numbers No default NPA Routing Table NPA code and associated pattern number 1 8 Default 1
44. Note that System 25 cannot detect tones such as a second dial tone for end to end signaling End to End Signaling Data connections to off premises destinations require that a conversion resource be inserted into the connection Occasionally it is necessary to send additional tones to the remote endpoint after the connection is established to signal the remote equipment A mark character must be included on the DIAL line to indicate to call processing that the remaining digits are to be sent to the far end prior to insertion of the conversion resource into the connection The mark character marks the boundary between the digits dialed to reach a distant endpoint and the digits used by that distant endpoint after it has answered Pause characters may and usually should follow a mark character An example using a mark character and several pause characters is shown below Dashes are included for readability 2 54 Examples of dialing as follows e DIAL 3478 e DIAL 9 1 201 946 8123 5678 e DIAL 9 946 8123 5678 137 110 Call Disposition Call progress messages corresponding to call progress tones provided to voice terminals are listed in Table 2 F The message supplied indicating reorder busy ringback depends the disposition of the call 1 When ringback is received the displayed message is RINGING internal calls only For outside calls the corresponding call progress message is DIALING
45. On during a call by pressing the On Off switch and hanging up the handset Considerations Hands free speakerphone operation allows users to perform other activities while carrying on a conversation Speakerphones also facilitate conference calls Interactions None Administration None required Hardware Requirements The 2500SM single line voice terminals and 2991 type MET sets require a 4A Speakerphone System The 7300H series MERLIN 10 button 34 button and 34 button deluxe terminals require a S102A Speakerphone Module PEC 3163 HFU The 7203M type MET sets require a S101A Speakerphone Module Connectivity information is provided in Hardware Description 2 124 SPEED DIALING Description There are two types of Speed Dialing 1 System Speed Dialing and 2 Personal Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing Allows all users to dial selected numbers using three digit codes Examples of typical Speed Dial numbers are DDD numbers together with leading facility access codes for WATS FX etc and local access numbers for OCCs Users can dial 90 Speed Dial codes 100 189 Each System Speed Dial code represents a stored number that can be up to 28 characters in length The stored Speed Dial numbers may contain the digits 0 9 and the Pause character The character in the Speed Dial string is used to activate the Pause feature These numbers are programmed at the SAT A user cannot use a Speed Dial number fo
46. Premises Direct Connections Figure _4 44 Typical Peripheral Equipment Off Premises Switched Connections Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading later in this Section Maximum cabling distances from the system cabinets to the SAT are provided in Technical Specifications 4 51 gt ite JEE IEE SHIFT Figure 4 21 Model 703 System Administration Terminal Digital Tape Unit DTU The Digital Tape Unit Figure 4 22 is a RS 232C device used to record administration translations The Unit does not encode the translations data as it records nor does it require decoding circuitry when playing back restoring recorded data Data is recorded and transmitted at 1200 bps The DTU requires 115V commercial power from a 3 wire grounded outlet It should be located on a desk or table top The recorder is approximately 5 inches wide 2 inches high and 10 inches long The DTU must be directly connected to port 3 on the Call Processor ZTN 82 CP Remote switched connections are not supported Maximum cabling distances are provided in Technical Specifications 115V AC 00000000000000000000000000000000000 2 00000000000000000000
47. RING LOOP RESISTANCE FROM SYSTEM CABINETS INCLUDING VOI CE TERMINAL MUST NOT EXCEED 1300 OHMS FIVE SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINALS CAN BE BRIDGED WHEN USING THE TN 742 HOWEVER ONLY TWO MAY BE OFF HOOK AT ONE TIME Figure 8 1 Single Line Voice Terminal Allowable Cable Distances 8 6 Multiline Voice Terminals SUPPORTING 24 GAUGE WIRE 26 GAUGE WIRE CIRCUIT 0 5106 mm 0 4049 mm FEET METERS FEET METERS ZTN 79 7300H Series In Building or 1 000 305 633 Out Of Building no OPS TN 735 2991 05 2991005 2993 04 1 000 305 633 7302 M In Building MET Sets only PACK IN BUILDING ZTN 79 7300H SERIES HYBRID LINE VOICE TERMINALS SET 48 1000 FEET OUT OF BUILDING LTN 79 7300H SERIES HYBRID LINE 0 CE TERMI NALS SET LEGEND ROB IN RANGE OF BUILDING 2 IROB PROTECTI ON DEVI CES REQUI RED IN BUILDING 2991 05 2991005 2993C04 AND lt 1000 FEET TN 735 1320 LINE VOICE TERMINALS MODEL 2993C04 MET EQUIPPED WITH BIS REQUIRES 20120 POWER UNIT 15 18V AC Figure 8 2 Multiline Voice Terminal Allowable Cable Distances 8 7 Data Terminals RS 232C Connected Asynchronous Data Units DATA RATE 24 GAUGE WIRE 26 GAUGE WIRE 0 5106 mm 0 4049 mm FEET METERS FEET METERS 300 bps e 1 200 bps 2 000 bps 4 800 bps 9600 bps e 19 200 bps DISTANCE SEE TABLE ADU RS 232C DEVICE ASYNCHRONOUS
48. Repertory Dial 3 Flex DSS 3 Send All Calls and Account Code Entry 4 22 I USE STATUS LEDs SYSTEM ACCESS 2 PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS 3 TEST PROGRAM PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS 5 HANDSET TOUCH DIAL PAD DROP C1 HOLD SPEAKER RING VOLUME CONTROL SWITCH SPEAKER RECALL MESSAGE Figure 4 7 Ten Button Voice Terminal 7303H01B 4 23 e 34 Button Voice Terminal 7305H01B 3162 412 The 34 button terminal can be desk or wall mounted and is approximately 10 1 4 inches 5 1 2 inches high and 8 1 2 inches long This set is available only on a reuse basis and is not orderable via the Delivery Support System DOSS Configurator The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Dial Pad not Use and Status LEDs Test Program Switch T Used to test the operation of LEDs and ringer P Used to program features Built in Speaker Speaker Ringer Volume Control Seven Predefined Buttons e Conference e Drop e Transfer e Hold e Speaker e Message e Recall 34 Feature Buttons only ten with I Use and Status LEDs e Two predefined as System Access e 32 programmable default assignments are Repertory Dial 3 Flex DSS 27 Send All Calls and Account Code Entry Note The programmable buttons without LEDs should not be programmed for features that require I Use and Status LEDs Only the Repertory Dialing Manual Signaling a
49. Trunk Circuit Pack interfaces eight central office trunks arranged for Direct Inward Dialing DID and the TDM bus Figure 3 15 shows the following DID Trunk unique circuitry e Port Input output I O circuit e Eight port circuits Port VO Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders for communication between the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor Port Circuits The eight port circuits are identical Each port circuit consists of a coded balance network trunk interface unit and loop termination circuit The codec is a 4 wire circuit that converts the NPEs output to an analog signal Likewise it converts the analog signal from the CO to a PCM signal to the NPE The trunk interface unit contains a hybrid a 2 wire interface circuit and control circuitry The hybrid circuit converts the 4 wire analog signal from the codec to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the analog line by the 2 wire interface circuit The control circuitry controls loop current internal signal gain terminating resistance battery feed shutdown and battery reversal The circuit pack accepts both dial pulse and touch tone signaling The loop termination circuit provides a fixed impedance to the DID trunk 3 32 PORT CIR
50. a data module or modem and a connection to the switch via an analog or data port A digital data endpoint is addressed by its Data Dial Code DDC Analog data endpoints are addressed like other voice terminals by their PDCs For the remainder of this description data endpoints will refer to digital data endpoints unless stated otherwise Several different categories of data endpoints are supported The categories have been divided into two general groups those having a DTE type interface which encompasses almost all of the data terminal devices and a group of DCE interface devices primarily modems The groups have then been divided into categories based upon their functional attributes However it must be noted that within each category control interfaces may vary The following describes the categories and attributes of each 1 DTE Devices This group of data endpoints have one thing in common their interface configuration although RS 232C control signal utilization varies significantly from terminal to terminal Some data equipment do not use any RS 232C control signals these require only BA Transmitted Data Ready Tx BB Received Data Ready Rx and AB Signal Ground to function while others require more RS 232C 2 61 control signals to operate ADU can send Data Terminal Ready DTR from the data terminal to the Data Line circuit and the Data Line circuit can send a CD control signal to the data terminal The signals Dat
51. assigning talk and listen time slots for the connection When either of the parties hangs up the associated port circuit controller sends an up link message to the Station Call Processing task Station Call Processing interprets the on hook message as the end of the call The task then sends a down link message to the port circuit pack controllers to disconnect the time slot connections and turn off the LEDs associated with the calls 5 6 6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION The software which controls System 25 operation consists of tables located in system memory These tables contain data associated with e Trunk Station and Auxiliary Equipment Ports e System Parameters e Direct Group Calling Groups e Toll Calls Allowed Lists e Peripheral Equipment Data Communications Parameters e Automatic Route Selection Collectively these software tables are referred to as translations The system comes equipped with default translations data when cold started the default translations are copied into translation memory System Administration is the process of managing the translations by making changes to modify system operation to meet customer requirements The System 25 Implementation Manual 555 500 650 describes how a system can be configured to meet specific customer needs Information about a desired configuration is recorded a set of forms which are used when entering the initial system translations 1 initializing the sys
52. associated LED on the DXS Console will light steadily When a DID call arrives at the attendant position for coverage the LED associated with the call coverage sender will flash and will then light steadily when the call is answered However if the call is placed directly to the attendant position or is forwarded to the position and thereby arrives on a System Access button e g if a DID PDC is logged in at the attendant position then no LED indications on the DXS Console will be provided If a DID call is directed to the answering position and is subsequently extended to a station then the LED on the DXS Console associated with the station will flash if the call returns to the answering position The LED will light steadily if the call is answered by the station 2 72 e Call Coverage DID calls receive standard call coverage treatment Conference For conference purposes DID calls count as one of two allowable outside parties Dictation System Access A DID number may be associated with the dictation system access code This allows an outside caller to access the dictation equipment e Direct Group Calling A DID call will be directed to a DGC group if the DID number matches the DGC group access code e Night Service DID calls do not receive Night Service treatment A DID call will ring at the appropriate station whether Night Service is activated or not e Off Premises Stations OPS DID calls can be directed to OPS Paging Sy
53. call to a busy single line voice terminal or a multiline voice terminal active on both System Access buttons When the attendant releases from the call a burst of tone is heard at the called terminal The caller is placed on hold and hears music on hold if available When a System Access button becomes idle or the single line terminal hangs up the held call is connected automatically and ringing begins Only one call may be camped on to a voice terminal This feature is referred to as a Waiting Call in the User Guides 555 500 700 series Note Only outside calls can receive Camp On service If the attendant provides coverage for a station whose incoming call has been redirected to the attendant the call is considered an inside call and can not be given camp on service Considerations A camped on call can be answered by a busy signal line user without losing the current call by momentarily pressing the switchhook which places the current call on hold and then dialing 9 Multiline terminal users cannot do this However if they have a System Access Originate button they can place both calls on hold go off hook on that button and dial 9 to pick up the camped on call If the camped on call is not answered within a specified time the call will be returned to the Attendant Console Return On Busy RTN BUSY button If that button is busy the call remains camped on until the button becomes idle Interactions e Call Coverage Direct Grou
54. call will drop the other party e Line Selection Prime Line Preference When the Automatic Intercom line is assigned Prime Line status the AUTO ICOM button must be pressed to activate the busy to idle reminder even though the I use LED is already lighted steadily Administration Voice Terminal Station Port e Assign AUTO ICOM buttons to voice terminals Voice terminals may have several AUTO ICOM buttons assigned for direct access to multiple stations Hardware Requirements None 2 26 AUTOMATIC ROUTE SELECTION ARS Description Provides for the routing of calls over telecommunications network based on preferred routes normally the least expensive route available at the time the call is placed Call routing can be specified by as many as eight routing patterns Each pattern contains a sequential list of routes i e trunk groups the system can use to complete a call Number translations deletion and addition of dialed digits necessary to route the call is determined on a trunk group basis Overflow to the local CO when all trunks in a pattern are busy or the route FRL is too high is optional If all trunks in a pattern are busy including CO trunks if overflow is allowed the call queues on the first route in the pattern calls placed using the ARS access code default 9 are routed via the feature dialed numbers that follow the ARS access code are generally seven or ten digit DDD numbers preceded by a
55. calls on lines that normally ring at only the inactive console will now ring at the active console if they have an appearance there All buttons on the inactive console will continue to function normally including the DXS Console buttons Calls may be originated by the inactive console Call appearances in the leftmost two columns of buttons on the inactive console are not affected by the Position Busy feature The attendant can press a Direct Station Selection DSS Automatic Intercom AUTO ICOM or a Pooled Facility Button Access FACILITY button and then receive busy to idle reminder when the facility becomes idle Considerations Position Busy allows one of two attendant positions to be deactivated when not required This is useful in situations where calling traffic requires only one console operator All dial 0 calls calls to floating not logged calls to unassigned DID numbers calls to facilities in the rightmost two columns of buttons of the console that appear at both consoles will be directed to the active console Note that if a trunk appears on only one console incoming calls on those trunks will not receive service when the console is inactive For this reason it is strongly recommended that each attendant be assigned a Call Coverage Individual COVER IND button for the other console so that these calls can be covered Also be sure to make the Attendant Console the principal station owner on all trun
56. conference call will be ignored e Hands Free Answer On Intercom If the attendant lights the Message LED on a HFAI BIS terminal with AUTO ANS button active auto answer function will turn off allowing subsequent calls to receive coverage as assigned Administration Attendant Position Station Port e Assign ATT MSG button defaulted Hardware Requirements Stations must have a Message indicator LED not assignable 2 17 ATTENDANT POSITION BUSY Description Allows an Attendant Console to be placed in an inactive mode There must be two Attendant Consoles in the system before this feature can be activated A Position Busy POS BUSY button may be assigned on each of the consoles Pressing POS BUSY at one of two active consoles causes the POS BUSY status LED to light and the console to be placed in the inactive mode Pressing POS BUSY a second time causes the LED to go dark and the console to be reactivated Pressing POS BUSY when only one Attendant Console is active is ignored i e only one console is allowed to be inactive at a time When a console is in the inactive mode ringing is disabled on facility appearances on the two rightmost button columns only The green status LEDs will continue to operate normally Calls to floating PDCs not logged in DID calls dial 0 calls will be transferred to the active console Internal calls to the inactive console s PDC will still be directed to that console Incoming
57. connect to ports on the ATL Line ZTN 79 CP The ATL Line CP converts the analog voice signals to digital form before placing them on TDM bus Three wire pairs connect these sets to the port CPs see Section 8 for details The dial pad on 7300H series terminals is not a touch tone pad in that the signals generated are digital not DTMF signals digital signal is sent to the switch with each button press Reference to the dial pad on these sets throughout this manual is in the form touch dial pad MET Sets The MET Sets are not orderable as part of the system equipment but may be used in System 25 installations where appropriate i e in reuse situations Three wire pairs connect these sets to the port CPs see Section 8 for details The TN 735 MET Line CP converts the analog voice signals to digital form before placing them on the TDM bus The dial pad on MET voice terminals does generate DTMF signals Information about feature operation is provided in System 25 Multiline Terminal User Guide 555 500 703 e Five Button Voice Terminal 7302 01 PEC 3160 111 The 5 button terminal Figure 4 6 be desk or wall mounted and is approximately 5 3 4 inches wide 5 1 4 inches high and 8 1 2 inches long The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Dial Pad not DTMF LUse and Status LEDs Test Program Switch e T Used to test the operation of LEDs and ringer e P Used to program fea
58. dial tone and feeds the DTMF signal back to the user until the user releases the button The port circuit sends an up link message with each digit dialed to the OS which routes them to the Dial Plan Manager DPM The DPM collects the dialed digits and determines that the call is a station to station call When the DPM collects enough digits to identify an extension number it stops collecting digits Note If the extension number dialed is invalid the DPM sends a down link message to the port circuit instructing it to listen to time slot 07 Reorder Tone which is then heard by the user Go to Step 18 A down link message is sent to the originating port instructing it to listen to time slot 06 busy or 08 ringing as appropriate Go to Step 18 for Busy Tone or an unanswered call Station Call Processing sends a down link message to the station port circuit pack associated with the called extension to turn on the terminal s ringer and to flash the call appearance LED When the called party lifts the receiver the associated port circuit pack controller sends a off hook message to the OS as before The Station Call Processing task when it receives the message interprets the off hook message as an answer 5 5 16 17 18 19 20 The task sends down link message to the called port circuit to turn off the ringer and to change the flashing LED to steadily lighted Down link messages are sent to the port circuits
59. different rates For use with host computers running special communications packages only On or Off Half or Full Duplex Determines whether characters from the data equipment will be echoed by System 25 during Command Mode On or Off Enables call progress messages to be displayed at the called data endpoint Yes or No Yes indicates that users who have Command Mode enabled will receive the CONNECTED message when a connection has been established If Command Mode is disabled the Data Line port control lead will be raised when a connection is established Usually set to No for host computer endpoints One Long Break or Two Short Breaks A terminal whose baud rate is low cannot use the Command Mode feature Call origination at this terminal must be via One Button Transfer To Data 1 Numbers in indicate the action numbers used to administer data port options 2 53 Data Terminal Dialing Allows a user to originate data calls from a data terminal Voice terminal dialing and call progress tones are replaced by keyboard dialing and call progress messages The message DIAL prompts the user to enter the called number from the keyboard and RINGING or DIALING COMPLETED informs the user that the dialed number is being called Table 2 F provides a list of the call progress messages Dialed Characters In addition to digits and the and characters on the touch tone pad the dialed number may contain
60. each trunk interface to be provided 2 112 POOLED FACILITY BUTTON ACCESS Description Allows multiline voice terminal users to access a common pool of trunks via a Pooled Facility Access FACILITY button Upon pressing FACILITY and going off hook a multiline voice terminal user is connected to common pool of outside trunks 1 CO WATS Tie If the status I Use LEDs associated with the button light steadily the user may complete the call If no idle trunk is available facility busy indication an attempt by the user to originate a call will be denied and the I Use indicator will be Off A user requiring access to several different trunk pools must have a separate FACILITY button for each pool If all the trunks in a pool are busy the status LED will be lighted The user may press FACILITY and remain on hook to receive the busy to idle reminder when a trunk becomes available The busy to idle reminder is a short burst of tone which will be heard when a trunk in the pool becomes available When Prime Line Preference is assigned to a FACILITY button the button must be pressed to invoke the busy to idle reminder even though the I Use LED is lighted Refer to the feature description for additional information Considerations Pooled Facility Button Access provides easy access to the exchange network for users who make many outside calls The feature eliminates the need to dial a facility access code In additio
61. enables the Data Terminal Dialing feature and allows the user to view associated data port options Command Mode may be entered by going off hook and pressing Break or Break Return Data Terminal Dialing Mode Terminal Dialing is a data feature accessed via Command Mode It provides a procedure to establish data calls without the use of a voice terminal Terminal Dialing supports both on premises and off premises data calls with the support of the System 25 Modem Pooling feature Dialed digits are entered from the data terminal keyboard or host computer using a program compatible with Terminal Dialing protocol Call progress text messages are sent to the terminal in place of call progress tones Upon completion of digit entry Data Call Setup mode is entered Data Call Setup Mode Data Call Setup Mode is a transitional state entered after One Button Transfer To Data Terminal Dialing or during auto answer and exists during the handshake between data ports If the endpoints are compatible and handshaking is successful a data connection is established If handshake failure occurs the user is notified and the data endpoint returns to the Idle mode Successful handshake must occur within 15 seconds of answer at the called data endpoint This implies that the voice terminal user must invoke One Button Transfer To Data within 15 seconds after far end answer Similarly if an originating voice user calls a voice terminal and both users transfer
62. is approximately 9 inches wide 5 inches high and 9 inches long The DXS Console requires a KS22911 List 1 Power Supply associated 115V ac power outlet and a 400B2 adapter The 400B2 adapter provides power to to the console at the wall jack The Console connects to a port on the ZTN 79 ATL Line CP Detailed connection information is provided in Figure 4 39 Attendant Direct Extension Selector DXS Console Connections Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading later in this Section 4 45 4 gt gt ox OO AWU lt go ub o On lt Sane r a o 6 oco soos e m lt lt N ua 5 M sis ord mi fr e 8 pru 8 555 oca 2 roa 76 8 8 El 8 amp E B 8 8 8 8 k 5 FE EAE E 5 8 8 8 E E E 8 s 8 E B 19 Model 23 1 Attendant Direct Extension Selector DXS Console 4 46 Figure 4 Asynchronous Data Units ADUs Asynchronous Data Units provide an interface between ports on the TN 726 Data Line CP and
63. may be assigned in the system Callers to all DGC groups receive the same message Hardware Requirements Requires an AT amp T Answer Record 2500 or a Code A Phone 2540 or equivalent Recorded Announcement Device The announcement device must automatically hang up at the end of each call so that the incoming call can be returned to the DGC queue Requires a port circuit on a ZTN 78 or TN 742 CP For Music On Hold hardware information refer to the Music On Hold Or Delayed Access feature description Refer to Section 4 Recorded Delay Announcement Equipment for additional information 2 71 DIRECT INWARD DIALING DID Description Allows incoming calls to reach specific individuals or facilities in the system without attendant assistance System 25 customers reserve blocks of DID numbers from the CO The DID numbers may correspond to a PDC floating or nonfloating a DGC number a data extension number DDC or any facility with an access code such as a pooled facility or a paging zone The system is capable of receiving either 1 2 3 or 4 digits over its DID trunks The number of digits received on a specific DID trunk will be constant for that trunk however different DID trunks may receive different numbers of digits The system is capable of receiving up to four digits and then ignoring leading digits as specified to match against system dial codes For example the dial code matching DID number NNX 2157 can be 57 157
64. not logged in A maximum of 200 assigned and 300 FPDCs may be allocated in a system Data Dial Codes DDCs At the time of installation each digital data endpoint will be assigned a Data Dial Code extension number A maximum of 104 DDCs may be allocated in a system Direct Inward Dial DID Number Assignments Each DID number is associated with a unique PDC floating or assigned a DGC group number a DDC or a pooled facility access code The number or code associated with a DID number is the last 2 3 or 4 digits of the DID number For example the number or code associated with the DID number NNX 2157 will be 57 157 or 2157 All dial codes in the system which are associated with DID numbers should have the same number of digits However their is no requirement that all PDCs DDCs DGC groups or facility access codes be associated with DID numbers Number Assignment Restrictions For each assigned 3 or 4 digit code a ten number block is allocated space in memory This allocated block counts towards the PDC 200 FPDC 300 DDC 104 and dial code 600 maximums for a system Voice Terminal Directed Features Directed Night Service DGC calls Personal Line Calls Manual Signaling Station Message Waiting Automatic Intercom DSS and Outward Toll Restriction are associated with specific terminals stations not with PDCs This means that these features do not move with a PDC when it is logged in at another voice terminal
65. not reflect modem resource usage Intrapremises data calls using a conversion resource are reported as data calls on the SMDR call record Administration System Pooled Modems Modem Request Code 1 9999 Default 820 Allows users to indicate a need for a conversion resource on a data call originated at an analog data endpoint Receiver Responds To Remote Loop Yes No Default Yes When active Data Set Ready is asserted when the modem is in an analog loop test mode Disconnect On Loss Of Carrier Yes No Default Yes When active a loss of the received carrier will cause the modem to terminate the call CF CB Common Yes No Default Yes When active Clear to Send turns off if Carrier Detect turns off When a call is being established Clear to Send and Carrier Detect are not allowed to turn on until carrier has been received and the Clear to Send timer has timed out Disconnect On Received Space Yes No Default Yes When active the modem will disconnect after receiving a Space signal of approximately two seconds duration e Send Space On Disconnect Yes No Default Yes When active the modem upon receiving a negation of Data Terminal Ready sends approximately four seconds of Space signal and then disconnects Without this option active the modem upon receiving a negation of the Data Terminal Ready signal disconnects immediately Hardware Requirements One TN 758 Pooled Modem CP provides two conve
66. of headsets is supported Detailed connection information is provided in the following figures e Figure 4 38 Attendant Direct Trunk Console Connections Figure 4 B6 Typical Adjunct Connections With 34 Button Deluxe Voice Terminal Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided in Connectivity later in this Section Direct Extension Selector DXS Console The Model 23A1 Direct Extension Selector DXS Console Figure 4 19 supports the Attendant Direct Extension Selection DXS feature This feature and associated hardware provide the attendant with a visual indication of the status of stations When a voice terminal is off hook an associated LED on the console will light The LEDs are behind the faceplate and only visible when lighted The DXS feature allows the attendant to place calls to stations by pressing a Group Select button and a DXS button The following buttons are on the DXS console e Ten rows of ten buttons each for a 100 button matrix Each button has an associated LED The buttons are labeled 00 to 99 these labels cannot be changed e Eight control buttons Seven Group Select Buttons Default to 200 300 to 800 which are used to select the hundreds group the DXS buttons are associated with labeled by installer Test Button Used to test the DXS console The DXS console
67. of orderable equipment that will meet the customer s specific requirements This workbook when completed may be used in conjunction with the Quick Quote Price Estimator or the DOSS Configurator to obtain a price estimate or formal quote or to place an order Reference Manual 555 500 200 This document is the system s principal technical reference Ir provides reference material for sales support system configuration and operation and for the system technician It contains a comprehensive description of the system emphasizing features components and overall capabilities and capacities The Manual is divided into 12 sections SECTION _1 OVERVIEW EATURES and SERVICES UNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 10 2 Terminal Operations Manual 555 500 710 This manual is designed to help the System Administrator better understand System 25 voice terminal and data terminal operation This manual contains the operating procedures provided in the various User Guides and provides additional explanatory material as well User Guides 700 Series These guides specify operating procedures for System 25 voice and data terminals users Attendant Console User Guide 555 500 701 e Data Terminal Reference Guide 555 500 704 e Multiline Terminal User Guide 555 500 703 e Single Line Terminal User Guide 555 500 702 10 3 11 GLOSSARY This section provides explanations for acronyms and definitions of terms used in this manual ADU Asyn
68. of the console is a Test button When it is pressed all DXS LEDs will light sequentially a second press allows individual LEDs to be tested and a third press ends the test Dual Attendant DXS Consoles When there are two Attendant DXS Consoles in the system the Group Select button assignments are identical Whenever an administrative change is made to one console the other console is automatically changed 2 15 Considerations Buttons on the DXS Console point to either station PDCs or floating PDCs FPDCs Calls extended by the DXS console are directed as described in the Personal Dial Codes feature description When a station calls the attendant the associated LED on the DXS Console will flash while the call is ringing and will light steadily when the attendant answers the call The LED will light steadily whenever the terminal is off hook Station busy indication is not provided for buttons pointing to floating PDCs FPDCs If a call to a PDC is directed to a Cover button on the Attendant Console the covered voice terminal s status LED on the DXS Console will flash and then light steadily when the call is answered by the attendant If the covered call was intended for a FPDC which was logged in at a terminal with attendant coverage the DXS Console status LED associated with the FPDC if assigned will not light In this case just the Cover button status LED will light A call may arrive at an Attendant Console System Access but
69. or multiline voice terminal user including the attendant can access paging equipment by dialing the zone access code Multiline users can press a Flex DSS or DSS button that has been programmed with the paging access code A paging zone may be administered to be dial restricted This restricts users from accessing the equipment unless they are assigned an access button A PagePac paging system may be used Some paging systems require only one port assignment to support all zones Other systems may require separate ports for each zone Compatible PagePac paging systems include e PagePac 20 This is the smallest PagePac system The basic system provides a single paging zone with an input source for background music An Auxiliary Trunk port interface is required for this system e PagePac 20 equipped with a Common Control Unit The Common Control Unit allows the use of Ground Start or Loop Start CO trunks to interface to the paging system e PagePac 20 Control Unit and Zone Mate 9 Allows a user to dial one paging access code and then dial a single zone or all zones code 1 9 to access a paging zone This system is equipped with a Control Unit and connects to a Ground Start or Loop Start trunk port PagePac equipment is easy to use A user simply dials the paging access code and receives Confirmation Tone If the equipment provides just one zone the user then makes the announcement If the equipment provides multiple zone access the us
70. output to a AT amp T PC 6300 Personal Computer equipped with a CAS software package 1 Model 200 300 500 and 2000 that calculates the cost of calls and provides basic and sophisticated call reports CAS Models 200 300 500 2000 After a telephone call is completed System 25 sends a call record to the AT amp T PC 6300 via the SMDR interface channel The PC must be equipped with CAS software Call records are collected by the PC and held in a buffer until they are processed When a call record is processed a cost is calculated and assigned to it That cost along with other call record information is then stored on a hard disk for subsequent retrieval Two modes of operation are available for PC 6300 operation e Dedicated Mode The PC is dedicated to one and only one task processing call records e Multi Function Mode Allows the user to print reports edit files and run other PC based programs while the CAS continues to collect and buffer call records in the background The user must enter the Dedicated Mode to process calls and generate reports The CAS performs three main functions 1 call record processing 2 report generation and 3 CAS system management In addition a limited directory lookup and message center is provided The following is a brief description of each function l Process Calls Involves screening call records calculating the cost of valid calls and storing the call records 2 Generate Reports
71. plugs into a 115V ac receptacles Local power requires connecting the transformer and associated adapters to the set via a 400B2 adapter at the wall jack Refer to for additional information The 502A Headset Adapter does not require supplemental power Figure 4 15 500A 502A Headset Adapters 4 39 4A Speakerphone System The 4A speakerphone system Figure 4 16 provides a speakerphone and associated microphone indicator lamp and operating controls The controls includes a two position ON OR QUIET and OFF tilt button an ON lamp indicator and a volume control The 4A Speakerphone is designed for use with the Model 2500SM voice terminal and 10 Button MET sets The 4A Speakerphone requires an 85B1 power unit LAMP VOLUME CONTROL SPEAKERPHONE TRANSMITTER Figure 4 16 4A Speakerphone System 4 40 S101A S102A Speakerphone 3163 HFU The S101A Speakerphone Figure 4 17 can be used with the 12 Button MET Set 7203 The S102A Speakerphone can be used with 7300H series voice terminals except the 5 Button and sets 5101 5102 speakerphones are equipped with a 4 foot connecting cord that plugs into the voice terminal Connecting cords are available optional in lengths of 18 inches and 14 feet The speakerphone has an ON OFF button and a Microphone button Each button has an associated green status LED 5101 Speakerphone must be powered locally with 2012D Tra
72. provide many important services that help save time and make calling more convenient TABLE 2 B Station Features Feature Name Single Line Multiline Feature Voice Terminal Voice Terminal Type a ACCT ENTRY ENTRY S 2 AUTO ICOM COVER GRP one IND ES DSS or FLEX DSS X EXCLUSION Sp ANS Account Code Automatic Intercom Call Coverage Group Call Coverage Individual Call Following Forwarding Call Park Call Pickup Calling Restrictions Conference Conference Drop Direct Station Selection DSS Distinctive Ringing Exclusion Hands Free Answer On Intercom Hold Line Selection Line Status And I Use Indications Manual Signaling Messaging Services Personal Lines TRS LINE Pooled Facility Button Access Program Recall Repertory Dialing REP DIAL Speaker Spokesman Service Speakerphone Adjunct Speed Dialing S C Station Hunting Station To Station Message Waiting ee TP Test Trunk To Trunk Transfer see footnotes bottom of next page gt lt NAA 2 4 Attendant Features Attendant Features Table 2 C are available to the attendant using the Direct Trunk Console and optionally a Direct Extension Selector DXS Console In addition all multiline voice terminal station features are available to the attendant TABLE 2 C Attendant Features Feature Name Console Button Feature Label Attendant Call T
73. standard speeds from 300 to 19 200 bps and any rate under 1800 bps Each port includes an Asunchronous Data Unit ADU to extend the serial communications link length and provide safe isolation The ADU terminates to another ADU at the Customer Provided Equipment CPE The distance between the digital switch and CPE is inversely proportional to the speed at which the link is run Throughout the circuit various gates are used to provide a means of isolating devices for automated circuit pack testing Typically these devices are crystal oscillators or memory components attached to the microprocessor bus 3 26 CIRCUIT 0 PROTOCOL HANDLER NPE 0 CIRCUIT 1 ON BOARD MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUIT 2 3 a a NPE BUS PT PORT CIRCUIT 4 PORT CIRCUIT 5 PORT CIRCUIT 6 CIRCUIT 7 Figure 3 12 Unique Data Line TN 726 Circuitry PXT 7 PXR 7 TXT 7 TXR 7 TO ADUs MET Line TN 735 The MET Line Circuit Pack interfaces four Multibutton Electronic Telephone MET lines and the TDM bus The MET Line unique circuitry consists of four port circuits as shown in Figure 3 13 Port Circuits The four port circuits are identical Each port circuit consists of an analog port a digital port and an electronic power feed device The analog port circuit consists of a codec a hybrid circuit an electronic battery feed and a power
74. supports three types of Message Waiting service Attendant Message Waiting Call Coverage Message Waiting Station To Station Message Waiting Attendant Message Waiting The Attendant can turn On and turn Off the Message LED at other voice terminals When this indicator is lighted users call the attendant for messages The LED on multiline terminals may be turned Off by the user by pressing MESSAGE or by the attendant The Message LED on single line terminals can only be turned On or Off by the attendant Refer to the Attendant Message Waiting feature description for additional information Call Coverage Message Waiting Allows a user providing Individual Call Coverage to control the Message LED on covered voice terminals A Coverage Message button COVER MSG is used to display and control the status of the covered user s Message LED The state of the COVER MSG LED reflects the state of the covered station s Message LED The covering user can turn On or Off toggle the covered party s Message LED at any time during a coverage call by pressing COVER MSG To turn On the covered user s Message LED when not On a coverage call the covering user may go off hook on a System Access button press COVER MSG turning On the associated LED and then dial the covered user The covered stations Message LED turns On if Off and stays On if On If the covering station then presses COVER MSG a second time before hanging up the Message LED will tur
75. time and a maximum of 24 calls can be parked in the system at one time A call is no longer parked when it is answered returns to the parking terminal or is abandoned by the caller Considerations Call Park can be used whenever a user engaged on a call needs to go elsewhere and obtain information and wishes to complete the call from another terminal Call Park also allows users to answer a call from any voice terminal when paged Interactions Attendant Direct Extension Selection Station To Station calls cannot be parked via the Call Park buttons on the Attendant DXS Console Attendant Position Busy call parked by an inactive attendant will return to the inactive attendant on the button the call was parked on if the call times out Conference Parked conference calls do not return to the parking voice terminal They remain parked Call Park may be used to place a conference on hold if it contains fewer than five parties Exclusion A call cannot be parked and a parked call cannot be answered if the Exclusion feature is invoked on that call Intercept Treatment With Reorder Tone An unsuccessful attempt to park a call due to misdialing or attempting to park more than one call at a voice terminal results in Reorder Tone Music On Hold Parked calls except conferences receive music Outward Restriction see Calling Restrictions If the parking station is outward restricted the Recall Dial tone following a successful pa
76. to Call Accounting System feature description for additional information The SMDR RS 232C port interface is provided by a DUART driver 68681 It is a one way port transmitting data to the output device No characters are read by the port interface The standard data transmit rate is 1200 bps Also operates at 300 bps Call Accountability In keeping with the desire to accurately attribute call costs the system 1 provides the Account Code Entry feature to associate calls with an account code or project number and 2 if more than one individual is logged in at a voice terminal a person wishing to make an outgoing call may identify himself by dialing followed by his PDC The system then returns Dial Tone to the user Refer to Account Code Entry feature description for additional information The call records provide detailed information concerning both incoming and outgoing calls Call detail records are generated during call processing and are sent to the SMDR output device in ASCII format SMDR records are provided for e Voice Records The system prints call records for incoming calls and for outgoing calls that exceed a specified duration For special types of calls such as conference or transferred calls one call record is reported for each trunk seized regardless of the number of parties connected to the call The call s duration is from the time the last digit was dialed until the last person hangs up No i
77. to data both ends must transfer within the 15 second time limit If the data endpoint is optioned for Command Mode permission the data endpoint will receive call progress text messages while in the Data Call Setup mode 2 64 Data Mode Data Mode is first entered after successful completion of Data Call Setup Transparent communication between connected endpoints is provided in Data Mode Connecting Configurations Refer to Section 4 for data equipment connections Controlling Features It is possible to originate data calls from a voice terminal with all at a button or from data endpoints that support Command Mode 1 ASCII data terminals with keyboards and host computers Several controlling features are provided to allow data endpoints and voice terminals to set up data calls The following briefly describes the Data Service features used in controlling data calls a Command Mode provides an interface to the Data Terminal Dialing feature and permits the display of terminal options Data Terminal Dialing Terminal Dialing provides call setup from terminals and host computers One Button Transfer To Data One Button Transfer To Data is the preferred method of data call origination from multiline voice terminals equipped with Data buttons and associated digital data endpoints The Data button is associated by DDC with a near end data endpoint A unique Data button must be provided fo
78. to the group will be routed to the inactive attendant The attendant must dial 4 activate DGC Group Make Busy to busy out from the group Dialing 6 deactivates the Make Busy function Direct Inward Dialing DID calls to unassigned DID numbers will be transferred to the active attendant Night Service An inactive attendant that is a Directed Night Service receiver will receive Night Service calls Personal Dial Codes calls to floating PDCs not logged in will be transferred to the active attendant Personal Lines Trunk Appearances All calls to trunks having an appearance in either of the two leftmost button columns will ring normally at the inactive console All calls to trunks having appearances in either of the two rightmost button columns will not ring If these trunks also have an appearance at the active console they will ring there even if they don t normally Program The Program feature remains active at the inactive console Programmable Buttons All DSS REP DIAL and Speed Dial buttons remain active on the inactive console Administration Voice Terminal Station Port Assign Position Busy button button function 18 Assign COVER IND buttons between consoles Hardware Requirements None 2 19 ATTENDANT RELEASE Description Releases the attendant from an extended call There are two forms of Attendant Release 1 Manual Release 2 Automatic Release Manual Release Pressing
79. to use an analog modem to call a digital endpoint must first enter the Modem Request Code before dialing the digital endpoint This is because the system assumes that a voice call to a digital endpoint will be transferred to data via the One Button Transfer To Data feature A DID call terminating on a digital endpoint will be assigned a modem resource if available Otherwise the call receives Reorder tone For each situation that requires a conversion resource the system 1 Determines if a resource is required by examining the types of endpoints that are to be connected together or by user indication 2 Once it is determined that a conversion resource is needed it is reserved The user receives Reorder Tone or the NO MODEMS TRY AGAIN message if a resource is not available The system queries the data port to determine whether its options are compatible with those supported by the modem pool If they are not e g 9600 baud the originating user receives intercept treatment 1 INCOMPATIBLE FAR END and call setup is abandoned 3 At data connection time the conversion resource is seized and placed in the connection 4 The call is disconnected within 15 seconds if the conversion resource does not successfully handshake with both endpoints Conversion resources are required for e Data Terminal Dialing To establish a data connection for calls originated via Terminal Dialing to intrapremises analog data endpoints I
80. trunk calls when the system has Directed Night Service NS activated and a call is not answered Directed NS calls not answered within a specified number of rings 1 15 may be directed to a recorded announcement Two different recorded announcements may be assigned Note that NS calls to a terminal that are not answered do not receive Station Hunting or Call Coverage treatment After the announcement is played the call is disconnected Considerations Night Service Delay Announcements provide the calling party with a message that acknowledges the call and can provide additional information as well Interactions e Night Service Incoming calls receiving TAAS NS treatment will not activate the delay announcements Only trunks that receive Directed NS will activate these announcements Administration Special Feature Ports e Assign first Night Service delay announcement code 251 e Assign second Night Service delay announcement code 252 e Assign number of rings before Night Service delay announcement 0 15 Station Ports Assign port circuits ZTN 78 or TN 742 for each recorded announcement Hardware Requirements An AT amp T Answer Record 2500 or a Code A Phone 2540 or equivalent announcement machine is required for each delay announcement Refer to Section 4 Recorded Delay Announcement Equipment for additional information Connectivity information is also provided 2 100 OFF PREMISES STATIONS OPS Descr
81. used 1 hour without interruption generates 36 CCS which equals 1 erlang see Erlang Call Appearance Attendant Console Two buttons labeled System Access used to originate receive and hold calls Each button has two associated LEDs to show the status of the call appearance Call Appearance Voice Terminal A button labeled with an extension number used to place outgoing calls receive incoming calls or hold calls Two LEDs next to the button show the status of the call appearance or status of the call Central Office The location housing telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and access to toll facilities for long distance calling Central Office Codes The first three digits of a 7 digit public network telephone number These codes are numbered from 200 through 999 and are sometimes referred to as NNXs Central Office Trunk A telecommunications channel that provides access from the system to the public network through the local central office Channel A communications path for trnsmitting voice and data Class of Service COS Parameters used to define voice terminal data and trunk port capabilities and restrictions Common Control Switching Arrangement CCSA A private telecomunications network using dedicated trunks and a shared switching center for interconnecting company locations Confirmation Tone Three short bursts of tone followed by silence indicates that the feature activated
82. which you will connect the telephone equipment The telephone equipment s registration number and ringer equivalence number REN from the label on the equipment For Private Line Connections provide the facility interface code TL31M for tie lines You must also specify the service order code 9 0F The quantities and USOC numbers of the jacks required For each jack provide the sequence in which lines are to be connected the type lines and the facility interface code and the ringer equivalence number by position when applicable This telephone equipment should not be used on coin telephone lines Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment contact the AT amp T Business Customer Service Center on 1 800 242 2121 The Telephone Company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that this equipment is not malfunctioning RIGHTS OF THE TELEPHONE COMPANY If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice isn t practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Your Telephone Company may make changes it s facilities equipment op
83. will be unable to reenter the call Transfer When a covering station transfers a covered call to another station the call will no longer appear at the covering station s Cover button though it still will appear at covered multiline stations Administration Voice Terminal Station Port e Individual Call Coverage button button function 12 Individual Coverage PDC 1 9999 Individual Coverage Delayed Ring Yes No Hardware Requirements None 2 42 CALL FOLLOWING FORWARDING Description Allows users who are away from their phone to receive calls at another phone The feature is functionally equivalent to Call Forwarding Users can login their PDC at another voice terminal and receive their calls at that terminal Logging in a PDC at a terminal automatically logs the PDC out at any other terminal PDCs will always have an associated home terminal If a PDC is not logged in anywhere calls to the PDC will ring at the home terminal Logging in a FPDC automatically logs the FPDC out at any other voice terminal However logging out a FPDC does not log the FPDC in at another terminal Calls to FPDCs not logged in at a terminal may be directed to the attendant administrable and strongly recommended When a PDC is logged in at another terminal away terminal dialing the PDC from the away terminal directs the call to the PDC s home terminal To log in a PDC the user goes off hook at the away terminal enters
84. zone Yes No e Assign other appropriate CO trunk parameters Hardware Requirements Requires a PagePac or other compatible paging system Also requires Auxiliary or CO trunk ports Refer to Section 4 for additional information Connectivity information is also provided 2 106 PAUSE Description Used to insert pauses between digits in Repertory Dial and Speed Dial numbers Pause is used in conjunction with features that require system outpulsing or out toning of stored digits in situations in which far end response cannot be assured in a particular time interval The character is used to denote a pause in these number strings The Pause feature is used in conjunction with e Repertory Dialing e Speed Dialing When the delimiter is detected in a stored number the system waits 1 5 seconds then proceeds to send additional digits Multiple characters in a number string are permissible Considerations Pause allows for the sending of programmed number strings without the user having to consider the far end response to digit timing intervals Since System 25 does not have a Dial Tone detector judicious use of the pause character will help ensure that intermediate Dial Tones are obtained before more digits are sent Interactions e Repertory Dialing A as the first character in a Repertory Dial number is not treated as a feature access code For example a REP DIAL button when programmed 70 will activate th
85. 0 series and 7171A voice terminals or industry standard Dual Tone Multifrequency equivalent SAT System Administration Terminal SIP Station Interconnect Panel SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Software A set of computer programs that accomplish one or more tasks 11 10 Split A condition whereby a caller is temporarily separated from a connection with the attendant This split condition automatically occurs when the attendant active on a call presses the Start button Status LED lamp A green LED or lamp that shows the status of a call appearance or a feature button by the state of the lamp lighted flashing fluttering broken flutter or dark Station A place where terminal equipment is located or sometimes the terminal equipment itself Each voice terminal station is assigned a station extension number Users of the terminal are sometimes referred to as station users Reference to the extension number is sometimes in the form PDC Personal Dial Code rather than station number Though PDCs may be logged in at other stations in most discussions though PDCs and station numbers are interchangeable Analogously data stations are assigned DDCs Data Dial Codes Switch The software controlled communications processor complex that interprets dialing pulses tones keyboard characters and makes the proper interconnections both within the system and external to the system The switch itself consists of a dig
86. 000000000000000 POWER 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000006000000000000000000000000 CABLE 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0O0000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 EIA RS 232C CONNECTOR yt 3 WAY POWER DIGITAL COUNTER RECORD PLAY REWIND F FMD STOP EJECT PAUSE gt gt gt nx T Figure 4 22 Digital Tape Unit 4 53 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Call Accounting System CAS A Model 475 printer can be connected to the Call Processor CP channel 2 to provide a printed record of all incoming and outgoing calls The call records can facilitate cost allocation traffic analysis and abuse control The printer may be directly connected to the ZTN 82 CP or switched access either on premises or off premises can be provided Connection is the same as described for t
87. 1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 0 1 7300H TYPE VOICE TERMINAL Wi 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER NOTE RANGE WITHIN 1000 FEET OF SYSTEM CABINET Figure 4 32 On Premises 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminal Connections 4 72 5 5 25 LEGEND ZTN 79 B1 C1 C2 0 T1 W1 NOTES PART OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP Z600A ADAPT ATL LINE CP TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK EXPOSED CABLE IROB IROB PROTECTION PROTECTION TII341 lt gt 341 1 NOTE 1 MODULAR CORD 084 87 FURNISHED WITH SET OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05P 10 AWG GROUND WIRE 7300H TYPE VOICE TERMINAL 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE 1 IN RANGE OUT OF BLDG UNIT MODEL 341 IROB S REQUIRED PRIMARY SECONDARY PROTECTORS 2 RANGE WITHIN 1000 FEET OF SYSTEM CABINET FURNISHED BY INSTALLER VOICE TERMINAL T1 NOTE 2 Figure 4 33 Out Of Building 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminal 4 73 SYSTEM 25 CABINET LEGEND MET SETS MET SETS 1 248B ADAPTER 40082 ADAPTER 2012D TRANSFORMER C7 PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP NOTE MET LINE C P TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET OCTOPUS CABLE WPS0780 2720 05P MODULAR ZD8AJ 87 COMES WITH 005 ORDER
88. 305H03B 34 Btn Deluxe ZTN 79 2 0 7305H02B 5102 Speakerphone 502A Headset Adapter 79 Asynchronous Data Units TN 726 5 Emergency Transfer Unit 2173 82 1 25 per ETU Pooled Modem TN 758 Zero Unit Loads but maximum of two TN 758 Ss cabinet allowed DXS Selector Console Locally Powered The TN 763 ZTN 76 ZTN 77 does not affect unit loading Any voice terminal adjunct combination requiring more than 2 Unit Loads must be locally powered When a voice terminal is locally powered it places no unit load on the cabinet Specifically Attendant Console or any 34 button deluxe voice terminal equipped for headset operation requires local power Cable Distance Limitations The following specifications provide allowable cabling distances for the following devices e Single Line Voice Terminals Multiline Voice Terminals Data Terminals RS 232C Connected to Asynchronous Data Units ADUs Single Line Voice Terminals SUPPORTING 24 GAUGE WIRE 26 GAUGE WIRE CIRCUIT 0 5106 mm 0 4049 mm PACK METERS METERS ZIN 78 1 250 TN 742 15 000 TN 742 15 000 10 500 2500 type voice terminals 7101 type voice terminals IN BUILDING SI NGLE LI NE 5 2000 FEET ZTN 78 VOI CE TIP RING LINE TERMI NAL EXTENDED STATI ON OR OUT OF BUI LDI NG OR gt 2000 FEET TN 742A OFF PREMI SES ANALOG LINE 51 NGLE LI NE VOI CE TERMI NAL UP TO 24 000 FEET TIP
89. 33395 INTERFACE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 4 50 Music On Hold Equipment Connections FCC Registered 4 90 SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET OCTOPUS CABLE J PART OF SIP C2 MUSIC ON HOLD EQUIPMENT 36A VOICE COUPLER W1 20120 TRANSFORMER LEGEND TN 742 ANALOG LINE CP ZTN 78 TIP RING B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05P SINGLE ENDED MODULAR CORD D4BY W1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING 62513 INCLUDES KS233395 UNIT 20120 TRANSFORMER AND 36A VOICE COUPLER FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 4 51 Music On Hold Equipment Connections Non Registered 4 91 OF 700A NETWORK 25 INTERFACE BLOCK Wi CABINET 110 OR 66 CONNECTING BLOCK T PAGING SYSTEM LEGEND ZTN 76 CO GROUND START TRUNK CP ZTN 77 CO LOOP START TRUNK CP 3 1 SPLITTER CABLE CONNECTORIZED 086016 2720 06X B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C5 MODULAR CORD 0480 87 W1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER T PAGING SYSTEM PAGE 20 E W ZONE 9 PROVIDES 9 PAGING 70 5 PLUS ALL ZONE PAGING Figure 4 52 Paging Equipment Connections Using CO Trunk Ports FCC Registered 4 92 SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET 25 PAIR CABLE PART OF 66 BLOCK 1 PAGING OR E gt DICTATION SYSTEM C6 LEGEND 763 A
90. 4 3422 3422 4271 4271 3465 4271 ASCII CHARACTER DESCRIPTION VALID POSITION CHARACTERS Column Number 01 Call C or D 02 Space 03 04 Date Month 0 9 05 06 07 Date Day 0 9 08 09 10 Date Year 0 9 11 Space 12 13 Time Hour 0 9 14 15 16 Time Minute 0 9 17 Space 18 35 Dialed Number 0 9 Space IN 36 Error Character or Space 37 Space 38 39 Duration Hour 0 9 40 41 42 Duration Minute 0 9 43 44 45 Duration Second 0 9 46 Space 47 51 Facility Space 0 9 52 Space 53 56 Station 0 9 Space 57 58 Space 59 73 Account Code 0 9 Space 74 Space 75 78 Personal Dial Code 0 9 Space 79 Carriage Return 80 Line Feed Figure 2 5 SMDR Call Record Format 2 134 CHARACTER DESCRIPTION POSITION 00 top of form 01 03 Space 04 07 DATE 08 12 Space 13 16 TIME 17 23 Space 24 29 CALLED 30 Space 31 36 NUMBER 37 38 Space 39 41 DUR 42 48 Space 49 51 FAC 52 54 Space 55 57 STN 58 62 Space 63 69 ACCOUNT 70 76 Space 77 79 80 Carriage Return 81 Line Feed Figure 2 6 SMDR Call Record Header Format 2 135 STATION TO STATION MESSAGE WAITING Description Allows a multiline voice terminal to turn On a Message Waiting LED located on another multiline voice terminal by assigning a MSG WAIT button on each terminal Pressing MSG WAIT causes the LED on the signaling and signaled terminals to light This feature allows a user to inform another user that they have a me
91. 4 Button Deluxe Set e Figure 4 36 Adjunct Connections For 34 Button Deluxe Voice Terminals Includes Attendant Direct Trunk Console e Figure 4 37 Adjunct Connections For 12 Button MET Set Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading later in this Section Voice Terminal Adjunct Power Supplies Table 4 C provides a summary of the supplemental power supplies and their applications TABLE 4 C Supplemental Voice Terminal Power Supplies 2012D Transformer ADUS except Z3A5 if required MET auxiliary power KS22911 L1 Power DXS Console Unit Z3A5 ADU MERLIN sets that require local power Note The 502A Headset Adapter and the S102A Speakerphone do not require supplemental power except when connected to a 34 Button Deluxe Voice Terminal 4 43 Attendant Consoles The Attendant may use a Direct Trunk Console and a Direct Extension Selector DXS Console Figure 4 18 Up to two attendant positions can be supported Refer to Features And Services for a description of the attendant features a ATTENDANT DIRECT TRUNK CONSOLE b ATTENDANT DIRECT EXTENSION SELECTOR CONSOLE Figure 4 18 Attendant Consoles Direct Trunk Console The system can have up to two Attendant Direct Trunk DT Consoles which are_referred_to as the Primary and Secondary Conso
92. 8 ZTN 77 Loop Stat Trunk 8 ZIN 78 Tip Ring Line P 8 ZTN 79 ATL Line P 8 ZTN 82 Call Processor ZTN 85 Service Circuit T R 4 P Port C Control System Resource T System Resource Circuits Tone Detector Pooled Modem Service Circuit ports are internal to the system These ports are not connected to external equipment via 25 pair connectors t Provides four channels for the system s peripheral equipment 1 System Administration Terminal 2 SMDR Output Device 3 Digital Tape Unit 4 reserved for future use Terminal Equipment Terminal equipment is connected to System 25 station voice or data ports and include e Voice Terminals and adjuncts Single Line Voice Terminals Multiline Voice Terminals MERLIN Family of Voice Terminals MET Voice Terminals Attendant Consoles Data Terminals via Asynchronous Data Units Voice Terminals System 25 supports a wide range of voice terminals including industry standard touch tone single line sets and MERLIN multiline sets In addition to providing basic telephone service placing and answering calls voice terminals can also be used to activate many system features The voice terminals supported are TERMINAL CIRCUIT PACK TYPE MODEL DESCRIPTION INTERFACE 500 MM Rotary Dial Set ZIN 78 Single Line 2500MMGB Basic Desk Tip Ring 2500DMGC Basic Desk Message Waiting TN 742 Analog 2500SM Basic Desk Compatible With4A Speak
93. 85 e Status LEDs Port CPs e Red On several seconds during power up and test Off with test pass After test pass On if fault in CP is subsequently detected e Green On indicates resource available port is translated e Yellow On indicates call in progress Off when not in use All LEDs Off CP is not translated Common Control CPs Memory Red status LED only On several seconds during power up and test Off with test pass After test pass On if fault in CP is detected Call Processor CP Green Status LED only Off for several seconds during power up and test then lamp flashes to indicate an OK state Steady Off or On indicates a problem System Resource CPs e Service Circuit CP Similar to port CPs except yellow LED flashes to show system clock is active and is steadily On when in use Off indicates a problem e Modem Pool and Tone Detector CPs Same as Port CPs 4 11 Table 4 B lists CPs that can be used with System 25 description of each CP is provided in Functional Description TABLE 4 B System Circuit Packs CIRCUIT NUMBER CIRCUIT PACK TITLE PACK OF TYPE PORTS TN 726 Data Line P 8 TN 735 MET Line P 4 TN 742 Analog Line P 8 TN 748 Tone Detector F 4 TN 753 DID Trunk P 8 Pooled R 2 TN 760B Tie Trunk P 4 Auxiliary Trunk 4 ZTN 76 Ground Start Trunk P
94. 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 11 14 11 14 11 15 11 17 11 19 11 20 11 34 11 44 11 50 1214 12 24 13 27 13 14 13 23 13 28 13 33 13 45 14 14 14 24 14 34 14 43 15 14 15 16 15 19 CALLED NUMBER 1 212 566 1321 1 204 513 4524 1 302 564 1376 1 212 564 2171 1 212 566 4546 1 214 514 3121 1 212 563 1324 1 303 566 4541 1 212 514 3176 1 204 566 1321 1 212 566 2544 1 303 513 1376 1 204 564 3121 1 212 516 2541 1 303 563 4324 1 212 516 1176 1 204 564 2541 1 202 563 4321 1 333 516 2574 1 204 563 3141 1 313 516 4526 1 202 564 1321 1 212 566 1321 1 212 566 1321 DUR 00 15 41 00 09 05 00 29 50 00 10 45 00 05 32 00 29 45 00 19 00 00 05 35 00 19 45 00 25 42 00 10 35 00 15 05 00 09 40 00 15 45 00 19 35 00 19 40 00 09 05 00 20 42 00 10 05 00 09 45 00 19 32 00 20 45 00 19 45 00 19 45 Figure 2 4 Typical SMDR 2 133 FAC STN 9 1794 9 1324 9 1744 1234 2001 9 1744 9 3455 2145 1677 2145 2312 3214 3455 9 1492 3414 1244 3421 3566 3425 2001 3414 1566 3421 3421 9 1492 3414 3655 9 4321 3456 1244 3214 4633 3214 2351 9 1794 3452 1794 2342 1794 ACCOUNT 123489764321341 98766 766544 76322 323489764321341 123489764321341 123489764321341 763444 123489764321341 Call Detail Report PDC 4271 3256 325
95. Allows the user to print the stored call record information organized in one of several different ways Users can select a report or setup their own special combination of reports from the following e Summary Reports A collection of reports that condense and summarize call record information by total number of calls duration and cost The reports can be organized by department call type cost center trunk extension cost duration time of day date and account code e Organization Detail Report A detailed report of each call record in the system sorted by department cost center and extension 2 35 Selection Report This report can contain at a user s option summary detailed information based on any combination of the following items time of day date cost duration extension access code account codes dialed number call type department or cost center e Account Code Detailed Report A detailed report on call records sorted by account code This report can be used for billing clients for calls made in their behalf e Preselected Reports Allows up to five predefined reports which can include any of the above mentioned reports These reports can run upon request or at a specified time and date 3 System Management Allows the user to perform several functions These include editing the table of departments cost centers and extensions setting up account codes defining preselected reports a
96. BLE 3 TDM BUS Time Slots Time Slot No Function 00 thru Control 5 Tones Dial Tone Busy Tone Re order Tone Ringback Tone Data Null Voice Null Music 697 Hz 770 Hz 852 Hz 941 Hz 1209 Hz 1336 Hz 1447 Hz 1637 Hz 15 Call Processing 235 Not Used 1 These tones are used to generate touch tone signals 3 10 Figure 3 5 TDM Bus Diagram Three Cabinet System Port Circuits The following port circuit packs provide the link between trunks and external equipment and the TDM bus Analog Line TN 742 ATL Line ZTN 79 Auxiliary Trunk TN 763 Data Line TN 726 DID Trunk TN 753 Ground Start Trunk ZTN 76 Loop Start Trunk ZTN 77 MET Line TN 735 Tie Trunk TN 760B Tip Ring Line ZTN 78 shows the equipment types that can be connected to the digital switch by the Call Processor and port circuit packs SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINALS 2500 2514 2554 7101A RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS DICTATION EQUIPMENT EXTERNAL ALERTING DEVICES MUSTC ON HOLD MULTILINE VOICE TERMINALS 7300 TRUNK CONSOLE 7305H02B ATTENDANT DIRECT EXTENSION SELECTOR CONSOLE MODEL 23A1 MET SETS DICTATION EQUIPMENT PAGING EQUIPMENT PAGE PAC PART OF DIGITAL SWITCH ZTN 78 TIP RING WwW ZTN 79 ATL LINE CP TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEX BUS 735 LINE 763 AUXILIARY TRUNK
97. Busy RTN BUSY Calls extended to a busy station are returned to the console if not answered within a specified interval Return On Don t Answer RTN DA Extended calls not answered are returned to the console if not answered within a specified interval Position Busy POS BUSY In a dual attendant console system Position Busy removes an Attendant Console from service Only one of two consoles can be in the Position Busy mode at a time Night Service NIGHT Used to activate deactivate the Night Service feature Attendant Message Waiting ATT MSG Used by the attendant to turn On or Off Message LEDs on voice terminals so equipped e Alarm ALARM Status LED Indicate that a system trouble has been detected Position Busy and Night Service are custom features these buttons must be assigned to the Attendant Console if the feature is required If the system has two Attendant Consoles one console is considered to be the primary console and the other the secondary console Dual Attendant Console Operation The following calls will be routed to the primary console If the primary attendant has activated the Position Busy feature or is busy on both System Access buttons these calls will be routed to the secondary console If that console is also busy on both System Access buttons busy tone is provided to the calling party The call types are e Dial 0 calls e DID calls to unassigned numbers when administered to route to the at
98. CCESS 2 HANDSET I USE STATUS LEDs PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS 3 TEST PROGRAM RE T SNITCH BUTTONS 29 TOUCH DIAL PAD SPEAKER RING P VOLUME CONTROL D SWITCH E my SPEAKERPHONE RECALL VOLUME CONTROL MESSAGE 4 7 MICROPHONE SPEAKERPHONE CONFERENCE TRANSFER DROP HOLD Figure 4 10 BIS Voice Terminal 7305H03B 4 29 e Hands Free Answer Intercom HFAI Voice Terminal 7309 PEC 3161 161 The HFAI voice terminal Figure 4 11 can be desk or wall mounted and is approximately 6 1 4 inches wide 5 1 4 inches high and 9 inches long The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch dial pad not DTMF I Use and Status LEDs Test Program Switch e T Used to test the operation of LEDs and ringer e P Used to program features on the voice terminal Built In HFAI Microphone Built In Speaker Speaker Ringer Volume Control Eight Predefined Buttons e Conference e Drop e Transfer Hold Speaker Recall e Message Microphone Programmable Buttons each equipped with I Use Status LEDs e Two predefined as System Access e Eight programmable Default assignment is Repertory Dial 3 Flex DSS 3 Send All Calls and Account Code Entry Adjuncts None 4 30 I USE STATUS LEDs HANDSET SYSTEM ACCESS 2 TEST PROGRAM PROGRAMMABLE SWITCH ES FEATURE BUTTONS 3 TOUCH DIAL PAD PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTO
99. CUIT 0 TRUNK INTERFACE UNIT CODEC HYBRID PORT CIRCUIT 3 NPE 0 NPE 1 PORT ON BOARD 1 0 MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUIT CENTRAL OFFICE PORT CIRCUIT 4 CIRCUIT 7 Figure 3 15 Unique DID Trunk TN 753 Circuitry 3 33 Tie Trunk TN 760B The Tie Trunk Circuit Pack interfaces four 6 wire tie trunks and the TDM bus Two tip and ring pairs form a 4 wire analog transmission line An E and M pair are used for signaling The and pair transmit analog signals from the circuit pack and pair receive analog signals from the tie trunk The E and M pair are dc signaling leads used for call setup handshaking The E lead receives signals from the tie trunk and the M lead provides signals from the circuit pack The TN 760Bs four port circuits support Type I Type I Compatible or Type V signaling Incoming and outgoing trunks may be either automatic immediate start wink start or delay dial Figure 3 16 shows the following Tie Trunk unique circuitry e Ground detector circuit e Port Input Output I O circuit e Four port circuits Ground Detector Circuit This circuit determines if a ground has been applied to the E lead Ground detector inputs come from the port circuits as an analog current to the 48 volt de supply Its output is a port control point to the port I O circuit Port Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders for commu
100. Console has a button labeled TRANSFER this button invokes the standard multiline voice terminal Transfer feature and should not be used by the attendant to extend incoming calls The Attendant Call Transfer feature described below should be used for this purpose To extend an incoming call the attendant after answering the call can either Press START which places the incoming call on hold via the Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic feature After receiving Dial Tone the attendant then dials the requested extension or 2 Press the DXS Console button associated with the requested station This operation is equivalent to pressing START and dialing the extension If ringing tone is heard the attendant either presses 1 RELEASE Manual Release or 2 any facility button such as System Access Automatic Intercom or an outside line Attendant Automatic Release to complete the transfer If busy tone is heard and Attendant Camp On see associated feature description is not desired the attendant presses CANCEL and is reconnected to the calling party If Busy Tone is heard and Attendant Camp On is desired the attendant presses RELEASE or any facility button The called party hears a tone burst and the call is held at the called voice terminal When a busy single line station goes on hook or a busy multiline station System Access button becomes idle the call automatically begins ringing at the station Only one Camped On call is p
101. DELUXE 34 BUTTON VOICE TERMINAL 3162 417 FURNISHED BY INSTALLER RANGE WITHIN 1000 FEET OF SYSTEM CABINET Figure 4 38 Attendant Direct Trunk Console Connections 4 78 SYSTEM 25 PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP ATTENDANT DXS CONSOLE 74 LEGEND ZTN 79 HYBRID LINE CP Bt TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR 084 87 FURNISHED WITH CONSOLE C2 OCTOPUS CABLE CABLE WP90780 2720 05P C7 CORD D6AP 87 FURNISHED WITH CONSOLE Pi KS22911 POWER SUPPLY FURNISHED WITH CONSOLE 1 23A1 DXS CONSOLE 62509 W1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER RANGE WITHIN 1000 FEET OF SYSTEM CABINET Figure 4 39 Attendant Direct Extension Selector Console Connections 4 79 5 5 25 OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP o PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT LEGEND ZTN 82 CALL PROCESSOR CP C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 2725 07G C2 DCTOPUS CABLE WPS0780 2720 05P 355A ADAPTER RS 232 PLUG TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 A24 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 A25 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL DIGITAL TAPE UNIT SMDR OUTPUT DEVICE CALL ACCOUNTING SYSTEM Figure 4 40 Typical Peripheral Equipment On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet 4 80 SYSTEM 25 OC
102. Data Terminal Equipment DTE or Data Communications Equipment DCE DTE is equipment that provides a data source termination or both A host computer printer or a data terminal are examples of DTE DCE is equipment that provides the functions required to establish maintain and terminate data communications modems are the most common DCE The 73 series of Asynchronous Data Units ADUs 4 20 are DCE that allow a direct connection between DTE and port circuits on the Data Line CP TN 726 The modular jack labeled Wall connects the ADU to the building wiring with a standard 4 pair modular cord The 400B2 Adapters for supplemental AC power may be bridged at the wall jack if required Z3AI 2 and 4 units only The modular jack labeled Telephone allows a voice terminal to be attached to the ADU Separate wire pairs from the telephone to the system cabinets are provided in a single 4 pair cable run back to the SIP The pairs separate at the SIP for connection to voice and data ports The 73 series of ADUs measure approximately 4 5 inches in length 2 inches wide and 1 inche high The various Z3A ADUs available are shown in Table 4 D The Z3A ADUs should be installed only on lightning protected facilities they are not designed to be used with CO cables or with exposed outside wiring such as aerial cables The Z3A series of ADUs offer the following features e Provide an interface to the digital switch from RS 232C compa
103. Dn Premises Single Line Voice Terminal Connections e Figure 4 30 Dut Of Building Single Line Voice Terminal Connections Figure 4 31 Dff Premises Station Single Line Voice Terminal Connections Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading later in this Section Multiline Voice Terminals The system supports MERLIN 7300H Series and MET 10 and 12 button only multiline voice terminals Multiline voice terminals have two LEDs located beside each assignable button except for the 34 button basic set The LEDs are referred to as I Use red and Status green LEDs Additional information on the LEDs is provided in Section 2 Most multiline voice terminals support adjuncts The supported adjuncts are described following the voice terminal descriptions Multiline voice terminals can have more than one call appearing at the terminal at one time Each multiline terminal has two System Access buttons on which calls can be made or received System Access buttons are essentially inside line buttons Multiline voice terminals transmit voice signals in analog form and control signals in digital form The terminals operate over Premises Distribution System 4 pair wiring 7300H Series MERLIN Voice Terminals The 7300H series voice terminals are the same as those used with MERLIN Communications Systems They
104. E CP TIME ZTN 76 DIVISION GROUND START MULTIPLEX TRUNK CP OR ZTN 77 CO FX WATS PAGING 0 BUS EQUTEMENT LOOP START TRUNK CP TN 753 DID TRUNKS DID TRUNK CP TN 760B TIE TRUNKS TIE TRUNK CP LEGEND ADU ASYNCHRONOUS DATA UNIT CAS CALL ACCOUNTI NG SYSTEM CO CENTRAL OFFICE CP CIRCUIT PACK DID DIRECT INWARD DIALING DTU DIGITAL TAPE UNIT FX FOREIGN EXCHANGE MET MULTI BUTTON ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE OPS OFF PREMISES STATION SAT SYSTEM ADMI NI STRATI ON TERMI NAL SMDR STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING WATS WIDE AREA TELECOMMUNI CATIONS SERVI Figure 3 6 Equipment Connected To System 25 Via The Call Processor And Port Circuit Packs Sheet 3 of 3 3 15 Eight port circuits are provided on most port circuit packs Line Tie Trunk Auxiliary Trunk Circuit Packs each contain four port circuits The port circuits provide an interface between terminals trunks and the TDM bus The number of port circuit packs required varies per customer requirements and equipment configuration Each of the System 25 port circuit packs contain a number of common elements see B D as well as the unique port circuits The common elements areas follows e Bus buffers e Sanity And Control Interface SAKT e On board microprocessor with external Random Access Memory RAM e One or more Network Processing Elements NPEs e Circuit Pack Address Leads Bus Buffers The bus buffe
105. E TERMINALS 4 E HERE m C1 62 NOTES 1 TRUNK AND STATION CONNECTIONS TO ETU 2 4 ARE SIMILAR TO ETU 1 LEGEND NETWORK ACCESS 21 CO TRUNKS CENTRAL OFFICE ETU 2 GROUND ETU 4 GROUND TO SINGLE POINT GROUND SINGLE ENDED 25 PAIR CABLE 250 3 TO 1 SPLITTER CABLE OR 6016 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 25 PAIR CONNECTORIZED CABLE 25 2 THREE OF EIGHT STATION LINES FROM ANALOG STATION CP AND THREE OF EIGHT TRUNKS FROM CO TRUNK CP WHEN USED ARE FED THROUGH ETU THEY ARE NOT SWITCHED IN THE EVENT OF A POWER FAILURE 3 MAXIMUM ETU S 4 MAXIMUM PFT STATIONS PER ETU 5 Figure 4 28 Multiple ETU Arrangements 4 66 Connectivity Figures Figures 4 29 through 4 54 provide connection information for various equipment These figures have been included as an aid to understanding how equipment may be connected to System 25 and to indicate required connecting and supporting equipment Other arrangements are possible these figures may be useful in developing connecting arrangements for new or customer provided equipment PEC codes have been noted on the figures as have indications of the source for obtaining non PEC equipment eg from installer or furnished with other equipment This information may be of use to Account Executives and Technical Consultants who are adding equipment to existing installations For new installations
106. Equipment Connections 4 68 6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION 5 5 5 5 7 Recommended Network Facilities Trunks 8 17 Analog Transmission Characteristics 8 18 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 2 2 2 5 6 1 1 2 2 8 1 8 2 8 5 8 6 8 9 9 5 9 5 9 6 9 8 9 8 Terminal Operations Manual 555 500 710 10 3 User Guides 700 Series 10 3 11 GLOSSARY 11 1 12 INDEX 12 1 vi LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1 1 System 25 Block Diagram 1 4 Figure 2 1 Automatic Route Selection Flow Chart Sheet 1 of 2 2 32 Figure 2 2 Automatic Route Selection Routing Pattern 2 34 Figure 2 3 Asynchronous Data Unit Interface Signals 2 62 Figure 3 1 System 25 Digital Switch 3 1 Figure 3 3 Memory ZTN 8113 Circuitry 3 7 Figure 3 4 TDM Bus Time Slot Generation Not A Timing Diagram 3 8 Figure 3 5 TDM Bus Diagram Three Cabinet System 3 11 Figure 3 6 Equipment Connected To System 25 Via The Call Processor And Port Circuit Packs Sheet 1 of 3 3 13 Figure 3 15 Unique DID Trunk TN 753 Circuitry 3 33 Figure 3 16 Unique Tie Trunk TN 760B Circuitry 3 35 Figure 3 17 Tie Trunk TN 760B Circuit Pack Option Switches 3 37 Figure 3 18 Unique Auxiliary Trunk TN 763 Circuitry 3 39 Figure 3 19 Service Circuit ZTN 85 3 41 Figure 3 20 Tone Detector TN 748 Circuit 3 44 Figure 3 21 Pooled Modem TN 758 Circuit 3 46 Figure 3 13 Unique MET Line TN 735 Circuitry 3 29 Figure 3 14 Unique Analog Line TN 742 Circuitry 3 30 Vii
107. HNPA Exception List List Number 1 4 Pattern Number 1 8 Exception Numbers NNX or NNX YYYY Last 3 digits maybe FNPA Exception Telephone List Pattern Number 1 8 Telephone Number 8 digits in the form NPA NNX YY Last 2 digits maybe Digit Translations Table Facility Access Codes trunk groups 1 9999 Associated NPA NPA Number of digits to remove for calls within associated NPA 0 10 digits Digit pattern to add for calls within associated NPA 0 5 digits Default 0 Number of digits to remove for calls not in associated NPA 0 10 None Default 0 Digit pattern to add for calls not in associated NPA 0 5 digits Default 0 e ARS Routing Pattern Pattern Number 1 8 Subpattern A Start and End Time Hour Minute Subpattern A and 1 2 and 3 Facility Access Codes 1 9999 Subpattern and 1 2 and 3 FRLs 0 3 Subpattern A and B Overflows to CO facility Yes No Subpattern A and B Overflow FRL 0 3 Voice Terminal Station Port e ARS FRL Level 0 3 Hardware Requirements None 2 31 STATION USER DIALS ARS ACCESS CODE 4011 VOICE TERMINALS RESTRICT OUTWARD CALLS YES VOICE TERMINAL ASSIGNED TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS 1 4 NUMBER DIALED INTERNATIONAL OPERATOR OR OTHER NUMBER DIALED ON EMERGENCY NUMBERS LIST 911 AND THREE CUSTOMER DEFINED 7 DIGIT NUMBERS OTHER
108. Hz 8 kHz and 160 kHz clock signals respectively The clock generator feeds these signals to the clock driver receiver bus buffer and the tone clock The tone clock uses these signals to synchronize the counters in the tone generator and time slot table circuits with the TDM bus Tone Generator The tone generator consists of a digital signal processor DSP a counter and a dual port tone RAM The DSP operates at 10 MHz and produces 24 different tones The dual port tone RAM stores these tones in 24 different addresses The counter under control of the tone clock causes the DSP to transmit one sample of each tone every 8 kHz The counter is synchronized to the TDM bus and is offset to provide delay needed for access time Time Slot Table and Counter The time slot table consists of a dual port time slot table RAM and a counter The dual port RAM DPRAM contains 256 different addresses These addresses correspond to the time slots on the TDM bus The counter sequences through the time slot table addresses in the dual port RAM and causes the proper tone s to be output by the dual port tone RAM on TDM bus time slots Tone Detector Ports The Service Circuit Circuit Pack provides four DTMF detector port circuit interfaces via the TDM bus Each port circuit is connected to an NPE serial input and output Ports 0 1 2 and 3 are tone detectors with NPE loop around paths The four port circuits contain a DSP NPE to DSP interface circuitry
109. ICRO ADDRESS PROCESSOR LEADS CONVERSION RESOURCE 1 RED LEDS YELLOW Figure 3 21 Pooled Modem TN 758 Circuit 3 46 Common Circuitry The Pooled Modem common circuitry which includes all circuitry shown on Figure 3 21 except the Conversion Resource circuitry provides the same general function as the intelligent port common circuitry Conversion Resources The two conversion resources port circuits are identical and each contain the following e Microprocessor e Transmit and Receive I channel Controller TRIC e Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter USART e Data USART Clock DUCK e Digital Signal Processor DSP The microprocessor controls an on board data module and modem This microprocessor communicates with the port circuit microprocessor over a serial control channel This channel allows the on board microprocessor to send messages to the port circuit microprocessor specifying call startup information option settings information requests various test modes and call termination information It also allows the port circuit microprocessor to inform the on board microprocessor of various port circuit status information The DUCK and TRIC interface I channel information between the port circuit and the remote data module The microprocessor controls the operation of the DUCK and the TRIC by programming their internal registers The DUCK and TRIC together recreate the clock and serial d
110. Interdigit Timing Timeout 0 255 seconds Default 24 seconds Hardware Requirements None 2 86 LINE SELECTION Description Multiline voice terminals may have many line facility appearances There are three methods by which a user may select a desired line 1 Prime Line Selection 2 Ringing Line Selection and 3 Preselection Prime Line Preference Automatically connects a multiline voice terminal to a specified line or facility designated as preferred when the terminal goes off hook This feature may be assigned to System Access Automatic Intercom DSS Personal Line and Pooled Facility buttons The user may override this feature by preselecting another button If Prime Line Preference is assigned to an Automatic Intercom AUTO ICOM or DSS button the called voice terminal will ring as soon as the terminal goes off hook When the Prime Line Preference feature is assigned to an AUTO ICOM DSS or Pooled Facility FACILITY access button the button must be pressed to activate the busy to idle reminder even though the button s I Use LED is lighted steadily Ringing Line Preference Automatically connects a multiline voice terminal to an incoming call ringing at the terminal Line access buttons that can be selected by Ringing Line Preference include System Access Automatic Intercom Coverage and Personal Lines If two or more lines are ringing simultaneously the user is connected to the first line to start r
111. Issue 1 1986 555 500 200 AT amp T SYSTEM 25 REFERENCE MANUAL T amp T 1986 amp All Rights Reserved Printed in USA TO ORDER COPIES OF THIS DOCUMENT REFER TO DOCUMENT NUMBER 555 500 200 Contact Your AT amp T Information Systems Account Team or Call 800 432 6600 Monday to Friday between 7 30 am and 6 00 EST or Write AT amp T Customer Information Center 2855 North Franklin Road P O Box 19901 Indianapolis Indiana 46219 FCC NOTIFICATION AND REPAIR INFORMATION AT amp T SYSTEM 25 This telephone equipment is registered with the Federal Communications Commission FCC in accordance with Part 68 of it s Rules In compliance with the Rules be advised of the following MEANS OF CONNECTION Connection of this telephone equipment to the nation wide telecommunications network shall be through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ21X Connection to private line network channels requires jack USOC RJ2GX for tie lines or jack USOC RJ21X for off premises station lines These can be ordered from your Telephone Company NOTIFICATION TO THE TELEPHONE COMPANY If the system is to be connected to off premises stations you must notify the telephone company of the OPS class of service OL13C and the service order code 9 0F Upon the request of the telephone company you shall inform them of the following The Public Switched Network lines that is your phone number and the Private lines to
112. N voice terminals respectively 4A Speakerphone System For 10 Button MET Sets 5101 5102 Speakerphone For 12 Button MET Sets and MERLIN voice terminals respectively 55 1 Key Ground Start Button For Stations on Ground Start Trunks Acoustic Coupler For 7300H Series and MET Sets e AT amp T Answer Record 2500 For Single Line Sets Z34A Message Waiting Indicator For Single Line Sets Voice Terminal Adjunct Power Supplies MET Headset Adapter A headset may be used with 10 Button MET sets One of the following headset adapters must be used JS0180 3A equipped with an 18 inch cord 150180 4 equipped with a eight foot cord 4 38 500A 502A Headset Adapters The 500A 502A Headset adapters Figure 4 15 provide an interface for connecting a headset to an associated voice terminal Each adapter has an ON QUIET button an OFF button a green indicator lamp headset jacks and two modular keyed jacks 4 wire and 8 wire The 500A adapter is designed for use with the 12 Button 7203M MET voice terminal The 502A adapter is designed for use with MERLIN 7300H Series voice terminals with the exception of the 5 Button and HFAI sets The adapters can be used with most commercial headsets The headset adapters are equipped with an 18 inch connecting cord Connecting cords are available optional in lengths of 4 feet and 14 feet The 500 Headset Adapter is powered locally by 2012D Transformer which
113. NDOM FRONT PLANE NETWORK DAY ACCESS BUS MEMORY CONTROLLER CLOCK PROCESSOR BUS SAKI LEADS BUFFERS 5V BATTERY POWER FAIL DETECT Figure 3 2 Call Processor ZTN 82 Circuitry 3 3 Microprocessor 68010 16 bit microprocessor which executes call processing and data processing features This includes all maintenance administration testing and reporting software Memory Management Memory management separates the on board RAM into 1024 memory pages of 256 bytes each Each page is read and write protected generates bus errors when violated and each is recappable allowing data areas to remain contiguous On BoardMemory On board memory includes 64k bytes of ROM containing the power up tests and the switch operating system In addition there is 80k bytes of protected RAM containing writeable data storage for call processing The RAM is backed up by an on board trickle charge battery which maintains memory contents for up to two months Of the 80k RAM 24k is dedicated to translation data The remainder is dedicated to call status data and the operating system message queues EIA Channels Four asynchronous RS 232C EIA ports 1 4 are included to permit communication with an administration terminal a maintenance terminal an SMDR device and a digital tape unit Network Controller The network controller transmits control channel messages between the Call Processor an
114. NET OCTOPUS CABLE PART SIP ZTN 82 CALL PROCESSOR TN 742 ANALOG CONNECTED AS OPS OR CO FACILITY FACILITY TYPICAL MODEM 212 TYPE LEGEND C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE 90780 2720 05 C3 EIA CROSS OVER CABLE M7U 87 2724 306 OPS OFF PREMISES STATION 355AF ADAPTER PEC 2750 A25 73 4 ADU EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT RECEPTACLE PEC 2169 004 248 ADAPTER MODULARIZES 20120 TRANSFORMER 40082 ADAPTER POWER ADAPTER PEC 21691 20210 TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC TRANSFORMER C7 MODULAR POWER CORD D6AP 87 FURNISHED BY INSTALLER f PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL SMDR OUTPUT DEVICE Figure 4 44 Typical Peripheral Equipment Off Premises Switched Connections 4 84 SYSTEM 25 CABINET OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP c5 LEGEND ZTN 78 TIP RING LINE CP TN 742 ANALOG LINE CP 726 DATA LINE Bi TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK NOTES C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 FURNISHED WITH SET Wi 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE WP90851 L1 MODULAR Y ADAPTER PEC 2750 05 Z3A1 ADU E W 3 FT PLUG ENDED CORD 2168 001 NOTES 1 IF RANGE IS GREATER THAN 2000 FT FROM SYSTEM CABINET TERMINAL DATA RATE SPEED WILL BE LIMITED
115. NS 5 LO E gt SPEAKER RING CONTRO A CONFERENCE TRANSFER 5 MV 2 MESSAGE HFAI MICROPHONE RECALL SPEAKER Qi Figure 4 11 HFAI Voice Terminal 730 01 e Ten Button MET Multibutton Electronic Telephone 2991C D05 Ten Button MET set 4 12 may be desk or wall mounted This set is available only on a reuse basis and is not orderable via the Delivery Operation Support System DOSS Configurator The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Tone Dial Pad DTMF Use and Status LEDs Tone Ringer Volume Control Six Predefined Buttons Recall Conference e Drop Transfer e Hold e Message Five Feature Buttons each equipped with I Use and Status LEDs e Two predefined as System Access e Three programmable Default assignments are Repertory Dial Adjuncts e 4A Speakerphone e MET Headset Adapter 4 32 TOUCH DIAL PAD HANDSET SYSTEM ACCESS PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS MESSAGE WAITING DROP CONFERENCE TRANSFER HOLD RECALL INDICATOR BUTTON LAMPS Figure 4 12 Ten Button MET Set 2991C05 Ten Button With Built In Speakerphone 2993C04 10 Button MET set with BIS Figure 4 13 may be desk or wall mounted This set is available only on a reuse basis and is not orderable via the Delivery Operation Support System DOSS Configurator The set
116. Panel SIP The Station Interconnect Panel SIP provides for the connection of the system s terminals voice and data peripheral equipment and some auxiliary equipment to station port CPs This equipment includes voice terminals attendant consoles data terminals System Administration Terminal Digital Tape Unit and Call Accounting System The SIP is made up of 617A Panels and associated adapters Each 617A Panel Figure 4 24 provides connections for up to 24 voice terminals or equivalent auxiliary peripheral devices Ten panels are required for a maximum system Adapters that mount on the panel connect the following e Building wire runs terminated in modular jacks 25 pair connectors or unterminated e Cables from the system cabinets terminated in modular jacks or 25 pair connectors The follwing adapters can be mounted on the 617A panel e 205 1 25 connector to six 4 pair modular jacks One Z205A1 is required per six voice terminals Connects to 25 pair building wiring e Z600A 4 pair modular jack to 4 pair modular jack One required per voice terminal Connects to wiring terminated in modular jacks e Z210A Six 4 pair modular jacks to six 4 pair modular jacks One required per six voice terminals Connects to building wiring terminated in modular jacks Equivalent to six Z600A adapters e Z601A 4 pair modular jack to 110 type cut down block One required per voice terminal Connects to unterminated building wiri
117. Placing a call Equivalent to Ringback Tone Called number far end is being signaled Provided on internal calls only BUSY Placing a call Equivalent to busy tone Called number is in use or out of service Provided on internal calls only ANSWERED Placing or Notifies calling and called users that call receiving a call has been answered Provided on internal calls only TRY AGAIN Placing a call Equivalent to Reorder Tone System facilities are currently not available or invalid number INCOMING CALL Receiving a call Equivalent to ringing PLEASE ANS Placing a call from Originating voice terminal user has a voice terminal transferred call to data terminal using One Button Transfer to Data DISCONNECTED Call is terminated Call or call attempt is disconnected CONNECTED Call is connected Notifies user that the call connection is SPEED NNNN established and what the baud rate is Provided that Connection indication Data Port Action 77 is enabled Notifies user that the handshake between data end points has failed Indicates off premises call is being dialed and completed PLEASE WAIT Placing a call Call queued BAD NUMBER Placing a call Bad dialed number NO MODEM Placing a call No modem available for a call that requires one Bell sounds when message is displayed 2 56 Considerations Terminal Dialing allows users to place data calls from their terminals using the Terminal Dialing feature and allows u
118. R GREEN YELLOW LEDS Figure 3 7 Port Circuit Pack Common Circuitry 3 17 Ground Start Trunk ZTN 76 The Ground Start Trunk Circuit Pack interfaces eight central office trunks and the TDM bus shows the following Ground Start Trunk unique circuitry e Ground detector circuit e Port Input Output I O circuit e Eight port circuits Ground Detector Circuit The ground detector circuit determines if ground has been applied to the tip lead for incoming seizure It also senses tip ground on outgoing seizure indicating dial tone is present One ground sensor is used for each port circuit Input for the ground sensor comes from the port circuit as an analog current to the 48 volt supply The ground sensor s output is a port control point to the port I O circuit Port Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders for communication between on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor Port Circuits The eight port circuits are identical Each port circuit consists of a codec hybrid circuit line transformer relay driver and surge protection circuit The codec is a 4 wire circuit that converts the NPEs digital output to an analog signal Likewise it converts the analog signal from a central office t
119. R t INCLUDES TELEPHONE TERMI NAL Figure 4 29 On Premises Single Line Voice Terminals Connections SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF EXPOSED CABLE SIP LEGEND 742 ANALOG LINE CP Bl TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 FURNISHED WITH SET 01 STANDARD GAS TUBE FUSE PROTECTION PER BSP 460 100 400 Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE NOTE MAXIMUM LOOP RESISTANCE FROM SYSTEM CABINET lt 1300 OHMSt FIVE SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINALS CAN BE BRIDGED ONLY TWO MAY BE OFF HOOK AT ONE TI ME FURNISHED BY INSTALLER t INCLUDES VOICE TEMRI Figure 4 30 Out Of Building Single Line Voice Terminal Connections 4 70 SYSTEM 25 700 NETWORK OCTOPUS INTERFACE BLOCK 110 OR 66 TYPE PART OF i NETWORK SIP INTERFACE TE 0 5 SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINAL CENTRAL OFFICE LEGEND TN 742 ANALOG LINE CP A SINGLE ENDED 25 PAIR CABLE A25D C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05P 1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 4 31 Off Premises Station Single Line Voice Terminal Connections 4 71 SYSTEM 25 OCTOPUS CABLE 0 51 VOICE gt TERMINAL T1 KE LEGEND ZTN 79 HYBRID LINE
120. RELEASE releases the attendant from an extended call and completes the associated call transfer The status LED of the original calling facility will change from hold to busy for direct trunk terminations and from hold to idle for other call facilities e g Return On Busy Return On Don t Answer Cover Automatic Intercom DSS and System Access Calls cannot be released to Reorder or Dial Tone Pressing CANCEL reconnects the attendant to the incoming call If the attendant goes on hook without first releasing a call the call transfer operation will be terminated the calling party remains on hold In this case the attendant can go off hook and press the held call appearance button to reconnect to the incoming call Automatic Release This feature simplifies the attendant procedures by eliminating the need for the attendant to press RELEASE when releasing from one call to answer another Selection of any new line facility while active on the Start button will automatically release the first call At release the status LED of the first calling facility will change from hold to busy for direct trunk terminations and from hold to idle for other call facilities e g Return On Busy Return On Don t Answer Cover Automatic Intercom DSS and System Access Considerations Attendant Manual Release improves attendant efficiency in handling calls by allowing the attendant to release an extended call without having to wait for the called statio
121. ROUND START TRUNK ZTN 76 e MET LINE 735 e LOOP START TRUNK ZTN 77 e ANALOG LINE 742 e DID TRUNK 753 e AUXILIARY TRUNK 763 TIE TRUNK 7608 CIRCUIT PACKS MUST BE MOUNTED IN CABINET 1 IN THE SLOTS INDICATED UNIVERSAL PORT CIRCUIT PACKS CAN BE MOUNTED IN ANY AVAILABLE PORT SLOT SERVICE CIRCUIT MUST BE MOUNTED IN SLOT 3 AS SHOWN POOLED MODEM AND TONE DETECTOR MAY BE MOUNTED IN ANY PORT CIRCUIT SLOT Figure 4 3 System Circuit Pack Configurations 4 6 TABLE 4 Total Port Circuit Packs Per System NUMBER PORT TOTAL PORT OF CABINET CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CABINETS NUMBER PACKS PACKS 1 Cabinet 1 9 9 2 Cabinet 1 9 21 Cabinet 2 12 3 Cabinet 1 9 33 Cabinet 2 12 Cabinet 3 12 Cabinet 1 always required Provides mounting for Memory Call Processor Service Circuit and Port CPs including Tone Detectors and Pooled Modems Cabinet 2 and 3 Optional Provides mounting for Port CPs including Tone Detectors and Pooled Modems The Number of Ports per CP is specified in the CP descriptions 4 7 Circ uit Packs Required Circuit Packs The following CPs are provided with all systems and must be mounted in Cabinet 1 ZTN 82 Call Processor The ZTN 82 one per system provides a central processing unit RAM memory for call and feature processing interrupt controller programmable timers real time clock status display proce
122. ROVED GROUND BAR MOUNTED BUILDING ON 4 BOX SQUARE D GROUND PK9GTA OR APPROVED 6 AWG EQUIVALENT Figure 9 3 AC Power Distribution Multiple Cabinet System 9 7 Grounding Connection of an approved ground to the system cabinets is essential An approved ground may consist of any of the following e Grounded Building Steel The metal frame of the building e Water Pipe A continuous metal water pipe not less than 1 2 inch in diameter that is connected to an underground metal water pipe that is in direct contact with earth for 10 feet or more Concrete Encased Ground An electrode encased by at least 2 inches of concrete and located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing in direct contact with the earth The foundation must consist of at least 20 feet of one or more steel reinforcing bars or rods of not less than 1 2 inch in diameter or at least 20 feet of bare solid copper wire not smaller than No 4 gauge Ground Ring A ring that encircles a building or structure indirect contact with earth at a depth of at least 2 1 2 feet The ring must consiste of al least 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No 2 gauge Lightning Protection A Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC tie wrapped to all trunks provides lightning protection The CBC can be any one of the following e A 16 gauge ground wire e Continuous cable sheath e Six unused pairs of wire The CBC should be run from the telephone
123. Ring Line Provides eight ports for single line sets with or without message waiting lamps Used for in building non bridged voice terminal service within 2000 feet of the system cabinets NOTE Equipment connected to the ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line CP must meet the following requirements e AC impedance 600 ohms DC current Less than 30ma at 48 volts e Ringer Equivalence Number REN Less than 1 15 Set plus adjuncts e ZIN 79 ATL Line Provides eight ports for MERLIN voice terminals Used for service within 1000 feet 305 m of the system cabinets Off premises extensions are not supported Out Of Building stations require units 4 9 Trunk Port Circuit Packs TN 7X3 DID Trunks Provides eight ports for immediate start delay dial or wink start Direct Inward Dialing DID trunks TN 760B Tie Trunks Provides four ports for Type 1 E amp M Type 1 E amp M Compatible or Type 5 Simplex tie trunks operating protocols include automatic immediate start wink start or delay dial The TN 760B contains option switches for supporting the following signaling formats Type 1 E amp M Standard Unprotected Type 1 E amp M Compatible Unprotected Type 1 E amp M Compatible Protected Type 5 Simplex TN 763 Auxiliary Trunk Provides four ports for on premises auxiliary equipment paging systems and dictation systems ZTN 76 Ground Start Trunk Provides eight ports for ground start CO FX or WATS trunks ZTN
124. Run Firm Price Plenum Wiring 2773 JIDX System Wiring Based i On A PCS Quote 3100 1TD Basic Desk Telephone 2500 MMGB 3100 SYS Basic Desk w Message 2500DMGC and Recall 3121 050 AT amp T Answer Record 2500 3140 010 10 button MET VT 2991C05 103871018 3141 BIS Set BIS 2993C04 103942146 Transformer 2012D 102600517 Kit of Parts D181245 4 97 DESCRIPTION APPARATUS CODE COMCODE 3143 12M 12 button MET VT Z7203M01A 003 103963310 3160 111 5 Button MERLIN VT Z7302H01C 003 103960548 3161 172 10 Button MERLIN VT Z7303HOIB 003 103841979 3161 161 MERLIN HFAI VT Z7309H01B 003 103982005 3162 412 34 Button MERLIN VT Z1305H01 B 003 103842050 3162 417 34 But Dlx MERLIN VT Z7305H02B 003 103843538 3162 BIS MERLIN BIS VT Z7305H03B 003 103981965 3163 HFU MERLIN Speaker Mod S102A 103814356 3164 MERLIN Headset 502A Adapter Acoustic Coupler 349A Adapter 3170 00 _ Single Line VT w Message 7101A01 003 103871109 Light amp Recall button Ground Start Key External Alert Message Adjunct Z34A Unit Mod 341 Continued on Miscellaneous No PEC No PEC No PEC No PEC No PEC No PEC 2720 T03 2720 T02 No PEC Not Available DESCRIPTION Cord 25ft Block Connector Cable Conn 15 DE Block Connector Block Connector Panel Part of SIP to Mod Adpter Mod to Mod Adpter ZTN81B 82 interconnect cable APPARATUS D8W 87 25 157B Female A25D 103A
125. TOPUS ante PART OF ZTN 82 CALL PROCESSOR 1 7601 40082 4 ADAPT lt lt 20120 2488 J TRANS ADAPT W1 T PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT LEGEND B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTION BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD 084 87 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05P C3 EIA CROSS OVER CABLE M7U 87 PEC 2724 30C C4 ADU CROSS OVER CABLE D8AM 87 2724 38 W1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 A25 1 1 ADU EQUIPPED WITH A THREE FOOT PLUG ENDED EIA CORD 2169 001 Z3A4 ADU EQUIPPED WITH A 3 FOOT RECEPTACLE ENDED EIA CORD C7 MODULAR POWER CORD D6AP 87 248B ADAPTER MODULARIZES 20120 TRANSFORMER pec 21691 40082 ADAPTER POWER ADAPTER 20210 TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC TRANSFORMER FURNISHED BY INSTALLER T PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL SMDR OUTPUT DEVICE Figure 4 41 Typical Peripheral Equipment On Premises Direct Connections Greater Than 50 Feet From System Cabinet 4 81 SYSTEM 25 eee CABINET PART OF CABLE ZTN 82 CALL PROCESSOR 2500 40082 ADAPT lt ADAPT lt L l PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT NOTE LEGEND B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05 C3 EIA CROSS OVER CABLE M7U 87
126. Tone Detector TN 748 Circuit 3 44 Pooled Modem TN 758 The Pooled Modem Circuit Pack supports 0 300 and 1200 bits per second bps data speeds and provides the following e Circuitry to provide a signal compatible with the modulation formats of the 212 series modems e Modem emulation see below Capability Data Module Mode 0 300 Asynchronous Low 300 Asynchronous 300 Asynchronous 1200 Asynchronous 1200 Asynchronous e Modem control functions corresponding to 212 series modem operations A maximum of two Pooled Modem Circuit Packs are allowed in a single cabinet 6 in a 3 cabinet system The Pooled Modem Circuit Pack Figure 3 21 consists of common circuitry and two conversion resources The conversion resource port allows communications between two dissimilar endpoints For example the Pooled Modem Circuit Pack enables a digital data endpoint linked to a ADU connected to a port on the Data Line Circuit Pack TN 726 to communicate with either a local analog data endpoint such as a personal computer with a modem or a remote host via a CO trunk connection Each port has two connections to the TDM bus One connection is made to the digital data endpoint via an ADU data module The other connection is made to an analog endpoint 3 45 CONVERSION RESOURCE BE BUS 2 EADE BUFFERS 5 2 lt m ex e g gt S wn u CIRCUIT ON BOARD M
127. Transfer connections are shown in Part a on the figure shows a single line voice terminal that has been connected as a Power Failure Transfer station In normal operation the Call Processor CP supplies 48V dc to the ETU The voice terminal is connected through the ETU to the station port CP and can support all calling activities The trunk connection through the ETU to the trunk port supports normal trunk calls Part b on shows the ETU connections when a Power Failure Transfer has occurred The transfer is initiated by the removal of the 48V dc to the ETU AII connections through the system are dropped and direct connections between PFT stations and CO trunks are established A contact closure toward the CO makes all DID trunks busy When the system is again able to process calls normal service is automatically restored Any required ETUs must be included in the DOSS order 4 63 amp 10 EMERGENCY TRANSFER UNIT LINE SWITCH TRUNK surtout LADDITIONAL CPU ETU FOR PROPER OPERATION THIS UNIT MUST BE GROUNDED Figure 4 26 10B Emergency Transfer Unit A multiple ETU arrangement is shown in Figure 4 28 As discussed earlier separate 48 dc control signals from the Call Processor are provided via legs 7 and 8 on Octopus cable C2 25 pair cable from the Analog Line CP provides connectivity for eight voice terminals at the line input to the ETU Since the ETU supports onl
128. UXILIARY TRUNK CP A SINGLE ENDED 25 PAIR CONNECTOR CABLE B25A 1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK CS MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 C6 SINGLE ENDED MODULAR CORD D4BY SEE BELOW P1 KS 22911 Lt POWER SUPPLY SEE BELOW 278A ADAPTER REQUIRES 24 VOLT ZENIER DIODE KIT OF PARTS SEE BELOW PEC 62512 INCLUDES 278A ADAPTER P1 C6 AND ZENER DIODE KIT FURNISHED BY INSTALLER 1 PAGING SYSTEM MAY 20 ZONE MATE 9 PROVIDES 8 PAGING ZONES PLUS ALL ZONE PAGING Figure 4 53 Paging Equipment Connections Using Auxiliary Trunk Ports FCC Registered Or Non Registered 4 93 25 DELAY gt ANNOUNCEMENT EQUIPMENT LEGEND TN 742 ANALOG LINE CP ZTN 78 TIP RING CP B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Qo I Figure 4 54 Delay Announcement Equipment Connections FCC Registered 4 94 Parts Information The following information may assist you in cross referencing Apparatus Codes Comcodes and Price Element Codes PECs PEC DESCRIPTION 6250 011 System 25 Control Unit Carrier Power Supply Fan 2 Air Filter Address Plug TDM Bus Term Memory CP Processor CP Service Circuit CP System 25 Expansion Unit Carrier Power Supply Fans 2 Air Filter Address Plug TDM Bus Cable GS Tru
129. XT PXR T 3 R 3 TXT TXR PXT PXR T 4 R 4 TXT TXR PXT PXR TX PXT PXR w w to gt gt MULTILINE VOICE TERMINALS Data Line TN 726 The Data Line Circuit Pack interfaces eight Asynchronous Data Units ADUs data devices and TDM bus The ADUs are typically in turn connected to RS 232C type devices Figure 3 12 shows the Data Line unique circuitry that includes e A bit clock Bus isolation e Eight port circuits Bit Clock The bit clock circuitry is used to provide the OATMEALs Octal Asynchronous Terminal Mode Two EIA Asynchronous LSIs with a clock frequency that is a multiple of each baud rate In addition the clock rate is divided down to 160 kHz The 160 kHz is then compared to the system s 160 data clock and is phase locked to the system clock The phase locked circuit is required for low speed operation Bus Isolation This portion of the circuit pack is used to isolate the microprocessor bus Isolation is required because the realized bus load exceeds the maximum limit specified for this device due to the large number of devices controlled by the NPE The OATMEALs are isolated from the common bus structure Port Circuits Each of the eight identical port circuits allows the connection of interface equipment having an RS 232C compatible serial interface to the switch The circuit provides an asynchronous full duplex subset of data module speeds
130. a 0 or 1 as the second digit Protocol A set of conventions or rules governing the format and timing of message exchanges to control data movement and correction of errors 11 9 Public Network The network that can be openly accessed by all customers for local or long distance calling Queue An ordered sequence of calls waiting to reprocessed Queuing The process of holding calls in order of their arrival to await connection to an attendant to an answering group or to an idle trunk Calls are automatically connected in first in first out sequence Random Access Memory RAM A storage arrangement whereby information can be retrieved at a speed independent of the location of the stored information Read Only Memory ROM A storage arrangement primarily for information retrieval applications Recall Dial Tone Three short bursts of tone followed by steady dial tone indicates the system has completed some action such as holding a call and is ready to accept dialing Redirection Criteria The information administered for each voice terminal that determines when an incoming call is redirected to coverage Reorder Tone fast busy tone repeated 120 times a minute indicates that at least one of the facilities such as a trunk or a digit transmitter required for the call was not available at the time the call was placed Single Line Voice Terminals Voice terminals served by a single line tip and ring circuit 250
131. a DSP restart circuit an an interrupt generator One DSP implements two tone receivers The TDM bus signals are connected to the DSP in serial form from the NPEs by the DSP interface circuit The DSP controls the output clocking of the NPE The system framing signal is synchronized and connects to the DSP Port I O and Sanity Check Circuit This circuit interfaces the on board microprocessor to the port circuits and checks the sanity status of the port circuits DSPs 3 42 Tone Detector TN 748 The Tone Detector Circuit Pack provides four touch tone receivers and two general purpose tone receivers that detect appropriate system and network tones on the TDM bus The Tone Detector Circuit Pack consists of the same common circuitry as the intelligent port circuits and the following unique circuits see Figure 3 20 e Port I O circuit Port or DSP Sanity check circuit Four touch tone port circuits Two general purpose tone detector ports Two loop around test ports Up to a maximum of two Tone Detector Circuit Packs may be provided in the system Port I O and Sanity Check Circuit This circuit interfaces the on board microprocessor to the port circuits and checks the sanity status of the port circuits Digital Signal Processors DSPs Port Circuits There are eight port circuits Six port circuits are connected to Network Processing Elements NPEs Port circuits 0 1 4 and 5 are DTMF tone detector ports Each of
132. a Set Ready DSR Clear To Send CTS and Received Line Signal Detector DCD are all connected to the CD control signal in the ADU and available if required by the data terminal Refer to Section 8 Port Specifications for additional information TD TO FROM lt RD RD TN 726 TO FROM DTR iud DTR DATA LINE RS 232C amp DCD CIRCUIT PACK DEVICE MODULE lt DSR CTS DTE INTERFACE DCE INTERFACE CD CONTROL SIGNAL CONNECTED IN ADU TO PROVIDE CTS DSR AND DCD TO 5 232 DEVICE Figure 2 3 Asynchronous Data Unit Interface Signals The following categories are part of the DTE data endpoint group a Data Terminal Without ASCII Keyboard This category includes such devices as Fax machines EBCDIC or Baudot terminals and receive only devices such as printers Once connected to an ADU data module and turned on these data endpoints appear on line and available when they are turned on and ready to enter the Setup mode on auto answered calls modes are described below These endpoints will display or print information received after a valid connection has been established without additional RS 232C control from that endpoint Note that these are answer only endpoints ASCII Data Terminal With Keyboard This category can be subdivided into two classes 1 basic terminals and 2 intelligent programmable data equipment such as personal c
133. a behind the cabinet and to the side as shown on Figure 9 2 must be reserved for the cross connect field and cable access Also room for system growth should be considered 9 1 SSSI SASSY Y mas NOTES 1 eS ae BACKBOARD TERMINATION FIELD NOTE 4 SYSTEM CABINETS FOOTPRINT TON NOTE 3 TABLE 24 NOTES 1 115V 60 Hz 15 AMP OUTLETS HUBBELL 5262 OR EQUIVALENT MUST BE LOCATED WITHIN FOUR FEET OF SYSTEM CABINETS 2 MULTIPLE CABINET SYSTEMS REQUIRE TWO QUAD OUTLETS SINGLE CABINET SYSTEMS REQUIRE ONE QUAD OUTLET 3 ALLOW AT LEAST 24 INCHES OF SPACE IN FRONT OF CABINETS TABLE MUST BE ABLE TO SUPPORT 250 POUNDS 4 BACKBOARD IS 3 4 INCHES THICK BY 48 INCHES WIDE BY 96 INCHES LONG FOR MAXIMUM SYSTEM Figure 9 1 Typical System 25 Equipment Area Floor Plan 617 617 6 8 I 617 gt 5 7 9 BACKBOARD TERMINATION QUAD AC OUTLETS Figure 9 2 Typical System 25 Equipment Area Elevation Plan Table Top Space The following system equipment requires customer provided table top space in the equipment area e System Cabinets Each cabinet is 13 inches high 7 inches wide and 21 inches deep A three cabinet system requires a vertical space of approximately 40 inches and a 17 inch by 21 inch table top space Each cabinet weighs approximately 75 pounds Place the cabinets o
134. a to from the Operating System as well as control all voice and data features supported by the system Station Call Processing includes the processing of messages and data associated with voice terminal on hook off hook indications associated port identifications button and LED operations etc The SMDR software generates SMDR records associated with a particular call The records are then sent to the System RAM for storage and then to the SMDR output channel 5 2 Call Processor Circuit Pack System Provides for the storage of the following e Variables for the various software tasks e System translations e Error Records e Feature Code Data e Stack Error Logger Prioritizes and stores system errors The errors are stored in three error records located in System RAM which are e Permanent System Alarms e Transient System Errors Most Recent System Errors The Error Logger lights the Alarm LED located on the Attendant Console when a serious error is detected Operating System OS Controls all message and data flow to from the Memory Circuit Pack and the Arch Angel Driver Interface to the microprocessors on the port circuit packs and to RS 232C driver interfaces Messages destined for a particular task are queued until the associated task can receive them When a task has completed a particular process the next message is obtained from the task s message queue The OS provides an interval timer which is used to time task
135. al then that terminal is termed the away terminal There are two cases to consider e Call Not Placed From The Away Terminal the general case e Call Placed From The Away Terminal a special case 2 108 1 Call Not Placed from Away Terminal the general case The call will first be directed to the away voice terminal Ringing will occur at the away terminal if it is an on hook single line voice terminal or if it is a multiline voice terminal with an idle System Access button A call unanswered at the away terminal will be forwarded to the home terminal unless one of the following two busy conditions exists at the home terminal 1 it is a multiline terminal with both System Access buttons busy or 2 it is a single line voice terminal which is off hook has no idle Call Coverage receiver and it has no idle hunted to station While either of these two busy conditions exists at the home terminal the call will not return to the home terminal Instead it will continue to ring at the away terminal until answered or times out If either of the above two busy conditions ends at the home terminal while the call is waiting at the away terminal the call will be forwarded to the home terminal If the call is forwarded to the home terminal it can be answered or receive the terminal s hunting or call coverage treatment The call coverage treatment given to calls which are forwarded from an away terminal differs in two respects from the t
136. all Record and Call Record Header formats Considerations SMDR provides detailed call information on incoming and outgoing calls This information can be used to facilitate cost allocation traffic analysis and detection of unauthorized calls 2 131 Interactions e Account Code Entry Allows users to have an account code or project number associated with each call record e Direct Group Calling DGC For an incoming call to a DGC group which is connected to an announcement and never answered 0 will be reported in the STN field of the call record If the call is answered by a station after receiving the announcement that station will be listed in the STN field Modem Pooling SMDR records do not reflect modem pool resource usage Administration System e Send SMDR records To RS 232C Port Yes No Default Yes e Bill Calls S Seconds After Last Digit Dialed 10 255 Default 40 Hardware Requirements An AT amp T Model 475 printer or any standard RS 232C serial 80 column ASCII printer is required to print the SMDR output The printer must be dedicated to SMDR to insure that all calls are recorded AT amp T Call Accounting Systems may be used as the SMDR output device Refer to Section 4 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR And Call Accounting System for additional information 2 132 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08
137. ata stream from the remote data module and process an on board clock and serial data stream for delivery to the remote data module Control information handshaking and RS 232 control leads is passed between the port circuit microprocessor and the remote data module by the TRIC The USART interfaces the DUCK s serial data stream to the conversion microprocessor The USART can be programmed by the microprocessor to operate synchronously or asynchronously The USART also performs the following tasks for the port circuit microprocessor e Appends start and stop bits to parallel data received from the microprocessor in the asynchronous mode e Converts serial data received from the DUCK to parallel data e Buffers data in both directions Detects and generates break characters The DSP provides modem emulation It interfaces the port circuit signal and the remote modem The microprocessor directs the DSP to execute one of many programs The DSP produces data carrier detection and timing information for the port circuit microprocessor 3 47 4 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION This Section provides a description of System 25 hardware components and their functions The hardware is described under the following major headings e System Cabinets Includes Circuit Pack CP carriers and CPs e Terminal Equipment Equipment that can be connected to voice or data station ports Peripheral Equipment Equipment that can be connected to the Call P
138. ation 1 3 DIGITAL SWITCH SYSTEM 25 2326 ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL RS 232C EMERGENCY DC COMMON BE TRANSFER CONTROL BACKUP UNIT COMPLEX UNIT RS 232C SMOR OUTPUT DEVICE SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINALS ANALOG TRUNK FACILITIES ANALOG FACILITIES 010 FX MATS LOOP GROUND START TIE CO LOOP GROUND START MULTILINE VOICE HYBRID TERMINALS SWITCHING ATTENDANT NETWORK DIRECT TRUNK HYBRID PORTS DATA ASYNCHRONOUS HOST COMPUTERS TERMINALS PRINTERS TERMINATION DATA CONSOLE UNIT ADU ATTENDANT DIRECT EXTENSION He SELECTOR CONSOLE ANALOG RS 232C DIGITAL DEVICES e MUSIC SOURCE e EXTERNAL ALERTS DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT e PAGING SYSTEMS e DICTATION EQUIPMENT AUXILIARY TRUNKS PAGING SYSTEMS DICTATION EQUIPMENT Figure 1 1 System 25 Block Diagram 1 4 2 FEATURES AND SERVICES INTRO DUCTION This section describes the System Features Station Features Attendant Features and Data Features of AT amp T System 25 The feature descriptions are arranged in alphabetical order regardless of the feature group to which they belong Information for each feature is presented under five headings Description Considerations Interactions Administration and Hardware Requirements e Description Defines the feature describes what it does for the user and how it is used e Considerations Discusses the applications an
139. before completing entry are recorded and cannot be corrected If before all digits have been entered 1 the user goes on hook 2 a button other than ACCT ENTRY is pressed or 3 30 seconds have elapsed since the feature was invoked the SMDR call record will show the digits dialed up to that point If a call is on hold this feature cannot be invoked 2 6 Interactions e Conference If more than one user attempts to enter an account code a Conference Call the first to enter a code will prevail e Repertory Dialing An Account Code may be stored on a REP DIAL button Press REP DIAL at the point where ACCT ENTRY would normally be pressed e Speed Dialing An Account code may be stored in System or Personal Speed Dial Number Transfer A user may transfer a call to another user then instead of hanging up enter an account code Subsequent account code entries for the same call will be ignored Administration System e Maximum number of Account Code digits 0 15 Default 15 Voice Terminal Station Port e Multiline terminals Account Code Entry Button is required e Single line terminals none Hardware Requirements Requires a RS 232C compatible 80 column ASCII serial printer or other output device 2 7 ATTENDANT CALL TRANSFER Description Allows the attendant to transfer an incoming call using the Attendant Console START and RELEASE buttons or the optional DXS console While the Attendant
140. ch port circuit consists of a coder decoder codec hybrid circuit electronic battery feed circuit ring relay and overvoltage surge protection circuit The codec is a 4 wire circuit that converts the analog signal from a voice terminal to a PCM data signal It converts an incoming PCM data signal from the NPEs to an analog signal The hybrid circuit converts the 4 wire analog signal from the codec to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the analog line Filtered power is provided for the codec and hybrid circuits The electronic battery feed circuit provides talking battery to the voice terminal It also produces a controlled battery feed for short and long loops detects when a receiver is lifted and provides the message waiting signal by periodically turning off the feed voltage The ring relay provides the interface between the ringing application circuit and the port circuit It causes ringing turn on and turn off The overvoltage surge protection circuit provides lightning surge and power line cross protection for the circuit pack Note The TN 742 may be used instead of the ZTN 78 Tip Ring Circuit Pack The TN 742 supports up to five bridged single line voice terminals however only two may be off hook at one time The ZTN Circuit Pack does not support bridged terminals In addition the TN 742 supports out of building extended and off premises stations the ZTN 78 does not 3 31 DID Trunk TN 753 The DID
141. ch trunk may be administered so that incoming calls are directed to a specified DGC group Facility Access Restriction see Stations may be restricted from dialing the CO trunk pool and or all fifteen other trunk groups as a whole Stations so restricted may still dial out if they are passed transferred as a trunk by another station not so restricted e Tie Trunks Refer to the description e Toll Restrictions see Calling Restrictions When toll restricted stations access FX WATS or Tie trunks they are not toll restricted 1 toll restriction applies to CO trunks only 2 143 Administration Trunk Port Note Assign Trunk Type And Number Assign Class Of Service Code DID 1 4 Other 015 Assign Facility Access Code Default See Note Allow Dial Access Yes No Default Yes Assign To DGC Group Group Number 1 32 or 0 for none Default 0 Make This a Directed Flex Night Service Trunk Yes No Default Yes Assign Night Service Delay Announcement Announcement 1 or 2 or 0 or none Default 0 Dial Inward Capability Tone or Pulse Default Pulse Tie trunks only Default Facility Access Codes are based on the CPs in a system Defaults are assigned as follows Loop Start Trunks 100 Ground Start Trunks 101 Tie Trunks 102 Hardware Requirements Associated trunk port interfaces 2 144 TRANSFER Description Allows users to connect in
142. chronous Data Unit ARS Automatic Route Selection ASCII American Standard Code for Information Exchange Administer To access and change the parameters associated with the services or features of the system Analog Data Endpoint Data endpoints with customer provided built in or stand alone modems They do not require the use of data modules asynchronous data units and are addressed similar to any voice terminal by PDC These end points connect to tip ring type circuit pack ports Analog Voice Terminals Voice terminals served by a single line tip and ring circuit 2500 series and 7101A voice terminals or industry standard Dual Tone Multifrequency equivalent Appearance See Call Appearance Asynchronous Data Transmission A scheme for transmitting data where each character is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop bit thus permitting data elements to occur at irregular intervals This type transmission is advantageous when transmission is not regular characters typed at a keyboard Asynchronous Data Unit ADU A data communications equipment DCE type device that allows direct connection between RS 232C equipment and the digital switch via ports on the Data Line Circuit Pack TN 726 Attendant The operator of the attendant console 11 1 Attendant Console e Direct Trunk Termination Console An electronic call handling position with pushbutton control Used by attendants to answer and place calls and t
143. cility Indicates the facility used to place the call For outgoing calls including speed dialed numbers the pooled facility selected by ARS or the facility access code that is dialed or that corresponds to the facility button that was pressed is identified For incoming calls and Personal Line calls the trunk number is identified Blank Column 52 STN Column 53 56 Identifies the voice terminal responsible for the call If an account code is entered the voice terminal where the code is entered is reported If no account code is entered the voice terminal originating an outgoing call is identified or the last voice terminal connected to an incoming call is identified For an incoming call to a DGC group which is connected to an announcement but is never answered 0 will be recorded in the STN field If the call is answered by station after receiving announcement the station answering the call will be recorded Blank Columns 57 58 ACCOUNT Columns 59 73 Lists the Account Code associated with the call if one was entered On conference and transferred calls the first account code entered is recorded and subsequent account code entries are ignored Blank Column 74 PDC Columns 75 78 Identifies the user responsible for outgoing calls The user is identified by the call accountability login PDC entered at the originating voice terminal If no accountability is entered the PDC field is blank and summarize the C
144. circuitry e Ringing application circuit e Port Input Output I O circuit e Eight port circuits PORT CIRCUIT 0 0 1 10 ON BOARD CIRCUIT MICRO 3 PROCESSOR TO ANALOG RINGING T 4 TIP RING CIRCUIT H CIRCUIT U o POWER SUPPLY 48V TO 24V POWER CONDITIONER Figure 3 10 Unique Tip Ring Line ZTN 78 Circuitry 3 22 Ringing Application Circuit This circuit receives ringing voltage from the power supply It monitors ringing voltage and current and generates signals to the on board microprocessor indicating zero ringing voltage and current It also detects when a terminal user has lifted the receiver during ringing preventing the application of ringing to the terminal s handset receiver Port I O Circuit This circuit includes bus expanders connecting the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor 48V To 24V Power Conditioner This circuit converts 48V power from the power supply into a conditioned source of 24V power for the electronic battery feed circuits Port Ciruits Each port circuit is identical A port circuit consists of coder decoder codec hybrid circuit battery feed circuit and ring relay The codec is a 4 wir
145. clear error messages and alarms by entering the proper commands at the System Administration Terminal System Errors And Alarms If a maintenance object fails periodic tests the system automatically generates an error record which is placed in one of three software tables error logs The failure may be classified as a Permanent System Alarm or as an unverified failure that never becomes a Permanent System Alarm A Permanent System Alarm causes the Alarm LED on the Attendant Console to light This alarm indication is a signal to the attendant to contact maintenance personnel System alarms are classified as Permanent System Alarms Failures that cause degradation of service and require immediate attention These alarms cause the Alarm LED on the Attendant Console to light and an alarm record to be stored in the permanent System Alarm error log e Transient System Errors Potential failures that may cause degradation of service These do not light the Alarm LED on the Attendant Console These are errors that have not been verified by system self tests and are not yet serious enough to be classified as Permanent System Alarms If an error that begins as a Transient System Error is verified or reaches a threshold level of severity it is reclassified as a Permanent System Alarm Transient system errors are stored in the Transient System Error log The system can store a combined total of 40 Permanent System Alarms and Transient System Er
146. comes equipped with the following Handset Touch dial pad DTMF I Use and Status LEDs Built In Speakerphone Tone Ringer Volume Control Speakerphone Volume Control On Quiet and Off Speakerphone Control Buttons Speakerphone Indicator Lamp Six Predefined Buttons e Recall Button Conference Drop Transfer Hold Message Five Feature Buttons each equipped with I Use and Status LEDs e Two predefined as System Access e Three programmable Default assignments are Repertory Dial Adjuncts None 4 34 TOUCH DIAL SYSTEM ACCESS PAD PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS y ooooog Ti o HANDSET ions i 57 57 2225555 ON QUIET f xd OFF BUTTON VOLUME RECALL INDICATOR CONTROL BUTTON LAMPS MESSAGE WAITING DROP CONFERENCE TRANSFER HOLD 819 Figure 4 13 Ten Button With Built In Speakerphone 2993C04 4 35 Twelve Button MET Set 7203M The 12 Button MET Figure 4 14 15 a freestanding voice terminal This set is available only on a reuse basis and is not orderable via the Delivery Operation Support System DOSS Configurator set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Tone Dial Pad I Use and Status LEDs Tone Ringer Volume Control Message Waiting LED Seven Predefined Buttons e Recall C
147. coming trunk calls to other outside trunks and then hang up under certain conditions Incoming trunk calls may be transferred to another trunk or conference with another trunk In all cases and at all times either a System 25 station must remain in the conference or one of the calls must be an incoming call on a ground start DID or tie trunk The other call may be on any type of trunk and may be incoming or outgoing Considerations Trunk To Trunk transfer is particularly useful when an outside caller requests a transfer to another outside number For example an employee can call in and have their call transferred elsewhere Note that as long as an inside station stays on the call even if a multiline station puts the call on hold and hangs up any two trunks may be conferenced If the station drops out of the call the trunk conference will be torn down unless the above conditions are met Interactions Conference Trunk To Trunk transfers may be set up using the Conference feature The conference must include an incoming trunk call on either a ground start DID or tie trunk if it is to continue after all inside stations have dropped off Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 145 3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Figure 3 1 shows the System 25 digital switch The basic switch hardware consists of the following e Common Control Memory Bus Memory Switching Network u and Poo
148. company provided network interface to the system Cabinet 1 s gorund block If the telephone company has not extended the CBC from the facility entrance to the network interface the System 25 installer should run the CBC along the same route as the incoming facilities where feasible 9 8 10 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION The following System 25 documents are available for your reference A brief description of each is provided e Administration Manual 555 500 500 e An Introduction to AT amp T System 25 555 500 021 e Implementation Manual 555 500 650 e Installation and Test Manual 555 500 100 e Maintenance Manual 555 500 105 e Planning Manual 555 500 600 e Reference Manual 555 500 200 e Terminal Operations Manual 555 500 710 e User Guides Attendant Console User Guide 555 500 701 Data Terminal Reference Guide 555 500 704 Multiline Voice Terminal User Guide 555 500 703 Single Line Voice Terminal User Guide 555 500 702 In addition to the above the following supplementary material is also available e Application Notes Binder 555 509 002 e AT amp T Call Accounting System User s Guide 555 006 201 Implementation Guide 999 500 247 e AT amp T Model 703 SAT Supplement 555 500 720 e Customer Education Leader Guide 555 500 016 e Customer Education Student Guide 555 500 014 e Customer Training Superpac 555 500 011 e System 25 Product Brochure PM 4410 e System 25 Slim Jim Brochure PM 4409 Administration Manual 555 500 500 Prov
149. cuits The TDM bus connects the intelligent ports to the Common Control circuit packs and other ports through the network control circuit The system resource circuits provide tone sources receivers detectors and pooled modems The intelligent ports connect external communications facilities to the TDM bus TDM Bus The TDM bus consists of two groups of eight signal leads and five control leads each with matching grounds The port circuit packs place digitized voice pulse code modulated PCM signals on the bus The bus operates at 2 048 MHz The system framing pulse is 8 kHz This provides 256 time slots 0 225 on the bus The time slots are 488 ns wide Time slots are generated as shown in Figure 3 4 The first five time slots are used for communications between the Common Control the intelligent port and resource circuit packs SYSTEM FRAME 8 KHZ 195 MICROSECONDS 488 NANOSECONDS 2 048 MHZ TIME SLOTS 0 1 2 3 4 5 255 0 256 TIME SLOTS E Figure 3 4 TDM Bus Time Slot Generation Not A Timing Diagram 3 8 Two time slots are required for each 2 party conversation Each party trasmits talks one time slot and receives listens on another Only five parties are allowed in a conference During a conference connection each member of the conference transmits on an individual time slot while receiving on as many as four other time slots The actual switch capacity is 115 simultaneous 2
150. d 8 1 2 inches long The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Tone Dial Message Indicator Tone Ringer with Volume Control Two Fixed Feature Buttons e Recall Used to place a call on hold and to obtain recall dial tone for Conference Transfer and other features accessible by feature access code e Disconnect Used to disconnect one call and immediately obtain dial tone for another call Refer to Single Line Terminal User Guide 555 500 702 for information about feature operation HANDSET TOUCH TONE HANDSET TELEPHONE DIAL TOUCH TONE TELEPHONE DIAL RINGER VOLUME MESSAGE RECALL INDICATOR 2500 DMGC HANDSET TOUCH TONE TELEPHONE DIAL 2500 MMGB Figure 4 4 Model 2500 Series Analog Voice Terminals TOUCH TONE TELEPHONE DIAL FIXED FEATURE BUTTONS HANDSET MESSAGE VOLUME INDICATOR CONTROL Figure 4 5 Model 7101A Analog Voice Terminal 4 17 Model 2500 Series Voice Terminal Adjuncts Adjunct 2500DMGC 2500MMGB 2500SM 2514 2554BM 4A Speakerphone 55 1 Ground Start Key AT amp T Answer Record 2500 or Code A Phone 2540 Answering Machine 234A Message x x x x Waiting Indicator Note The 7101A voice terminal does not support the use of adjuncts Single Line Voice Terminal Connection Information Single line voice terminal connection information is provided in the following figures e Figure 4 29
151. d Ring eLoop Voltage 48V dc e Signaling Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF only e max 5 0 eDC Current max 40 mA eLoop Range 24 AWG 24 000 feet Supports Out of Building Extended greater than 2000 feet Off Premises and Bridged Station services maximum of five bridged stations and two off hook simultaneously Port Specifications Contd VOICE TERMINAL PORTS Contd STATION TYPE CIRCUIT PACK SPECIFICATIONS MET Sets MET Line Hybrid TN 735 e 3 Pair Interface 1 Voice pair 2 Control pairs eAnalog Voice Digital Control Signaling e Power Phantom Power Over Data Pairs Bipolar Signaling With OV dc Offset el MHz Nominal Signaling Rate eLoop Range 1000 feet In Building service only MERLIN Sets ATL Line 7300H Series ZTN 79 Hybrid e3 Pair Interface pair 1 Control pair l Power pair e Analog Voice Digital Control Signaling eBipolar non return to zero line coding e40 kHz Nominal signaling rate eLoop Range 1000 feet eIn Building and In Range Out of Building IROB services only 8 14 Port Specifications Contd TRUNK PORTS TRUNK TYPE CIRCUIT PACK SPECIFICATIONS Auxiliary Trunk e Capacity 4 Circuits e3 pair interface Voice T R Signaling 5 51 Status SZ 571 Direct Inward Dialing DID Trunk e2 Wire 600 Ohm Fixed Impedance Transmission Capacity 8 Circuits Signaling Wink Start Delay Dia
152. d a port interface on a ZTN 79 ATL Line CP 2 16 ATTENDANT MESSAGE WAITING Description 2 Allows the attendant to control the status of Message LEDs on stations so equipped Considerations This feature allows the attendant to notify stations that a message is available for them The attendant can activate the station s Message LED while either 1 ringing 2 receiving Busy Tone or 3 talking to a station The status of the called party s Message LED is reflected by the Attendant Message Waiting ATT MSG status LED in any of these cases To activate light a user s Message LED in any of these cases the attendant presses the ATT MSG button If the voice terminal is not equipped with a Message LED the attendant s LED will remain dark If the attendant presses ATT MSG a second or third time before hanging up the user s Message LED will turn Off and back On etc The red I Use LED associated with the ATT MSG button does not light The attendant can turn On or turn Off a user s Message LED without disturbing the user going off hook on a System Access button pressing ATT MSG to obtain the required state and then dialing the station Confirmation Tone is returned This feature is not the same as the Station To Station Message Waiting or the Call Coverage Cover Message Waiting features Refer to the feature description for a summary of all system Messaging Services Interactions e Conference Pressing ATT MSG while on a
153. d benefits of the feature followed by feature parameters and factors to reconsidered when the feature is used e Interactions Lists and briefly describes other features that may affect the feature being described Interacting features are those that Depend on each other One of the features must be provided if the other one is Cannot coexist One of the features cannot be provided if the other one is Affect each other The operation of one feature modifies or is modified by the operation of the other Enhance each other The features in combination provide improved service to the user e Administration States whether or not administration is required and lists items requiring administration e Hardware Requirements List any additional hardware needed to use the feature A listing of features by group System Station Attendant or Data immediately follows this Introduction Each feature s type is also noted on this list Features are either e Standard features Built into each system always provided e Custom features Require administration inputting feature related parameters via the System Administration Terminal e Optional features Such as Music On Hold require both adminsitration and additional hardware Features restricted to single line or multiline voice terminals are noted where applicable MET sets operate the same way as 5 button 7300H series voice terminals unless otherwi
154. d the port circuits over the TDM bus The controller also monitors system clocks The controller includes an 8 bit microprocessor which acts as a throttle passing messages between the Call Processor and the port board microprocessors All uplink messages from the port circuits are checked for consistency and passed to the common control The controller is the distribution control point for all downlink control messages It continuously scans over the TDM bus the port circuit microprocessors for sanity and activity External RAM associated with this microprocessor stores control channel information and port related information The controller consists of bus buffers and a System And Control Interface SAKI The bus buffers provide the interface between the TDM bus and the on board data buses to the SAKI The SAKI receives and transmits control messages on the first five time slots on the TDM bus The microprocessor communicates with the SAKI and external RAM over the address and data bus Clock A clock provides time of day information in seconds minutes and hours and the date to the 68010 The clock automatically adjusts for leap years An on board battery backs up the clock so that accurate time is maintained even when the system power is off Front Plane Interface Dedicated buffers provide an interface to the front plane which is the communication path to the Memory Circuit Pack Reset Circuitry The processor is automatically reset w
155. ded Station counts as one of the two allowable outside lines on a conference call Exclusion Exclusion may be invoked before establishing a conference If it is invoked after the conference is established all internal conferees will be dropped 2 58 Music On Hold outside line placed hold when CONFERENCE is pressed will hear Music On Hold if provided However if the outside line is already part of a conference music is not heard Off Premises Stations OPS For conference purposes an OPS counts as one of the two allowable outside lines Paging System Access A paging zone may not be conference Trunk To Trunk Transfer Trunk to trunk transfers may be set up using the Conference feature The conference must include an incoming trunk call on either a ground start DID or Tie trunk if it is to continue after all inside stations have dropped off Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 59 CONFERENCE DROP Description Allows a voice terminal user to selectively drop a previously added party from a conference call On a multiline voice terminal pressing the DROP button and then pressing the button appearance of a conference party drops that party from the conference If all System 25 stations hang up on a conference with two outside lines the outside parties will remain conferenced until one of them hangs up if at least one is a ground start tie trunk or DID trunk that has an inc
156. e ADU Connections Figure 4 45 and Figure 4 46 provide connection information for data terminals associated single line or multiline voice terminals The voice terminal and data terminal leads are separated at the SIP with a Y adapter and are connected to their respective station ports Figure 4 47 shows local power connections for Z3A1 Z3A2 and Z3A4 ADUs Auxiliary Equipment Connections Figures 4 48 through Figure 4 54 provide connection information for Auxiliary Equipment This equipment supports various features as follows Figure 4 48 Dictation System Access Figure 4 49 External Alerts and Figure 4 b1 Music On Hold or Delayed Access Figure 4 52 and Figure 4 53 Paging System Access Figure 4 54 Delay Announcements 4 68 SYSTEM 25 CABINET part OF OCTOPUS PART OF CABLE SIP 7601 2500 SETS NOTE LEGEND ZTN 78 TIP RING CP 742 ANALOG LINE CP Bl TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 FURNISHED WITH SET Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE NOTE RANGE LESS THAN 2000 FEET FROM SYSTEM CABINET USE ZTN 78 RANGE MORE THAN 2000 FEET BUT LESS THAN 1300 OHMSt LOOP RESISTANCE FROM SYSTEM CABINET USE TN 742 CP FIVE SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINALS CAN BE BRIDGED WHEN USING A TN 742 CP HOWEVER ONLY TWO MAY BE OFF HOOK AT ONE TIME FURNISHED BY INSTALLE
157. e The call coverage of the principal station owner determines call coverage for the line Call Park parked Personal Line is bridgeable by any user with a button appearance of that line Bridging on to the connection does not unpark the call The parked call will not return to the parking user Call Pickup After a call is picked up from a Personal Line button the called terminal can still enter the call Direct Group Calling A trunk may be used both as a Personal Line and also be directed to a DGC group If an incoming call is not answered by the DGC group after a predetermined number of rings ringing and LED flashing will be transferred to all button appearances of the line unless a DGC delay announcement is provided Hold A Personal Line cannot be placed on hold if any other stations that share the line are also off hook on the line Line Selection Prime Line Preference Prime Line Preference may be assigned to a Personal Line Pooled Facility A Personal Line may also be a member of a pooled facility group Toll Restriction see Restrictions Personal Lines are subject to the toll restriction options of the stations on which they appear 2 111 Administration Voice Terminal Station Port e Assign Personal Line feature button e Assign Personal Line trunk number e Make this the Principal owner Yes No e Enable Personal Line Ringing Yes No Hardware Requirements Requires port assignments for
158. e Call Pickup feature Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 107 PERSONAL DIAL CODE PDC Description Each station is assigned a PDC The user may log in the PDC at any other voice terminal A PDC can be assigned to a convenience voice terminal i e not associated with a particular user and to data terminals with modems Digital data endpoints are assigned Data Dial Codes DDCs There are two types of PDCs e PDCs Assigned to users with their own voice terminal referred to as the home terminal To use the PDC at another voice terminal the PDC may be logged in there e Floating PDCs FPDCs Assigned to employees who do not have their own voice terminal and to visitors who will be receiving calls A call to a FPDC will ring at the terminal where it is logged in or optionally at the Attendant Console if it is not logged in Up to 200 PDCs and 300 FPDCs can be assigned in a system Note The following call types are station oriented They do not redirect to an away terminal e Automatic Intercom Calls e DSS Calls and DXS Calls e DGC Group Calls e Personal Line Calls e Directed Night Service Calls Calls Placed to A PDC If the PDC is either logged in at its home terminal or is not logged in anywhere a call to the PDC will simply be directed to the home terminal and will receive that terminal s normal hunting or call coverage treatment If the PDC is logged in at another termin
159. e NPA dialed the system can remove up to 10 digits and then add up to 5 digits as specified to route the call The following tones are associated with ARS Confirmation Indicates that a queued call is being serviced trunk available to route call Busy lIndicates that the called number is busy e Reorder Indicates that all trunks are busy the ARS queue is full or that ARS calling is denied e Preferred Route Tone Five very short tones that indicate that your call has been queued for the preferred route 2 29 Considerations With ARS users do not have to worry about accessing a particular pooled facility to make a long distance call The user simply dials the ARS access code and the desired number The system then routes the call via the facility best suited for that call The following provides a summary of the ARS call routing controls provided by the feature Emergency Numbers List 911 and up to three customer defined 7 digit numbers Toll Call Allowed Lists 1 4 lists 64 entries maximum between all lists Entries may be 3 digit NPA codes or 6 digit NPA plus CO codes Administrable for other than ARS Station Toll Restriction Class 1 4 Classes Administrable for other than ARS HNPA Exception List 1 4 Lists each with an associated ARS Routing Pattern 64 3 digit CO codes entries maximum between all lists eight of the entries may be 7 digit numbers NPA Routing Table Entries may include every
160. e circuit that converts the NPEs output to an analog signal Likewise it converts the analog signal from a central office trunk to a PCM data signal to the NPE The hybrid circuit converts the codec 4 wire analog signal to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the central office trunk by the line transformer The battery feed circuit provides talking battery to the voice terminal It also detects when a receiver is lifted and provides the message waiting signal by periodically reducing the feed voltage to zero The ring relay provides the interface between the ringing application circuit and the port circuit It causes ringing to turn on and off 3 23 ATL Line ZTN 79 The ATL Line Circuit Pack interfaces eight hybrid voice terminal 7300H series lines and the TDM bus It terminates three pairs of wires from each terminal analog voice pair digital control pair and power pair Figure 3 11 shows the following ATL Line unique circuitry e Protocol handler e Eight port circuits Protocol Handler The 8 bit on board microprocessor translates the control information in CCMS message format to the control information message format used by the 7300H series voice terminals The protocol handler sends the messages to the terminals via transceivers located in the port circuits Port Circuits Each port circuit is identical A port circuit consists of an analog port one half of a transceiver and an electronic power feed device T
161. e following figures e Figure 4 50 Music On Hold Equipment Connections FCC Registered e Figure 4 51 Music On Hold Equipment Connections Non Registered Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading later in this Section Paging Equipment This equipment supports the Paging System Access feature Paging may occur in up to three zones or in all zones at once The recommended method of interfacing is via CO trunks either loop or ground start using a PAGE PAC 20 equipped with Zone Mate 9 this requires only one trunk port interface The following PAGE PAC units may be used PAGE PAC Family equipped with Common Control Unit one zone only PAGE PAC Family equipped with Zone Mate 9 Some customer provided equipment may require separate ports on the Trunk CPs for each zone The ZTN 76 Ground Start Trunk or ZTN 77 Loop Start Trunk CP is the preferred paging equipment interface If the paging equipment requires a contact closure 763 Auxiliary Trunk CP Pack must be used Refer to Section 2 Paging System feature related information Detailed connection information is provided in the following figures e Figure 4 52 Paging Equipment Connection Using CO Trunk Ports Registered e Figure 4 53 Paging Equipment Connections Using Auxiliary Trunk Ports FCC r
162. e in the pattern A terminal s FRL must be equal to or greater than the route for the route to be selected The system first checks the Route 1 for an available trunk on which to route the call If the route is busy Route 2 is checked then Route 3 if required If all routes in the subpattern are busy and the CO overflow flag is set the voice terminal FRL is checked against an associated Overflow FRL before routing the call If the voice terminal is allowed access to the local CO trunk pool the system on overflow will attempt to place the call regardless of the associated FRLs If all routes in a subpattern are busy and the CO Overflow flag is not set or all CO trunks are busy the call returns to the first route in the subpattern and is queued if the station FRL permits access to the first route The caller is placed in an off hook queue indicated by five short bursts of tone Preferred Routing Tone The order of service in the queue is First In First Out FIFO An ARS user placed in an off hook queued state always has precedence over users with a Pooled Facility access buttons There are 16 slots available in the ARS queue A route 1 must be specified in the subpattern for a call to queue If it is not the caller receives Reorder Tone instead of being queued Once a route has been selected the entries in a Digit Translations Table associated with the selected route s trunk group is checked Based an associated and th
163. e modem used with analog endpoints eem this manual shows the connections supported and required connecting equipment Data calls can be set up between data endpoints Analog to analog and digital to digital connections are straightforward calls between analog and digital endpoints are possible only if the system is equipped with a conversion resource TN 758 Pooled Modem Circuit Pack or external modem pool System 25 data calls from analog endpoints including those to digital endpoints are set up in the traditional manner The calling party should follow the procedures supplied with his her modem However a Modem Request Code must be dialed when calling a digital endpoint Call set up from digital endpoints is facilitated by several data features Command Mode amp Data Terminal Dialing Modem Pooling and One Button Transfer To Data One Button Transfer To Data allows the user to place a data call from a voice terminal and then transfer the call to an associated data terminal In the discussion that follows it is important to understand the difference between analog voice terminology and data terminology Refer to the Section 11 The following provides a definition of a data call in terms of its contextual components The components are 1 data endpoints 2 data endpoint states 3 data call processing modes 4 connecting configurations and 5 controlling features Data Endpoints Data endpoints are composed of data equipment
164. e relative humidity must be less than 95 noncondensing These parameters shall be maintained 24 hours a day seven days a week 9 4 Air Purity The cabinet should not be installed in an area where the air may be contaminated with any of the following e Excessive dust lint carbon particles paper fiber contaminants or metallic contaminants e Contaminants expelled by office copying machines e Highly corrosive atmosphere within an enclosed area or atmosphere containing vaporized chemical compounds that may condense on the equipment e Explosive or flammable atmosphere Lighting Lighting should be adequate to allow administration and maintenance personnel to perform their tasks The recommended light intensity level is 50 to 70 footcandles This level complies with the Occupational Safety and Health Act OSHA standards Electrical Noise RFI In most cases electrical noise is introduced to the system through trunk or voice terminal cables However electromagnetic fields near the system cabinets may also induce noise in the system Therefore the system cabinets and cable runs should not be placed in areas where a high electromagnetic field strength exists Radio transmitters AM or FM television stations induction heaters motors with commutators of 0 25 horsepower 200 watts or greater and similar equipment are leading causes of interference Small tools with universal motors are generally not a problem when they operate
165. ects the system to a central office other than its local central office Foreign Numbering Plan Area Code FNPA An area code other than the local area code The foreign area code must be dialed to call outside the local geographical area Ground Start Trunk On outgoing calls System 25 transmits a request for services to the distant switching system by grounding the trunk ring lead When the distant system is ready to receive the digits of the called number that system grounds the trunk tip lead When the System 25 detects this ground the digits are sent Tip and ring are common nomenclature to differentiate between ground start trunk leads On incoming calls detection of ground on the tip lead is sufficient to cause the call to route to a predetermined destination normally the system attendant group No digits are received 11 6 Home Numbering Plan Area Code HNPA The local area code The area code does not have to be dialed to call numbers within the local geographical area Immediate Start Tie Trunk After establishing a connection with the distant switching system for an outgoing call the system waits a nominal 65 milliseconds before sending the digits of the called number This allows time for the distant system to prepare to receive the digits Similarly on an incoming call the system has less than 65 milliseconds to prepare to receive the digits In Use Lamp A red lamp on a multiline voice terminal that lights to sho
166. ed Start Cancel Release Return On Don t Answer Return On Busy and Alarm e 26 programmable default assignments are Repertory Dial 3 Flex DSS Account Code Entry Attendant Message Waiting Night Service trunk appearances 15 as Personal Lines Group Call Coverage and Direct Facility Access 3 On the primary Attendant Console the first 15 trunks in the system are assigned button appearances on the console If there are fewer than 15 trunks the remaining buttons are not assigned On the secondary Console these trunks do not receive default assignments On the primary Attendant Console the first of the Direct Facility Pooled Access buttons defaults to loop start trunks the second to ground start trunks and the third to tie trunks For any trunk type not assigned in the system the associated button does not receive a default assignment On the secondary Console these buttons do not receive default assignments Adjuncts e 502A Headset Adapter PEC 3163 HFU 5102 Speakerphone PEC 3164 4 SYSTEM ACCESS 2 PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS 3 HANDSET I USE STATUS LEDs TEST PROGRAM SWITCH PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE NG BUTTONS 28 o TOUCH DIAL PAD SPEAKER RING EE VOLUME CONTROL s d SWITCH p 00749 RECALL CONFERENCE TRANSFER Cj DROP C HOLD Figure 4 9 34 Button Deluxe Voice Terminal 7305H02B 4 27 SYSTEM A
167. ed to a DGC group These trunks can also be used for outgoing calls This feature is referred to as Incoming Calls Group in the User Guides 555 500 700 series Calls to a group hunt in a circular manner starting at the terminal following the last one to receive ringing whether answered or not and will ring at the next idle terminal in the group On multiline voice terminals the calls arrive on a System Access button If all group members are busy off hook an outside call is queued and the caller receives ringback tone If the system includes a delay announcement it is played after a specified number of rings The caller is subsequently put on hold in queue and will receive Music On Hold if available If the system is not equipped with a delay announcement the call will begin to ring at all line appearances after the specified interval If all members of a group are busy a call into the group from an internal caller will receive Busy Tone Once the call begins to ring at a group member s station it will not receive announcement service or ring at a line appearance For this reason it is important that DGC members log out as described below when they will be away from their desks The attendant can camp on one call when all members of the group are busy if Attendant Camp On is activated Group members do not receive camp on indication DGC group members may withdraw from the group by going off hook and dialing 4 To reenter t
168. ediately converted to touch tone signals This bypasses the time out required by the system to infer end of dialing Each pool of outside lines and each Personal Line may be independently arranged for either touch tone or dial pulse service Considerations None Interactions None Administration Trunk Port e Assign trunk Class Of Service COS COS includes touch tone dial pulse specification Hardware Requirements None 2 139 TRANSFER Description Allows a user to transfer any call to another voice terminal A user can transfer calls either with or without announcement multiline terminal user presses TRANSFER the party is automatically placed on Special Hold indicated by a broken flutter on the status LED of the call appearance button and will receive Music On Hold if available The system will automatically select an idle System Access button The user may dial the desired number or select another facility button and dial the call The user then can do one of two things 1 hang up or 2 wait until the called party answers announce the call then hang up The held call receives music if provided until the transferring station hangs up after which it receives ringback until the transferred to station answers Unanswered transfers will receive the coverage treatment of the transferred to station A Personal Line transferred by a multiline voice terminal user will indicate the Special Hold status at the trans
169. efore placing them on the TDM bus The dial pad on the single line voice terminals is a touch tone pad which generates Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF signals Maximum cabling distances are provided in Technical Specifications System 25 supports the use of the following single line voice terminals associated adjuncts Model 500 The Model 500 is a conventional rotary dial telephone It can only be used as Power Failure Transfer station and is only needed if the PFT trunk does not support touch tone dialing A 55 1 Ground Start button must be used with this set if the PFT trunk is ground start e Model 2500 Series Each of the following Model 2500 voice terminals come equipped with Handset Touch Tone Dial Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF Ringer Volume Control Several 2500 series voice terminals are shown in Supported 2500 series sets include the following e Model 2500DMGC Desk Set with message waiting indicator and Recall button for timed switchhook flash e Model 2500MMGB Basic desk set e Model 2500SM RBasic desk set that can be used with a 4A Speakerphone e Model 2514BMW Basic desk set equipped with touch tone dial ringer volume control and a built in headset speaker jack e Model 2554 Basic wall mounted set equipped with a touch tone dial and ringer volume control e Model 7101A 3170 00M The Model 7101A Figure 4 5 is approximately 2 3 4 inches wide 3 1 2 inches high an
170. egistered Or Non Registered Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading later in this Section 4 56 Recorded Delay Announcement Equipment This equipment supports the following features e Direct Group Calling DGC Delay Announcement feature provides an announcement to outside callers after a number of predetermined rings e Flexible Night Service Delay Announcement feature provides an announcement to incoming Night Service calls unanswered after a predetermined number of rings The AT amp T Answer Record 2500 or Code A Phone 2540 may be used as the announcement device The equipment requires a port on a ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line or TN 742 Analog Line CP The system supports one DGC delay announcement and two Flexible Night Service delay announcements Refer to Section 2 Direct Group Calling Voice Announcement and Night Service for feature related information Detailed connection information is provided in Figure 4 54 Delay Announcement Equipment Connections FCC Registered Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading later in this Section 4 57 Connectivity System 25 requires four pair building wiring that conforms to AT amp T Premises Distributi
171. election Access Facility Access trunk group and Dictation System Access codes System 25 fixed dial codes are 0 for attendant access e 1 2 3 are reserved for maintenance calls e 4 Activate Make Busy for DGC group 5 Call Park 6 Deactivate Make Busy for DGC group e 7 0 Group Call Pickup Answer 7 PDC Directed Call Pickup Answer 8 PDC Call Park Retrieval 9 Camped on Call Retrieval 0 Account Code Entry from single line voice terminals PDCPDC login PDC PDCO logout PDC e 0 logout all PDCs PDC Call Accountability e PAUSE character used in Speed Dialing and Repertory Dialing programming 100 189 System Speed Dial Numbers 20 26 Personal Speed Dial Numbers e 4 Activate Program mode e end of dialing The dial codes assigned in the system must be completely unambiguous For example a dialing plan that contains the number 20 cannot contain the numbers 2 200 209 or 2000 2099 2 66 PDC to Voice Terminal Association During installation each voice terminal is assigned one PDC which serves as its extension number These are termed assigned PDCs and the associated terminals are called home stations Additional PDCs may be assigned in a system These PDCs are termed floating PDCs FPDCs At the customer s option floating PDCs may have the attendant position assigned as their home station i e calls to FPDCs will be directed to the attendant when they are
172. ents caution and warning notes and FCC and UL labels CAUTION amp WARNING GROUNDING LABELS FCC LABEL BLOCK SYSTEM 25 120 VOLTS AC 4589014 E AMPS 7777777 777 25 PAIR INPUT ON OFF CONNECTORS AC POWER SWITCH RECEPTACLE Figure 4 2 System Cabinet J58901A Rear View 4 4 Cabinet 1 Control and Port Circuits Cabinet 1 is always required It provides mounting space for 12 CPs and can support a small telecommunications system eg 50 to 60 stations and ten to fifteen trunks It contains a Memory and Call Processor which together are referred to as the Common Control CC a Service Circuit and up to nine port CPs The Memory Call Processor and Service Circuit must be mounted in CP slots 1 2 and 3 respectively Slots 4 through 12 nine total provide mounting for the various port CPs that may be used Any port CP may be mounted in any of these nine slots The Memory and Call Processor are electrically linked by a ribbon cable Front Plane Bus which loops between their front edges The system s Tone Detector and Pooled Modem CPs referred to as System Resource CPs may also be mounted in the port CP slots Circuit packs are described in this Section under the heading Cabinet Address Plug An address plug is provided on the middle of the backplane of each cabinet accessible after removing the top rear cover and is used to designate the cabinet number to the software When plugged into the designated area nea
173. equently called numbers Interactions e Account Code Entry An Account Code may be stored on a REP DIAL button The REP DIAL button should be pressed at the point where the account code would normally be dialed Calling Restrictions user can not use Repertory Dialing to access a number that he or she is restricted from dialing e Speed Dialing Numbers already stored as System Speed Dial numbers can also be stored as Repertory Dial numbers Storing a System Speed Dial code 4100 4189 a REP DIAL button saves memory space compared to storing the whole number again on a REP DIAL button Administration Voice Terminal Station Port Assign Repertory Dial REP DIAL buttons Hardware Requirements None 2 122 SPEAKER Description Allows 7300H series voice terminal users to turn On a built in speaker The speaker allows on hook dialing group listening and monitoring of call progress signals The speaker is turned on by pressing SPEAKER Pressing the button at an idle terminal has the same effect as lifting the handset the user is connected to the selected line and hears Dial Tone An associated LED is lighted when the Speaker is on Speaker volume may be adjusted by the terminal s volume control located on the left side of the set The speaker and associated LED is turned Off by pressing SPEAKER again or by going off hook Going off hook connects the handset to the associated voice channel If a user is using the ha
174. er after hearing Confirmation Tone dials a code to access the desired zone s before paging Tradenmark of Harris Corporation Dracon Division 2 105 Considerations Paging is particularly useful when used in conjunction with the Call Park feature When a user is away from his or her location and receives a call the call can be answered and parked by another user The called party can then be paged and told what extension number to call to retrieve the parked call The called party can then retrieve the call from any voice terminal If PagePac multi zone equipment is used only one port assignment is required Interactions e Direct Inward Dialing A DID call may access a paging code This allows the user to dial in and utilize the Paging System Access feature Dial restricting the paging code will block this interaction Administration Special Feature Ports Auxiliary Trunk Interface e Assign Paging access code for each paging zone maximum 3 to be provided e Assign All Zones access code e Dial restrict zone Yes No Multiline Voice Terminals Station Port e Assign DSS button with paging zone access code as required Trunk Ports Requires a port on a ZTN 76 Ground Start Trunk or ZTN 77 Loop Start Trunk CP for each port interface required If the paging equipment requires a contact closure a port on a TN 763 Auxiliary Trunk CP is required instead of the ZTN 76 or ZTN 77 e Assign Trunk Access Code e Dial restrict
175. er feed device control the M lead circuitry to provide the proper signaling handshake for call progress tones and dial pulse dialing The electronic feed device provides a 48 volt dc current to the M lead circuits It also tests the M lead circuits for opens or shorts and prevents uncontrolled operation during power up The E lead test circuit provides a ground to the ground detector circuit for testing purposes The surge protection circuitry provides lightning surge and power cross protection for the circuit pack 3 34 ON BOARD MICRO PROCESSOR PORT CIRCUIT 0 PORT 1 0 CIRCUIT GROUND DETECTOR EH PORT CIRCUIT 3 TO TIE TRUNKS Figure 3 16 Unique Tie Trunk TN 760B Circuitry 3 35 Various signaling formats consists of mode and a type are available with the TN 760B The mode designates the electrical interface and the type designates the logical signaling used Table 3 B lists the available signaling formats TABLE 3 B TN 760B Available Signaling Formats MODE TYPE Type I Standard unprotected Type I Compatible unprotected Type I Compatible Type V Table 3 C lists the preferred TN 760B tie trunk signalling format to be used in the likely to be encountered installation situations TABLE 3 C TN 760B Tie Trunk Preferred Signaling Formats INSTALLATION SITUATION PREFERRED SIGNALING FORMAT 525 Co Located Network E amp M Type I Std Don t Care Interface
176. er to the Terminal Dialing description below for information on how to dial from your terminal Once a data call has been set up the Command Mode Character see Options must be sent to terminate the data call and return to idle mode If a data call is not answered the caller must disconnect by sending a Break Options If the Command Mode menu item Options is chosen the terminal displays the data port s administered options These options can only be changed via the SAT System default values for each option are also shown The display shows the following OPTIONS SELECTED DEFAULT Speed highest current value Autobaud Parity current value Even Mismatch current value Off Local Echo current value On Answer Text current value On Connect Indication current value Yes Command Mode Char current value Br Br 2 52 Table 2 provides a listing of the Data Port s 726 administrable options TABLE 2 E Permissible Data Port TN 726 Options OPTION Speed 61 68 Parity 69 Allow Command Mode 70 Permit Mismatch 72 Local Echo 73 Answer Text 75 Connected Indication 77 Command Mode Disconnect Character 74 DEFINITION Autobaud Low 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Used only when data terminal requires specified parity On or Off Must be On for Command Mode i e Command Mode Menu display Not shown on options list On or Off Allows two data endpoints to communicate at
177. erations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY The voice terminals described in this manual are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC FCC REGISTRATION INFORMATION Registration Number AS593M 71565 MF E Ringer Equivalence 0 5 Network Interface RJ21X or RJ2GX PRIVATE LINE SERVICE Service Order Code 9 0F Facility Interface Code e Tie Lines TL31M e Off Premises Stations OLI3C WARNING STATEMENT Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules require that you be notified of the following e This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to radio communications e It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment e Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his or her own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference DANGER The AT amp T System 25 cabin
178. ered stations to be redirected to a group of covering stations A total of 32 Call Coverage Groups may be assigned Each group may be covered by up to eight call coverage receivers buttons There is no limit on the number of covered users senders that each Call Coverage Group can include but a covered user can be assigned to only one Call Coverage Group Each call coverage receiver must have a multiline set equipped with a Cover COVER GRP button covering set may be assigned more than one COVER GRP button for the same or different groups Senders may be either single line or multiline voice terminals When a call arrives at a voice terminal that has group coverage the COVER GRP button status LED at the covering voice terminals will flash Covering voice terminals will begin to ring after a specified number of rings at idle covered voice terminals If there is no idle COVER GRP button the call will not receive coverage treatment and the called station will continue to ring Ringing may be turned off at covering stations at each covering button as desired not recommended If this option is selected a flashing status LED will be the only indication received at the covering station In addition Call Coverage ringing may be turned off on internal calls if desired a system wide basis The covering user can use the Line Selection Preselection feature to answer covered calls even before any audible alerting has begun at the coverin
179. ermitted per voice terminal Calls extended to an idle voice terminal that are not answered within a specified time return to the Attendant Console on the Return On Don t Answer RTN DA button Calls camped on at a busy voice terminal that are not answered within a specified time return to the Attendant Console on the Return On Busy RTN BUSY button If these buttons are busy on another call the extended call remains at the called terminal until that button becomes idle Considerations Attendant Call Transfer allows the attendant to utilize the additional attendant related features such as Attendant Splitting One Way automatically places incoming call on hold Return On Don t Answer Return On Busy Release and Cancel 2 8 Interactions Refer to the following feature definitions for additional feature related information tendant Camp Or tendant Direct Extension Selection tendant Release Return Coverage On Busy Attendant Return Coverage Om Don t Answer Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic Administration System e Number of seconds before a Camped On call returns to the Attendant Console 1 120 seconds or No Attendant Camp On 0 Default 30 seconds e Number of rings before unanswered call returns to the Attendant Console 1 31 Default 5 Hardware Requirements DXS Console optional 2 9 ATIENDANT CAMP ON Description Allows the attendant to extend an outside
180. erphone 2514 BMW Basic Desk W Headset Jack 2554BM Basic Wall 7101 Desk or Wall 7302 01 5 Button ZIN 79 MERLIN 7303 01 10 Button Multiline 7305 01 34 Button 7300H Series 7305 02 34 Button Deluxe Hybrid 7305 03 BIS Set Built In Speakerphone 7309 01 HFAI Set Hands Free Answer on Intercom MET 2991C05 10 Button Desk TN 735 Multiline 2991D05 10 Button Wall Hybrid 2993C04 10 Button W Built In Speakerphone 7302M 12 Button Desk Used for Power Failure Transfer PFT stations only Refer Section 2 Failure Transfer for additional information T The system supports equivalent industry standard touch tone single line sets Rotary dial sets are not supported Voice terminals connected via the ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line CP must have REN less than or equal to 1 20 t The 2991C04 set with BLF will not operate with System 25 System 25 supports several voice terminals that are no longer orderable These include MET sets and the 34 button basic MERLIN set Single Line Voice Terminals Single line voice terminals can have only one call appearing at the terminal at a time All information voice and control signals transmitted to and from a single line voice terminal is in analog form over a single pair of wires called tip and ring Power for these voice terminals is also provided over this pair The ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line CP or TN 742 Analog Line CP converts the analog signals to digital format b
181. ers System 25 uses intelligent port circuits equipped with distributed network processor elements to provide essentially nonblocking voice and data switching Voice communications features combine traditional telephone features such as Call Transfer and Hold with advanced features such as Individual and Group Call Coverage Hands Free Answer On Intercom and Speed Dialing See Features and Services Section 27 Data communications features provide switched data connections supporting transmission of voice or data over Premises Distribution System wiring Connections can be made between two digital data modules asynchronous data units two analog modems or between an analog modem and a digital data module The system provides an RS 232C interface for full duplex asynchronous transmission of data up to 19 200 bps and a 212 compatible modem pool conversion resource System 25 supports the following e Trunk and Network Facilities Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF and Dial Pulse Signaling on incoming and outgoing trunks dial pulse only on DID trunks Loop Start LS Ground Start GS Strongly preferred Over Loop Start Tie Trunks Type I and Type I Compatible E amp M Type V Simplex Direct Inward Dialing DID e Voice Terminals Single Line Touch Tone MET and MERLIN e Data Facilities Digital Data End Points RS 232C Interfaces via Asynchronous Data Units ADUs Analog Data End Points Ti
182. ers to store a telephone number or account code in the system s memory and associate that number with a REP DIAL button Pressing REP DIAL is equivalent to dialing the stored number Programming the number is accomplished from the user s voice terminal Individual numbers can be up to 28 digits in length The permissible entries are the same as those allowed for System Speed Dial numbers It is also possible to enter System Speed Dial codes on a REP DIAL button The buttons are programmed as described in the Program feature description Should the user attempt to enter more than 28 digits Reorder Tone will be given In a Repertory Dial number is legal only as the first character and only if followed by 100 through 189 This accesses a System Speed Dial number The is interpreted as a Pause except when its the first character in a digit string In this case the is interpreted as a feature access code e g you may program 70 for Call Pickup etc The user can press REP DIAL under any of the following conditions 1 When off hook receiving Dial Tone for call origination 2 When off hook on a call on which more dialed digits are expected 3 When off hook on a call and connected to an outgoing trunk End to End Signaling might apply in this case 4 After pressing ACCT ENTRY When REP DIAL is pressed the button s status LED lights briefly and then goes dark Considerations Repertory Dialing simplifies dialing long or fr
183. ess picked up or covered Interactions e Attendant Camp On When the attendant extends a call to busy terminal in a hunt group the call hunts for an idle terminal If none is found the call Camps On to the called terminal e Call Coverage Station Hunting initially overrides all call coverage options When a call to a voice terminal which has Call Coverage exhausts the terminal hunting possibilities call coverage is invoked e Direct Group Calling Calls directed to a DGC group do not hunt Administration Voice or Data Terminal Station Port e Assign PDC of voice terminal to hunt to next Hardware Requirements None 2 128 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR Description Records detailed call information on all incoming and outgoing calls and sends this information to an optional output device Data on inside calls is not collected The call records can be used to compute costs allocate charges and analyze calling patterns The output device can be any RS 232C compatible DTE device capable of receiving the data and either printing the call records or storing and analyzing them 80 character ASCII records are sent to the output device System 25 supports AT amp T Call Accounting System Models 200 300 500 and 2000 These systems aid in telephone call tracking and help customers manage costs and control use of System 25 resources Costs individual user reports and specialized reports can be obtained Refer
184. essful attempts to park calls Any attempt to dial an unassigned code PDC DDC feature or facility access code or an unsuccessful attempt to park a call will result in Reorder Tone being provided to the caller A DID call to an unassigned number will be routed to the attendant or will receive Reorder Tone at the System Administrator s option Any attempt to dial a restricted call toll or access restricted will be intercepted and routed to Reorder Tone Considerations Intercept treatment provides a calling party with positive feedback of an error in dialing or use of an incorrect code Interactions e Call Park An unsuccessful attempt to park a call due to misdialing or attempting to park more than one call at a voice terminal results in Reorder Tone Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 85 INTERDIGIT TIMEOUTS Description Allows an originating register to be made available for others if dialing is not completed within a set time period Interdigit timeouts is 24 seconds until the first five digits have been dialed 10 seconds until the next five digits have been dialed and five seconds thereafter After timeout voice terminal dial pad button presses are interpreted as end to end signaling requests and touch tones are placed on the outside line Considerations Interdigit timeouts also apply to data calls Interactions None Administration Station Trunk Special Port Board Options e
185. ets are not user serviceable Some voltages inside the cabinets are hazardous This equipment is to be serviced only by qualified technicians CONTENTS Page ATTENDANT SYSTEM ALARM INDICATION 2 24 CALL COVERAGE GROUP 2 38 CALL COVERAGE INDIVIDUAL 2 41 Facility Access Restriction 2 50 ARS Restriction 2 50 DISTINCTIVE RINGING 2 76 Abbreviated Alerting 2 76 END TO END SIGNALING 2 77 EXTERNAL ALERTS 2 80 ii PERSONAL LINES 2 111 POOLED FACILITY BUTTON ACCESS 2 113 POOLED FACILITY DIAL ACCESS 2 115 POWER FAILURE TRANSFER PFT 2 116 PROGRAM 2 118 RECALL 2 120 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION INTERFACE 2 121 3 6 3 8 Memory Circuit Pack ZTN 81B Switching Network iii 3 8 Port Circuits 3 12 Ground Start Trunk ZTN 76 3 18 Loop Start Trunk ZTN 77 3 20 Circuit Packs Cabinet 1 Control and Port Circuits Required Circuit Packs 4 1 4 1 4 5 4 8 4 8 4 8 Asynchronous Data Units ADUs 4 47 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR And Call Accounting System CAB 4 54 Auxiliary Equipment 4 55 Dictation Equipment 4 55 External Alerting Equipment 4 56 Trunk Access Equipment 4 58 Station Interconnect Panel SIP 4 60 10B Emergency Transfer Unit ETU 4 63 Connectivity Figures 4 67 Voice Terminal And Adjunct Connections 4 67 Attendant Console Connections 4 67 Peripheral Equipment Connections 4 68 ADU Connections 4 68 Auxiliary
186. face devices which are primarily modems However it must be noted that within each category control interfaces may also vary Refer to Analog Data Endpoint and Digital Data Endpoints for additional information 11 4 Data Module A data interface device Asynchronous Data Unit providing a standard interface between customer provided data equipment and a data port on the switch Data Terminal Equipment DTE DTE refers to a specific RS 232C connector termination designed to connect directly to a DCE type connection Typically associated with video display terminals printers and computers which either originate or terminate a data transmission path Refers to RS 232C compatible Data Terminal Equipment Delay Dial Tie Trunk After a request for service called a seizure is detected on an incoming trunk the system sends a momentary signal followed by a steady tone over the trunk This informs the calling party that dialing can start This type of trunk allows dialing directly into the system That is the digits are received as they are dialed Digital Data Endpoints In System 25 digital data endpoints include any digital device providing a RS 232C connection interface to the switch The connection is via Asynchronous Data Units ADUs to the switch Direct Extension Selector DXS Console An option at the attendant console that allows an attendant direct access to voice terminals by pressing a Group Select button a
187. facility International Calls routed via the international pattern Calls made to specified COS or seven digit telephone numbers within the Home Number Plan Area HNPA These calls are routed as specified in the HNPA Exception Lists or else via the NPA Routing Table or by default if not otherwise specified the local CO facility e Calls made to NPAs outside the HNPA sometimes referred to as Foreign NPAs FNPAs The route selected depends on the type of call as follows FNPA special number calls includes all 800 900 and Telex 510 610 710 and 810 numbers These calls are routed via the local CO facility calls made to numbers specified in the FNPA Exception List other FNPA calls 2 27 ARS Flow Chart provides a simplified ARS flow chart Bracketed numbers e g 401 601 provide a link between ARS administrable action numbers and the associated item on the flow chart Certain readers may find this reference useful when reading the following description in association with the System Administration Manual 555 500 500 Administrable System Station Toll Allowed and Trunk action numbers are also noted where applicable The ARS feature is accessed when a user dials the ARS access code As shown on the number dialed is first checked against the Emergency Numbers List This list consists of special service codes 911 and up to three customer defined seven digit numbers If the number d
188. ferring voice terminal until answered and may be reentered if the call is not answered Reentering the call will automatically terminate the transfer attempt Single line voice terminal users may transfer calls by flashing the switchhook which puts the caller on hold listening for Recall Dial tone dialing the second party and going on hook either immediately or after announcing the call to the second party A call may also be transferred by setting up a conference and then hanging up Considerations Transfer provides a convenient way to redirect a call to another voice terminal Attendant assistance is not required and the caller does not have to redial While it is possible to transfer a call without announcing it it is recommended that call transfers always be announced Interactions e Account Code Entry A user may transfer a call to another user then instead of hanging up enter an account code Subsequent account code entries will be ignored e Attendant Console The attendant should not use this feature to extend incoming calls but should use the Start button or DXS Console instead e Call Coverage Coverage treatment of the transferred to station is provided to transferred calls When a covering station transfers a covered call to another station the call will no longer appear at the covering station but will still appear at the covered station Note that if you attempt to transfer a call to a station that you provide call co
189. filter The codec hybrid circuit and power filter perform the same function as in the Analog Line Circuit Pack TN 742 The electronic battery feed provides talking battery to the MET set The electronic battery feed produces a controlled dc battery feed current for short and long loops and detects when a MET set user lifts a receiver The digital port circuit provides a full duplex channel over two 2 wire pairs All outgoing lamp LT LR and incoming button depression BT BR information is carried on these channels Ringing and switchhook information is also sent over these channels The electronic power feed device provides phantomed 48 volt dc power for the MET terminals over the data channels The electronic power feed device is a smart circuit breaker When it senses an overcurrent condition it indicates the condition on an output lead and goes into thermal shutdown if not turned off by the on board microprocessor When the overcurrent condition disappears the circuit breaker can be turned on by the on board microprocessor 3 28 PORT CIRCUIT 0 ANALOG PORT DIGITAL PORT TO MET TERMINALS ELECTRONIC POWER FEED MICRO ON BOARD PROCESSOR PORT CIRCUIT 3 Figure 3 13 Unique MET Line TN 735 Circuitry 3 29 Analog Line TN 742 The Analog Line Circuit Pack interfaces eight analog voice terminal lines and the TDM bus Figure 3 14 shows the following Analog Line uniq
190. formation to the on board microprocessor Port Circuits The eight port circuits are identical Each port ciruit consists of a codec hybrid circuit line transformer relay driver and surge protection circuit The codec is a 4 wire circuit that converts the NPEs output to an analog signal Likewise it converts the analog signal from a central office trunk to a PCM data signal to the NPE The hybrid circuit converts the codec 4 wire analog signal to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the central office trunk by the line transformer The relay driver buffers and inverts the relay drive signals from the port I O circuit so that a logic high input operates the appropriate relay The relays control circuitry provides the proper signaling for loop start trunks The trunks support touch tone dialing and dial pulse signaling The surge protection circuit provides overvoltage lightning surge protection for the circuit pack 3 20 0 1 ON BOARD MICROPROCESSOR Figure PORT CIRCUIT 0 HYBRID T 3 PORT CIRCUIT PORT 3 R 3 TO I 0 CENTRAL CIRCUIT OFFICE T 4 I iren CIRCUIT 7 CIRCUIT 3 9 Unique Loop Start Trunk ZTN 77 Circuitry 3 21 Tip Ring Line ZTN 78 The Tip Ring Line Circuit Pack interfaces eight analog tip and ring voice terminal lines single line voice terminals and the TDM bus Figure 3 10 shows the following Tip and Ring Line unique
191. future call eligible for coverage treatment If there is no idle Cover button on any covering voice terminals the call will not receive coverage and will ring at the called station The Send Calls feature is deactivated by pressing the button a second time Each Cover button at a covering station represents one covered voice terminal If more than one voice terminal is to be covered multiple buttons are required one for each station covered covering voice terminal may be assigned multiple COVER IND buttons for a particular station to cover multiple simultaneous calls to that station The first button will track the first call the second button the second call etc Up to eight COVER IND buttons can be assigned for each covered station Up to 31 stations may receive Call Coverage Individual A voice terminal can receive both Individual Call Coverage and Group Call Coverage Refer to Messaging Services for a description of Call Coverage Message Waiting service which allows the covering station to control the status of the covered user s Message LED Calls from a covering station to a covered station will not be covered unless the covered station has additional coverage This is an important consideration when the attendant provides coverage Considerations Call Coverage provides a way to redirect calls to alternate answering positions The feature is versatile enough to permit suitable alternate answering arrangements for v
192. g user s terminal This is useful if the user knows that the covered party is unavailable A covered voice terminal may elect to have calls covered while it is busy on another call Calls directed to an idle button on a covered multiline voice terminal will start ringing at the covering terminal after a single burst of ringing at the covered voice terminal If there is no idle Cover button on the covering voice terminal the call will not receive coverage treatment Calls directed to a busy single line voice terminal will start ringing immediately at the covering terminal If there is no idle Cover button on any covering terminal either individual or group the call will not receive coverage and the calling party will receive Busy Tone Calls sent to coverage will continue to ring at called single line sets but will cease ringing at multiline sets In the latter case the calls will remain on the incoming call appearance button and that button s status LED continues to reflect the status of the call In particular covered calls to multiline sets remain available and can be entered by the called station If a covered station activates the SEND ALL CALLS button calls will be directed to coverage immediately or after a single ring reminder as administered A station can provide or receive Individual Call Coverage see Call Coverage Individual and also be a member of a Call Coverage Group sender or receiver Unanswered calls to a station p
193. going calls up to 15 digits may be recorded excluding the ARS or facility access code but including the O or 1 prefix to identify local and toll calls and 950 10 and 10 interconnect access codes Space is allotted for three dashes one between the fourth and fifth digits from the right one between the seventh and eight digits from the right and the other between the tenth and eleventh digits from the right Numbers longer than 15 digits will be truncated For Repertory Dial and Speed Dial numbers the facility will be extracted from the stored Speed Dial number and reported under the FAC heading the number remaining after the facility is extracted will be reported as the called number Error Character Question Mark or Blank Column 36 Indicates number dialed exceeded 15 digits Blank Column 37 2 130 DUR Columns 38 45 Duration For incoming calls this provides the time between trunk seizure and disconnect rounded to the nearest second For outgoing calls it provides the time between the end of dialing and disconnect minus a customer defined interval default is 40 seconds rounded to the nearest second Records will not be compiled for a call if the duration does not exceed the customer defined interval A call transferred between a number of voice terminals will reflect the total call duration The maximum time that can be reported is 95 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds Blank Column 46 FAC Columns 47 51 Fa
194. hances user ability to recognize incoming calls Noisy environments large areas and outside locations are candidates for external alerting devices Interactions e Manual Signaling Manual Signaling will not activate an external alerting device e Night Service When the system is in Night Service an incoming attendant seeking call will activate the Night Service alerting device e Power Failure Transfer When the system is in the power failure transfer mode the external alerting devices are disabled Administration Station Port e Each external alert requires a port assignment on a ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line or TN 742 Analog Line CP Specify special feature port type 253 e Specify the PDC of the associated station 0 for Night Service Hardware Requirements Order line activated devices as required Requires a port interface on a ZTN 78 or TN 742 Refer to Section 4 External Alerting Equipment for additional information 2 80 HANDS FREE ANSWER INTERCOM Description Allows BIS 7305H03B HFAI Voice Terminals 7309HO1A to auto answer inside calls To use this feature a user must assign the auto answer function AUTO ANS to one of their flexible buttons When both AUTO ANS and HFAI are enabled indicated by associated status LEDs the set will auto answer inside calls The HFAI LED will wink on HFAI sets or light steadily BIS sets during HFAI calls Terminal response to incoming inside calls
195. he SAT The system supports one SMDR output device or an AT amp T PC 6300 equipped with Call Accounting System CAS Model 200 300 500 or 2000 applications software The customer can also provide the call record output device as long as it is RS 232C compatible 300 or 1200 baud and can print an 80 column line Refer to Section 2 for additional information on the SMDR features Maximum cabling distances are provided in Section 8 Technical Specifications 4 54 Auxilliary Equipment Auxiliary equipment supports System 25 features and services The following equipment is supported e Dictation Equipment e External Alerting Equipment e Music Source Music On Hold e Paging Equipment e Recorded Delay Announcement Equipment NOTES 1 Auxiliary equipment connected to ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line CP must meet the following requirements AC impedance 600 ohms DC current less than 30 ma at 24V dc Ringer Equivalent Number REN less than 1 20 Distance must not exceed 2000 feet 2 Off premises auxiliary equipment must be connected to the TN 742 Analog Line CP If the auxiliary equipment requires a contact closure the TN 763 Auxiliary Trunk CP must be used on premises service only Dictation Equipment This equipment supports the Dictation System Access feature The feature permits access to and control of customer provided dictation equipment Dictation System Access is provided via port ass
196. he analog port circuit consists of a codec a hybrid circuit an isolation transformer and associated power filtering circuitry The codec and hybrid circuit perform the same function as the codec and hybrid circuit in the Analog Line Circuit Pack TN 742 The output of the hybrid circuit is connected to the primary of the isolation transformer The secondary of the transformer is connected to the analog voice pair The transceiver interfaces the voice terminal pair to the protocol handler The electronic power feed device provides 24 volts dc on the power pair to the voice terminal The device is polled by the on board microprocessor periodically and on demand to test for an overcurrent or no current condition Each Electronic Power Feed EPF circuit supports two ports If one of the associated lines become overloaded the associated pair of lines will also be out of service One EPF supports Ports 0 and 1 one Ports 2 and 3 one Ports 4 5 and one Ports 6 and 7 The on off state of the device is controlled by the on board microprocessor 3 24 0 ANALOG PORT NPE 0 PROTOCOL TRANSCEIVER HANDLER ELECTRONIC ue p MEE ON BOARD MICROPROCESSOR ON BOARD CIRCUIT c 3 MICROPROCESSOR PORT E CIRCUIT NEN 1 o qm CIRCUIT pg t Figure 3 11 Unique ATL Line ZTN 79 Circuitry 3 25 T O TXT R P
197. he group the member goes off hook and dials 6 An off hook multiline terminal even if busy on only one System Access button appears busy to DGC calls However that terminal may receive other non DGC calls while active on a DGC call Direct Group Calling groups may be used as a host port group for data applications Delay announcements and music on hold are not provided for data groups Considerations DGC groups are particularly useful when the answering group receives a high volume of calls Call completion time is minimized and attendant assistance is not required Any number of outside trunks may be administered to feed into a DGC group A trunk may feed only one DCG group Interactions e Attendant Camp On If the attendant attempts to camp on a second call to a EWC group it is immediately returned on the Return On Busy button Attendant Direct Extension Selection When all stations in a DGC group are busy the status LED on the DXS Console lights Call Coverage When a call rings at DGC station that has Call Coverage the call will receive that station s coverage Calls directed to a busy DGC group do not receive call coverage Instead after a predefined number of rings the call will be transferred to a delay announcement if provided or ringing will be transferred to all button appearances of the line Call Pickup A DGC group member can also be a member in a Call Pickup group Direct Group Calling Delay Announcement
198. hen power is turned on when the 5 volt power supply drops below 4 5 volts after it returns to 5 volts or when the network controller detects the processor insane The processor can also reset the network controller when it detects the network controller insane 3 4 Bus Error Circuitry Bus errors suspend the processor from executing code Bus errors are generated when memory management detects illegal reads or writes to RAM when the processor attempts to access circuit packs or chips not physically present or when the network controller detects the processor insane Interrupt Circuitry Interrupts are prioritized into seven levels of which the highest level 7 is non maskable The interrupts are Interrupt Level AC Fail 7 Work cycle 6 Off board 5 Two ports 4 Other two EIA ports 3 Off board 2 Off board 1 Emergency Transfer Unit ETU Control Removes 48V dc power from the system s ETUs when the system loses power or a major system malfunction occurs 3 5 Memory Circuit ZTN 81B The Memory Circuit Pack provides for the storage of software associated with system operation This software includes call and administration processing and other related programs The circuit pack is powered from the backplane by 5 volts Each system must include one Memory Circuit Pack The Memory Circuit Pack circuitry Figure 3 3 includes e Address and data buffers e ROM array e ROM select e Timing and control logic e B
199. hold as it has lines and can hang up without losing held calls Single line users can place a call on hold by flashing the switchhook the user receives Confirmation Tone The user can then dial another party or return to the held call by flashing the switchhook twice The first switchhook flash sets up a conference call the second flash drops the third party if System 25 Dial Tone Busy Tone or Reorder Tone but not Ringback Tone was obtained when the third party was dialed a single switchhook flash will drop the tone and recall the held party Multiline voice terminal users can press HOLD and subsequently replace the handset or call another party without losing the held call The status LED associated with the held call winks on all terminals with an appearance of the line except in the case of a conference call In this case the wink indication is given only to the party who invoked hold To return to the held call the multiline user presses the line button associated with the held call Considerations The Hold feature allows users to temporarily disconnect from one conversation and either place or answer another call For single line sets placing a call on hold is the first step in transferring or conferencing the call Interactions e Attendant Console The Attendant does not receive hold indications for lines trunks appearing on the Console unless he she placed the call on hold e Exclusion A call can be placed on hold after Exc
200. hook and pressing an idle Data button may indicate that a data call will be attempted This reserves the associated data terminal and a modem pool conversion resource This procedure is recommended when the data call is a toll call The data terminal reservation is acknowledged by a winking status LED at the Data button Subsequently invoking One Button Transfer To Data transfers the call to the associated data terminal 2 102 Preindication is canceled e If the user goes cm hook before transferring the call to data e If the user preindicates on a second Data button e If after dialing is complete a second Data button is pressed Preindication is canceled for the first data terminal and the data call is transferred to the second data terminal When Preindication is canceled the associated pooled modem conversion resource reservation is canceled Considerations A typical use of One Button Transfer to Data is to set up a call to a printer Interactions e Modem Pooling If a conversion resource is required on an external call invoking Data Call Preindication will cause a pooled modem conversion resource to be reserved If none is available e g the system has no Pooled Modem CP Reorder Tone is provided This will occur whether a conversion resource is actually required or not Administration e Assign Data buttons on multiline voice terminals Hardware Requirements None 2 103 OUT OF BUILDING STATIONS Descript
201. hould label each DSS button that he she programs The procedure for programming the button is provided in the Program feature description If a user programs a Flex DSS button with a Pooled Facility access code the button will function exactly as a Pooled Facility Access button with the capability of receiving a busy to idle reminder for the pooled facility To use DSS the user presses DSS or FLEX DSS and goes off hook The caller hears Ringback Tone DSS calls to a multiline voice terminal are received on a System Access button The DSS status LED is lighted steadily at the calling station The DSS status LED is lighted whenever the pointed to station is off hook The user may press DSS and remain on hook to receive the busy to idle reminder The user s voice terminal will ring once when the other party hangs up lifting the handset will automatically place the call When Prime Line Preference is assigned to a DSS button the button must be pressed to invoke the busy to idle reminder even though the I Use LED is lighted Access to Paging Zones and DGC Groups Access is provided to an individual Paging Zone or to all paging zones or to a DGC group The status and busy to idle reminder indication described above also apply to DGC groups with the understanding that they are busy if all the members are busy Considerations Direct Station Selection differs from Automatic Intercom in that it provides one button access from one voice termi
202. ialed matches one of the numbers on the list the call is immediately routed via the local CO facility All user call restrictions are disregarded If the number dialed is not on this list a check is made to determine if the voice terminal is allowed to originate outside calls If the terminal is outward restricted the caller receives Reorder Tone otherwise the dialed number is checked against any toll restrictions that apply Terminals may be assigned a Toll Restriction Class 1 4 or be unrestricted Class 0 Terminals assigned Toll Restriction Class 1 have the most privileges those assigned Class 4 have the least privileges There are four associated Toll Call Allowed Lists 1 4 in the system Up to 64 3 digit CO codes and 6 digit NPA plus CO codes may be assigned to the four lists total Numbers dialed from voice terminals assigned Toll Restriction Class 1 are checked against all four Toll Call Allowed TCA Lists numbers dialed from Class 2 terminals are checked against TCA Lists 2 4 numbers dialed from Class 3 terminals are checked against TCA Lists 3 4 and numbers dialed from Class 4 terminals are checked against List 4 only If the number dialed does not appear on a list all operator and international calls are in this category the user receives Reorder Tone Calls orginated at unrestricted Class 0 terminals are not screened Calls are checked to determine if they are international calls or operator calls Dialed numbers 01 o
203. ich is both member of a Station Hunting group and a Call Coverage sender will first hunt for an idle station to service the call If none is available the call will be sent to coverage Call Pickup Call Pickup is independent of call coverage When a call is answered via Call Pickup all Cover buttons associated with the called party go idle Direct Group Calling DGC call to a DGC group member will receive coverage if the member is also a Call Coverage sender Calls to a busy DGC group do not receive call coverage Instead after a predefined number of rings the call will be transferred to delay announcement if provided or ringing will be transferred to all button appearances of the line Exclusion If a call coverage receiver invokes Exclusion after answering a coverage call all other terminals including the attendant and the covered station are excluded from the call The covered user cannot enter the call until EXCLUSION is pressed a second time by the covering user Hands Free Answer On Intercom incoming inside call will not receive call coverage if auto answer is activated since the set will answer the call whether the user is present or not Personal Dial Codes Calls directed to a station because another non floating PDC is logged in there do not receive the coverage treatment of the logged in station Such calls return to their home station and receive that station s coverage immediately upon return Calls
204. ich results in better service with a given number of trunks It also simplifies administration and calling Calls are routed to the appropriate trunk group An idle trunk if available is selected from the group Up to 16 trunk group pooled facilities may be assigned in the system Several different kinds of trunk groups can be assigned in System 25 Central Office CO Provides a link with the local CO for calls except Direct Inward Dial DID calls Trunks classed as CO have a number of special characteristics Foreign Exchange FX CO trunks that connect to a CO other than the local CO e Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS CO trunks that connect to an Outward WATS office or a dial 800 Service office e Direct Inward Dial DID Provides incoming only service from the local CO These calls to go directly to voice terminals instead of through the attendant e Tie Provides a link with another private switching system Trunk groups can be one way incoming or two way Selection of the trunk group to be used for a given call is determined by the initial digits of a dialed number or by the ARS feature These digits are referred to as the facility access code Each trunk group is assigned a unique code Assuming an idle trunk in the selected group is found a seizure signal service request is sent to the distant switch If the distant switch requires dialed digits as all but some tie trunks do a signal Dial T
205. ides the information necessary to initialize a system and to perform on going system administration Explains the operation of the System Administration Terminal the Digital Tape Unit and the commands that allow the System Administrator to make changes and additions An introduction to AT amp T System 25 555 500 021 Provides an introduction to System 25 features and services The emphasis is on how System 25 helps solve information management productivity and cost control problems 10 1 Implementation Manual 555 500 650 Describes how to plan the system s operating configuration Explains how to determine customer needs and how to convert these needs into a system configuration plan This plan is recorded on accompanying forms which are used in conjunction with the Administration Manual to initialize the system The Implementation Manual and associated forms are packaged together in the Administration Records Binder 555 500 662 Installation And Test Manual 555 500 100 Provides step by step procedures for installing System 25 and associated equipment Includes procedures for testing equipment and trunks and for making additions and changes to the system Maintenance Manual 555 500 105 Provides a detailed description of system operation and procedures for isolating and clearing customer affecting faults Planning Manual 555 500 600 The document is a presale workbook used by the Account Team and customer to define a set
206. igned so that many time consuming and repetitious functions are performed by processors in the port and service circuit packs thus relieving the common control circuits Traffic load defined as the sum of static and dynamic loads is a function of the number of features that are executed the frequency with which they are executed the system configuration and the instantaneous peak call processing load The configuration contribution to load is known as dynamic load The static load consists of maintenance and audit routines Software Partitioning System 25 software is comprised of various modules each supporting a particular process Typical modules referred to as tasks include the following Administration e Station Call Processing e SMDR Call Record Processing e Trunk Call Processing e Dial Plan Manager e Event Timer e Save Restore Administration function e Maintenance and Audit Functions As shown on software tasks associated with the Memory Circuit Pack are Administration and Feature Code Modules which includes Station Call Processing Each task controls the storage and movement of data and messages between associated elements within the system Memory Circuit Pack Administration Provides for administration of station and system features This software also supports maintenance procedures related to error checking and diagnosing trouble Feature Code Modules Includes the software that receives and sends dat
207. ignments on a ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line TN 742 Analog Line or the TN 763 Auxiliary Trunk CPs If the equipment requires a contact closure the TN 763 must be used Refer to Section 2 Dictation System Access for feature related information Detailed connection information is provided in Figure 4 8 Dictation System Connections FCC Registered Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading later in this Section 4 55 External Alerting Equipment This equipment supports the Night Service and External Alert features The external alert may be bells chimes horns or lights Each alert requires a port on a ZTN 78 Tip Ring or TN 742 Analog Line CP Refer to Section 2 External Alerts for feature related information Detailed connection information is provided in Figure 4 49 External Alert Conenctions Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading Connectivity later in this Section Music Source Music On Hold A music source is needed to support the Music On Hold feature The interface is a port on a ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line CP Refer to Section 2 Music On Hold or Delayed Access for feature related information Detailed connection information is provided in th
208. inal and Single Line Voice 1 4 685 Supporting Data Terminal and Multiline Voice Terminal Local Power Asynchronous Data Unit Other Allowable Cable Distance Connection Information General Description Models AT amp T Answer Record 2500 4 ATL Line CP ZTN 79 Attendant Features Call Transfer Camp On 12 1 System Alarm Indication Attendant Other Automatic Route Selection Auxiliary Equipment Connections Dictation Equipment External Alerting Equipment Music Source Paging Equipment Recorded Delay Announcement Equipment Auxiliary Equipment Description Delay Announcement Equipment Dictation Equipment External Alerting Equipment Music Source 4 56 4 4 4 4 O Paging Equipment Auxiliary Trunk CP TN 763 Button Access Pooled Facility 2 113 Call Accountability Accounting System CAS Coverage Message Waiting Following Forwarding Handling Capabilities Cancel Attendant Circuit Packs Functional Description Analog Line TN 742 ATL Line ZTN 79 Auxiliary Trunk TN 763 Circuit Packs Functional Description Contd Call Processor ZTX 82 3 2 Tip Ring Line ZTN 78 Tone Detector TN 748 Circuit Packs Other Address Leads Compatibilit Connection Information Asynchronous Data Unit ADU Attendant Direct Trunk Console Attendant DXS Console 4 79 Delay Announcement Equipme
209. inals Station Port e Individual Call Coverage Maessage Waiting assign Coverage Message COVER MSG button e Assign Individual Call Coverage COVER IND between sets e Station to Station Message Waiting assign Station Message Waiting MSG WAIT buttons Two multiline terminals must share this feature Hardware Requirements 234A Message Waiting Indicator for single line voice terminals not equipped with Message LEDs 2 93 r MODEM POOLING Description Allows switched data connections between digital data endpoints and analog data endpoints Refer also to the overview of the system s data features provided in the Data Calls And description Data transmission between digital and analog endpoints requires a conversion resource since the digital format used by the data module is not compatible with the modulated signals of an analog modem The conversion resource translates the digital signals from the digital endpoint into analog signals and vice versa The modem pool is a single group of up to 12 conversion resources 3 Cabinet system with the characteristics of a 212A full duplex asynchronous modem that can operate at speeds of 300 and 1200 bps The Modem Pooling feature operates transparently to the user whenever possible The system adds a conversion resource to a connection when a digital endpoint is connected to an analog trunk or port without any explicit action by the user A voice terminal user who plans
210. including Automatic Intercom calls is eligible for Call Pickup A member of a Call Pickup Group can answer any call to any other member of the group by dialing the Group Call Pickup code 70 Up to 16 groups with up to 16 voice terminals in each group can be set up Each Call Pickup group can have a maximum of two simultaneous ringing calls eligible for Call Pickup treatment at a time and the calls are picked up in order of arrival A user can be assigned to only one Call Pickup Group If the picked up call was to a multiline terminal the called terminal can still enter the call If the called terminal was a single line terminal it cannot enter the call once it is picked up Call Pickup cannot be invoked after the call has been answered After a call pick up attempt has been made Reorder Tone is heard if no eligible calls are ringing Considerations With Call Pickup users do not have to leave their own voice terminal to answer a call at a nearby voice terminal Instead a user simply lifts the handset and dials an access code This allows calls that may go unanswered to be handled quickly and efficiently Interactions Call Coverage When a call is directed to a coverage station and the call is answered via Call Pickup all Cover buttons associated with the call go idle e Personal Line After a call is picked up from a Personal Line PERS LINE button the called terminal can still enter the call 2 47 Administration V
211. ing purposes To associate an account code with a call the user after completing a call but before hanging up must e Single Line Voice Terminal User Flash the switchhook dial 0 and then dial the account code directly or dial a System or Personal Speed Dial Number that contains the account code e Multiline Voice Terminal User Press Account Code Entry ACCT ENTRY button and then dial the account code directly or dial a System or Personal Speed Dial Number that contains the account code A Repertory Dial REP DIAL button may also be used to enter an account code e When the correct number of account code digits have been entered Confirmation Tone followed by Dial Tone is returned to the user and the account code is appended to the SMDR call record Account Code Entry is optional Considerations Account Code Entry provides an easy method of allocating the costs of specific calls and associated staff time to the correct project department or user The account code is appended to the SMDR call record and sent to the SMDR output channel Account Codes can include up to 15 digits The validity of the entered account code is not checked by the system If the user is active on a call invoking the feature will drop the call Incorrectly dialed codes prior to last digit entry may be corrected via a second switchhook flash or pressing ACCT ENTRY and reentering the code Partial account codes entered by going on hook
212. ing the busy hour Single Frequency Return Loss Talking State Station to station exceeds 12db Station to 4 wire trunk connection exceeds 14db Station to 2 wire trunk connection exceeds 12db Peak Noise Level Analog to analog 20 dBrnc Analog to digital 19 dBrnc Digital to analog 13 dBrnc 9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS This section provides information on floor and wall space requirements for System 25 cabinets and associated peripheral equipment Also included are specifications for temperature humidity air purity lighting electrical noise RFI suppression power grounding and lightning protection Floor Plans And Layouts Floor plan arrangements will vary depending on the available equipment area and anticipated system growth A typical floor plan is shown in The floor must be tiled or suitably sealed level and free from vibration Allow for a minimum unobstructed clearance of seven feet above the floor throughout the equipment area Do not locate the equipment in areas e Where it might be subjected to excessive vibrations or disturbed by moving equipment such as hand trucks and transporters e Where noise levels may exceed 90 dB e Susceptible to flooding Maintain clear access to the equipment area for both installation and maintenance purposes The wall behind the system cabinet must be clear of all objects pictures shelves or windows that might interfere with system installation The entire are
213. inging If the user wishes to use a different line the line must be preselected prior to going off hook If ringing ceases while the user is on hook line preference reverts to whichever option is applicable Prime Line Preference or no preference If a line rings at a multiline terminal when the terminal is busy on another call Ringing Line Preference will not activate even if the user goes on hook during the ringing cycle However Ringing Line Preference is not canceled at the Attendant Console while the attendant is off hook If a line is ringing while the attendant is off hook the ringing line will be selected as soon as the attendant goes on hook Preselection Allows multiline voice terminal users to override the above line preference features Users may simply press a desired line access button before going off hook The user will be connected to the facility selected unless the facility is busy and the party using it has invoked Exclusion or is part of a conference call that is at maximum capacity When a user is off hook they can select a facility by pressing the associated button This will terminate the call they were on A user may activate the busy to idle reminder by pressing a button associated with a busy facility A burst of ringing is provided when the facility becomes idle 2 87 Considerations Prime Line Preference and Ringing Line Preference are assigned by default to all multiline voice terminals While these a
214. ion Single line voice terminals and multiline 7300H series terminals may be directly connected to the system even though they are not located in the same building For 7300H series terminals special In Range Out of Building units are used to protect the switch and its users from lightning power crosses etc Out Of Building Stations can access all system features Considerations Single line voice terminals may be located at distances up to 24000 feet from the system cabinets Carbon protection devices are required for lightning and power cross protection Multiline voice terminals must be located within 1000 feet of the system cabinets and require IROB protection devices MET sets may not be used for Out Of Building service Interactions None Administration None Required Hardware Requirements Out Of Building multiline voice terminals require IROB units Single line voice terminals require carbon protection devices and must be connected to ports on the TN 742 Analog Line CP Connectivity information is provided in Hardware Description 2 104 PAGING SYSTEM ACCESS Description Provides users with dial access or feature button access to paging equipment As many as three paging zones can be provided each with its own access code A zone is the location of paging loudspeakers for example conference rooms warehouses or storerooms In addition one access code can be provided to activate all zones A single line
215. iption An OPS is a single line voice terminal that is located in another building and connected to system 25 via arrangements with the local CO The station has the same features as an on premises single line station except that it is counted as an outside party in a conference call Also the Message feature will not operate with these sets Considerations This service is sometimes furnished to executives at their residences It allows them remote access to System 25 features and services Interactions Conference For conference purposes an OPS counts as one of the two allowable outside lines Administration Voice Terminal Station Port e Make this an extended station Yes This is how the system knows the station is an OPS Hardware Requirements Requires a port interface on a TN 742 Analog Line CP The OPS must be a FCC registered single line voice terminal Connectivity information is provided in Hardware Description 2 101 ONE BUTTON TRANSFER DATA Description Allows multiline voice terminal users to originate or answer a call from their voice terminals and then establish a data connection by transferring the call to a data terminal Refer also to the overview of the system s data features provided in the Data Calls And description Data terminal calls can be set up from a multiline voice terminal with a DATA button The Data button is associated by Data Dial Code DDC with a digital data endpoint
216. irtually every level of employee Special functions such as the Send Calls feature accommodate the day to day variations that occur in an employee s work schedule 2 41 Interactions e Attendant Console When a coverage call rings at a busy Attendant Console the attendant receives a single burst of ringing If the call is still unanswered when the attendant hangs up the Attendant Console will resume ringing e Call Coverage Group Unanswered calls to a station provided both Individual and Group Call Coverage will first ring at the Individual Coverage station and then after a second delay cycle if still unanswered will ring at the Group Coverage station Direct Station Selection DSS Calls placed via a DSS button to a user with Individual Call Coverage will receive call coverage When a DSS button is used to activate the busy to idle reminder for the user the reminder is returned only when the user becomes idle not when an associated coverage user becomes idle Exclusion If a covering station answers a coverage call and then invokes Exclusion all stations including the covered one are excluded from the call Hold May be used to place a coverage call on hold The COVER IND button s status LED winks at the covering station and the call status LED winks at the covered terminal The held call will automatically leave the coverage terminal if picked up by the covered user The covering station
217. is dependent on the state of the HFAI and AUTO ANS buttons as follows e Both HFAI AUTO ANS enabled HFAI BIS set generates tone burst over its speaker the calling party also hears a tone burst parties may converse No action by the called party is required user must press the speaker or speakerphone button to end the call e Only AUTO ANS button is enabled HFAI BIS set generates a tone burst over its speaker the calling party also hears the tone burst The HFAI BIS terminal s speaker is turned on and the station is placed in an off hook state logically Call is complete However because only the speaker is on the called party can hear but not respond to the calling party To respond the user must lift the handset or press the HFAI button on an HFAI set or press the Microphone button on a BIS set HFAI BIS user must press the speaker or speakerphone button to end the call Only button or neither button activated In this state terminal operation is the same as for a regular 10 button set If during an HFAI call the user decides to switch to the handset by going off hook the HFAI LED will go dark If the station is a HFAI set the user is not permitted to go back to the HFAI microphone Pressing the HFAI button while using the handset will simply disable the HFAI feature for subsequent calls If the voice termina
218. ital computer software storage device memory and associated circuit packs and special hardware necessary to perform the actual connections Switchhook The button s on a voice terminal located under the receiver System Manager A person responsible for specifying and administering features and services for the system System Reload A process that allows stored data to be written from a tape into the system memory normally after a power outage TAE Trunk Access Equipment Terminal Equipment Equipment for changing information sound keystrokes into an electrical signal compatible with the system s port circuits voice and data terminals are two subdivisions 11 11 Tie Trunk A telecommunications channel that directly connects two private switching systems Time Division Multiplex Bus A special bus that is time shared by preallocating short time slots to each transmitter on a regular basis In a PBX all port circuits are connected to the time division multiplex bus permitting any port to send a signal to any other port Tone Ringer A device with a speaker used in electronic voice terminals to alert the user Translations Specific information assigned to a terminal or to the system and customized for the user Trunk A telecommunications channel between two switching systems Trunk Group Telecommunications channels assigned as a group for certain functions Trunk Port The hardware p
219. ity Considerations Restrictions are used whenever it is necessary to restrict certain users from accessing designated facilities A typical application is to deny most stations dial access to all trunk groups This then forces those stations to use the ARS feature which should result in reduced toll charges Interactions Automatic Route Selection The use of the ARS feature will not allow users to avoid restrictions Outward Restriction and Toll Restriction when administered prevent calls originating at associated voice terminals from routing via ARS Facility access restrictions are circumvented Personal Lines Personal Lines are subject to the toll restriction options of the stations on which they appear Pooled Facility Button Access Toll restricted stations receive standard toll restriction treatment on all Pooled Facility access buttons Repertory Dialing A user cannot use Repertory Dialing to access a number that he she is restricted from dialing Speed Dialing A user cannot use Speed Dialing to access a number that he she is restricted from dialing Transfer A non restricted user typically the attendant can transfer a CO trunk to an outward restricted or toll restricted station giving the station outward service The toll restriction class of the transferring station will apply for calls placed over a transferred trunk Administration Voice Terminal Station Port Restrict access to CO trunk pool Ye
220. k supports both touch tone and dial pulse signaling Longitudinal surges are isolated from the hybrid and codec by the line transformer 3 38 PORT CIRCUIT 0 PORT ON BOARD MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUIT GROUND DETECTOR Figure 3 18 Unique Auxiliary Trunk TN 763 Circuitry 3 39 TO AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT System Resources The System Resource Circuit Packs are as follows e Service Circuit ZTN 85 e Tone Detector TN 748 e Pooled Modem TN 758 Service Circuit ZTN 85 The Service Circuit Circuit Pack provides the system s clock signals It also generates and receives tones The Service Circuit Circuit Pack Figure 3 19 consists of the following e Bus buffers e Sanity And Control Interface SAKI e On board microprocessor with external RAM e Clock circuit e Tone Generator e Time slot table and counter e Tone detector ports e Port I O and Sanity Check circuit The ZTN 85 provides four touch tone receivers generates all tones for the system and supplies the system clocks The ZTN 85 can support up to 75 Dual Tone Multifrequency dialers Each System 25 must contain one Service Circuit Circuit Pack Power for the circuit pack 5 volts dc is provided on the backplane 3 40 GENERATOR DSP TIME SLOT TABLE DPRAM TONE TABLE DPRAM TOM BUS LEADS CIRCUIT PACK ADDRESS LEADS NETWORK LEDs U CONTROL ADDRESS 6 DATA BUS
221. ke on three states 1 off line 2 on line on hook and 3 on line off hook Off line is equivalent to a voice terminal being out of service If a direct analogy of on line on hook were made to voice calls the terminal will always be available to answer a call when it is turned on this is similar to an HFAI voice terminal 2 63 Data Call Processing Modes Data calls differ both in signaling and call setup from voice calls For this reason a unique set of data call processing modes have been defined to support data call operation in a manner consistent with the characteristics of data terminals a Off Line Mode The data endpoint is considered to be in the Off Line Mode whenever the data endpoints signal is inactive e g turned off The endpoint is considered unavailable and calls to this endpoint will receive the RINGING message or Ringback indefinitely Idle Mode The Idle Mode indicates that the data endpoint is in its on line on hook state While idle call processing will allow the endpoint to Enter either Data Terminal Dialing mode to originate a data call or enter the Setup mode after a call is originated from a voice terminal One Button Transfer To Data Autoanswer a data call and go into Setup mode The data endpoint remains in the Idle mode while the user is establishing a data call from a voice terminal until One Button Transfer To Data is activated Command Mode Command Mode
222. ks that are to receive coverage by the other attendant Interactions e Attendant Call Transfer Unanswered calls extended by an inactive console will return to the active console on the Return On Don t Answer RTN DA button e Attendant Camp On Calls Camped On by an inactive console will return to the active console when Camp On timeout occurs Attendant Message Waiting inactive attendant is permitted to control voice terminal Message LEDs Automatic Intercom The inactive attendant is permitted to place Automatic Intercom calls Automatic Intercom calls to the inactive attendant will not ring at the console or be transferred to the active attendant when the AUTO ICOM button is located in one of the two rightmost button columns Call Coverage If the active attendant is a coverage receiver for the inactive attendant coverage is invoked and calls will appear at the active attendant s Cover button If the inactive attendant is a coverage receiver for the active attendant coverage when activated is invoked at all coverage stations including the inactive attendant However if the Cover button is located in one of the two rightmost button columns coverage calls will not ring at these buttons Call Park call parked by inactive attendant will return to the inactive attendant on the button the call was parked on if the call times out Direct Group Calling If the inactive attendant is member of a DGC Group calls directed
223. l or Immediate Dial Accepts Touch Tone or Dial Pulse Signals eIncoming Service Only Tie Trunk TN 760B e Capacity 4 Circuits eSupports Type I E amp M Type I Compatible E amp M or Type V Simplex Signaling e 4 Wire Transmission e 3 Pair Interface Transmit Receive Signaling E amp M 8 15 Port Specifications Contd TRUNK PORTS TRUNK TYPE CIRCUIT PACK SPECIFICATIONS Ground Start ZTN 76 e Capacity 8 Circuits Trunk 2 Wire 600 Ohms or RC Balance Transmission Network Sugnaling Ground Start Two way or Incoming only Service Loop Start ZTN 77 Trunk Capacity 8 Circuits 2 Wire 600 Ohms or RC Balance Transmission e Network Signaling Loop Start e Two way or Incoming only Service Recommended Network Facilities Trunks Table 8 A provides recommendations for CO trunks based on the number of voice terminals in the system and the calling traffic TABLE 8 A Central Office Trunk Recommendations CALLING TRAFFIC VOICE LIGHT MEDIUM HEAVY TERMINALS TRAFFIC TRAFFIC TRAFFIC 4 4 5 5 Notes 1 For systems with both one way and two way trunks the first number listed under Calling Traffic is the number of two way trunks required the second number is the number of one way trunks required 2 For systems with just two way trunks add the two numbers listed under Calling Traffic to determine the number of trunks required Analog Transmission Characteris
224. l be returned after each number is programmed If not Reorder Tone will be returned Note Personal Speed Dialing is voice terminal oriented not PDC oriented A user who logs in at another terminal cannot use his her Personal Speed Dial numbers 2 125 Considerations System Speed Dialing allows users to dial a number by simply dialing 100 189 The stored number associated with each code is typically a common use phone number and is programmed via the SAT Personal Speed Dialing allows users to program up to seven private numbers for their personal use The system will compare the restrictions applicable for the voice terminal against the number associated with the Speed Dial code and allow or deny the call just as if the number had been dialed directly from the terminal Interactions Account Code Entry System Speed Dial codes may be used as account codes Calling Restrictions A terminal that is restricted from placing a particular call cannot avoid restriction by using the Speed Dialing feature Command Mode And Data Terminal Dialing System Speed Dial codes can be entered during Data Terminal Dialing Repertory Dialing Numbers already stored as System Speed Dial numbers can also be stored as REP DIAL numbers Storing a System Speed Dial code 100 189 on a REP DIAL button saves memory space compared to storing the whole number again on a REP DIAL button Speed Dialing Unlike System Speed Dial codes which are acce
225. l is a BIS set the user may transfer a call from the handset to the speakerphone by pressing the Speakerphone button and hanging up The system will only auto answer inside calls originally directed to the HFAI BIS stations Transferred calls and coverage calls will not be auto answered If a user leaves his her set in auto answer mode their calls will not of course receive coverage However if the attendant lights the Message LED a HFAI BIS terminal the auto answer function will turn off allowing subsequent calls to receive coverage 2 81 Considerations Hands Free Answer On Intercom allows a called party to answer an incoming call without interrupting the task at hand Interactions Attendant Message Waiting If the attendant lights the Message LED 5 terminal with AUTO ANS button active the auto answer function will turn off allowing subsequent calls to receive coverage as assigned Call Coverage An incoming inside call will not receive call coverage if auto answer is activated since the set will answer the call whether the user is present or not Administration Voice Terminal Station Port e Assign AUTO ANS button Hardware Requirements None 2 82 HOLD Description Allows users to place a call on hold A single line voice terminal user can place only one call on hold and must remain off hook to retain the held call A multiline voice terminal user can place as many calls on
226. led Modem MEMORY BUS common CONTROL processor MEMORY TDM BUS SWITCHING NETWORK SERVICE TONE POOLED CIRCUIT DETECTOR MODEM SYSTEM RESOURCES PORT CIRCUITS TRUNKS VOICE TERMINALS Figure 3 1 System 25 Digital Switch 3 1 Common Control The Common Control circuitry consists of the Call processor ZTN 82 and Memory ZTN 81B Circuit Packs and associated memory bus which is a 60 wire including grounds 39 bit 16 data 23 address 6 MHz frontplane flat ribbon cable Call Processor Circuit Pack ZTN 82 The Call Processor runs the system feature code It is powered from the backplance by 5 and 5 volts It also draws 48 volts from the backplane to drive the Emergency Transfer Unit Each system must include one Call Processor Circuit Pack The Call Processor circuitry as shown in Figure 3 2 includes Microprocessor Memory management On board memory EIA channels Network controller Clock Front plane interface Reset circuitry Bus error circuitry Interrupt circuitry Emergency Transfer Unit Control 3 2 EMERGENCY CHANNELS TRANSFER UNIT 5 2320 ETU INTERRUPT SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL 48V dc CIRCUITRY CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 ETU CONTROL 3 BUS ERROR MICROPROCESSOR EIA EIA CONTROL CONTROL LED 68010 CIRCUITRY RESET CIRCUITRY MANAGEMENT TO MEMORY CIRCUIT PACK VIA TIME OF RA
227. les The 34 Button Deluxe Voice Terminal Figure 4 9 is used for either console Programmable feature button default assignments on the consoles are e Two predefined as System Access e Six other predefined Start Cancel Release Return On Don t Answer Return On Busy and Alarm e 26 programmable default assignments are Repertory Dial 3 Flex DSS Account Code Entry Attendant Message Waiting Night Service trunk appearances 15 as Personal Lines Group Call Coverage and Direct Facility Access On the primary Attendant Console the first 15 Trunks in the system are assigned button appearances as Personal Lines on the console If there are fewer than 15 trunks the remaining buttons are not assigned Trunk default assignments are not assigned on the secondary console On the primary Attendant Console the first of the Direct Facility Pooled Access buttons defaults to loop start trunks the second to ground start trunks and the third to tie trunks For any trunk type not assigned in the system the associated button does not receive a default assignment These buttons do not receive default assignments on the secondary console 4 44 If a secondary console is used different trunks can be assigned to the secondary console the same trunks can be assigned The system permits both Attendant Consoles to operate either simultaneously or one may be in a Position Busy mode At least one console must remain active The use
228. lusion is invoked The status LED of the line appearance button and the Exclusion button will wink Music On Hold held party on an outside line will receive Music On Hold if provided Personal Lines Personal Line cannot be placed on hold if any other stations are also off hook on that line Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 83 HOLD RELEASE ON ABANDON Description Allows the system to automatically release a held line trunk abandoned by an outside party Upon receipt of a suitable loop open interval from the CO the system releases the associated line Such opens are normally provided when the CO switches to permanent signal Release opens must be 50 milliseconds or greater to guarantee release The system does not pass disconnect signals from the CO to a voice terminal therefore auxiliary devices terminated on the station side will not hang up automatically A voice terminal user returning to an abandoned call will hear CO Dial Tone or Intercept Tone until the system releases the call Considerations Hold Release On Abandon allows the system to make lines trunks available for calls that otherwise might not be available Interactions None Administration None Hardware Requirements None 2 84 INTERCEPT TREATMENT WITH REORDER TONES Description Provides Reorder Tone fast busy when an unassigned number is dialed a dialing error occurs and on unsucc
229. mbers rather than Data Dial Codes DDCs Station to station data calls to or from this endpoint to or from digital endpoints require a modem conversion resource to convert the endpoint s analog data back to digital format Calls from digital endpoints terminating at an analog data endpoint i e calls to a PDC will automatically have a conversion resource inserted in the calling path If the called endpoint should then invoke One Button Transfer To Data the conversion resource will be released Data calls originating from an analog data endpoint must first enter a Modem Request Code before addressing a digital data endpoint This is required because the system assumes that a call originating from a voice terminal will invoke One Button Transfer To Data If the analog data endpoint is not going to transfer to data they must indicate this so that a conversion resource will be included in the connection 2 DCE Devices This group of data endpoints consists primarily of modems The modems are connected to a data port from their RS 232C side The data module must be configured as a DTE interface to provide connectivity between the modem and a data port It is possible to simulate a DTE interface from an ADU data module with a null modem type cable This group of endpoints is important for users that provide their own modems connected to dedicated trunks or private lines for internal modem pooling Data Endpoint States The data endpoint may ta
230. ministration e Trunks Assign trunks to DGC Group e System Number of rings before DGC Calls are transferred to announcement or begin ringing at button appearances e Direct Group Calling Assign DGC access code Add delete DGC members via PDC Hardware Requirements None 2 70 DIRECT GROUP CALLING DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT Description Provides a recorded announcement to an outside caller who has been placed in queue for a DGC Group When all members in the group are busy off hook the call will be queued for DGC service and the calling party will receive ringback tone Note that no incoming call indication ringing is provided to the DGC group members at this point After a specified number of rings administrable a recorded announcement will be played to the calling party without disturbing his or her position in queue The caller is subsequently placed on hold and will receive music if available Once a call begins to ring at a DGC station the call is no longer eligible for delay announcement service The call will then ring until answered covered picked up or abandoned Considerations DGC Delay Announcements provide the calling party with a message that acknowledges their call and assures them that their call will be handled in an orderly way Interactions None Administration The DGC announcement device requires a port assignment on a ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line or TN 742 Analog Line CP Only one DGC Delay Announcement
231. n Voice Terminal Station Port e Restrictions Refer to feature description Trunk Port e Assign facility access codes e Allow dial access for facility Hardware Requirements None 2 115 POWER FAILURE TRANSFER PFT Description Provides service to and from the CO for a limited number of prearranged single line voice terminals during a commercial power failure or when voltage drops below 90 volts for longer than 250 milliseconds or during other service interruptions Any loop start or ground start trunk may be arranged to terminate at a specific station on a one to one basis When a failure occurs these prearranged connections are made bypassing the system and connecting terminals directly to the CO trunks System features and restrictions are not available during this time The system supports up to four Emergency Transfer Units ETUs Each ETU can provide up to five voice terminals with direct connection to CO trunks When the system connects to dial pulse trunks only rotary sets may be used to support Power Failure Transfer PFT These terminals cannot be used except for PFT service When the system interfaces the CO via touch tone trunks touch tone single line voice terminals are used as PFT stations These terminals may also be used for regular service When power is restored the following will be restored to their previous state 1 Features a Message Waiting b Send All Calls c Night Service d Position
232. n the associated status LED provides pool busy idle status and the busy to idle reminder Interactions Automatic Route Selection ARS Multiline voice terminal users who have pressed FACILITY to activate busy to idle reminder must wait until all queued ARS users have been serviced Facility Access Restriciton see Calling Restrictions A trunk group may be reserved for a group of users by dial access restricting the trunks In this way only users who have a FACILITY button or Personal Line appearance can use the trunks Line Selection Prime Line Preference Pressing a FACILITY button to invoke the busy to idle reminder overrides Prime Line Preference Toll Restriction see Calling Restrictions Toll restricted voice terminals receive standard toll restriction treatment on all FACILITY buttons 2 113 Administration Voice Terminal Station Port e Assign Pooled Facility Access FACILITY buttons trunk group e Assign Facility Access Codes Hardware Requirements None 2 114 POOLED FACILITY DIALACCESS Description Allows both multiline and single line voice terminal users to access a common pool of trunks by dialing a facility access code Up to 16 facility access codes can be assigned one per trunk group The codes can be one to four digits in length A group of similar trunks assigned the same access code is referred to as a trunk group Additional information is provided in the Trunk Groups
233. n Off A covered party must dial the covering party to retrieve their messages Multiline voice terminal users can press MESSAGE to turn Off their Message LED Message indicators on single line voice terminals can only be controlled by the covering party or the attendant If a user tries to turn On the Message LED at a voice terminal for which they don t provide Individual Call Coverage they will not turn On the LED but will receive Reorder Tone instead Refer to the Call Coverage Individual feature description for additional information 2 92 Station To Station Message Waiting Multiline voice terminals can be assigned paired Message Waiting MSG WAIT buttons with associated status LEDs When this indicator is lighted the user calls the other user for messages The MSG WAIT LED can be controlled by the associated terminals only Either user can toggle the state of both LEDs e g both LEDs go On or Off together at any time whether on hook or off hook Refer to the Station To Station Message Waiting feature description for additional information Considerations The Attendant and Coverage Message Waiting features light the same basic Message indicator on each set The Station To Station feature may be assigned to programmable MSG WAIT buttons between two sets it lights the LED next to the button Interactions None Administration Attendant Position Station Port e Assign ATT MSG button defaulted Voice Term
234. n a desk or table top that is about 18 inches high and capable of supporting at least 250 pounds The cabinets must not be placed on the floor System Administration Terminal SAT Model 703 The SAT should also be located near the system cabinets and plugged into the same AC outlet It is 12 inches wide 10 inches long and 3 inches high Digital Tape Unit The Tape Unit Model DC5 Digital Data Recorder should also be located near the system cabinets It is 5 inches wide 2 inches high and 10 inches long SMDR or Call Accounting System CAS The AT amp T Model 475 printer is approximately 16 inches wide 12 inches long and 6 inches high The CAS runs on the AT amp T PC 6300 They should also be located near the system cabinets Wall Space Requirements The customer provided backboard for the cross connect field shall be 3 4 inch thick 4 feet high and 8 feet wide Mount the board 30 inches above the floor The board must conform to national and local fire safety codes If existing cross connect hardware is reused the space requirements and hardware requirements must be shown on the floor plan Contact your AT amp T Technical Consultant for assistance in planning for reuse of existing equipment Temperature and Humidity The System 25 equipment should be installed in a well ventilated area The equipment must be located in an area with an ambient temperature between 40 degrees and 104 degrees Fahrenheit 5 and 40 degrees Celsius Th
235. n to answer Attendant Automatic Release enhances the attendant s ability to handle many calls by eliminating the Release operation when answering a second call The Release function is inhibited whenever the Start facility is connected to Reorder or Dial Tone Pressing CANCEL will reconnect the attendant to the calling party Interactions e Attendant Camp On Calls released when Busy Tone is heard will be camped on Administration None Required Hardware Required None 2 20 ATTENDANT RETURN COVERAGE ON BUSY Description Allows a camped on call at a busy station or DGC Group to be returned to the attendant for service after a specified time period A camped on call not answered within 1 to 120 seconds administrable after the attendant releases the call will return on the Return On Busy RTN BUSY button To answer a returned call the attendant presses RTN BUSY if not selected by Ringing Line Preference A returned call may be reextended via the Start button or DXS Console In either case the Return On Busy button is idled as soon as the attendant releases When the RTN BUSY button is busy the calling party will remain on hold The system will continue to attempt to ring the called station until the RTN BUSY button is idle When Attendant Camp On is not provided Camp On return time set to zero seconds calls released by the attendant to busy tone are returned immediately to the RTN BUSY button Considerations
236. nal to another one way only while Automatic Intercom provides similar access for each voice terminal two way and must be assigned between two multiline voice terminals A DSS button may point to a single line station an Automatic Intercom button may not DSS calls receive call coverage Automatic Intercom calls do not Interactions e Call Coverage DSS calls placed to an individual with Call Coverage will receive standard call coverage treatment e Call Following Direct Station Selection is a station oriented feature DSS calls do not follow users who log in at other voice terminals Direct Group Calling DSS button can be assigned to a DGC group The associated LED lights steadily when all stations in the group are busy e Line Selection Prime Line Preference When Prime Line Preference is assigned to a DSS button the button must be pressed to invoke the busy to idle reminder even though its red I Use LED is lighted Personal Dial Code PDC An attempt to program a FPDC to a DSS button rather than a PDC results in Reorder Tone Administration Assign DSS buttons at voice terminal Hardware Requirements None DISTINCTIVE RINGING Description Allows user s to distinguish between outside calls and inside internal calls User s receive two types of ringing e A repeated two burst tone indicates an outside call or a call extended by the attendant The two burst tone pattern is 0 2 seconds on 0 4 seconds off
237. ncoming Trunk Calls To establish a data connection between an incoming trunk call and a digital endpoint Incoming trunk calls that are answered at a voice terminal can be transferred to a data endpoint using the One Button Transfer To Data feature e On Premises Data Calls To establish a data connection between an on premises analog data endpoint 2 94 e Outgoing Trunk Calls establish a data connection between off premises analog endpoint modem and an on premises digital endpoint Considerations Modem Pooling provides a pool of conversion resources which increases data call flexibility Conversion resources allow analog data endpoints using modems to communicate with digital data endpoints using data modules Also modem pooling reduces costs by sharing resources Interactions Automatic Route Selection Data calls may be queued See Table 2 F l PLEASE WAIT message Calling Restrictions If a terminal is toll or access restricted the modem resource is released when the user receives intercept treatment Direct Group Calling Modem pooling supports calls to data endpoints that are part of a DGC group While an incoming data call is in the DGC group queue the caller hears Ringback Tone The conversion resource is inserted if the call is completed to a digital endpoint e Station Hunting Modem Pooling supports calls to data endpoints that are part of a station hunting group e SMDR SMDR records do
238. nd Account Code Entry features should be assigned to these buttons Adjuncts e 502A Headset Adapter PEC 3163 HFU e S102A Speakerphone PEC 3164 4 24 I USE STATUS LEDs SYSTEM ACCESS 2 PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS 3 HANDSET TEST PR SWITCH PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS 29 TOUCH DIAL PAD SPEAKER RING VOLUME CONTROL SWITCH Ci CONFERENCE TRANSFER DROP O HOLD RECALL Figure 4 8 34 Button Voice Terminal 7305H01B 4 25 34 Button Deluxe Voice Terminal 7305H0213 PEC 3162 417 The 34 Button Deluxe terminal Figure 4 9 is available for general use and as Attendant Console The voice terminal is approximately 10 1 4 inches wide 5 1 2 inches high and 8 1 2 inches long It comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Dial Pad not I Use and Status LEDs Test Program Switch T Used to test the operation of LEDs and ringer e P Used to program features on the voice terminal Built in Speaker Speaker Ringer Volume Control Seven Predefined Buttons Conference Drop Transfer Hold Speaker e Message Recall 34 Feature Buttons each equipped with I Use and Status LEDs If For General Use Two predefined as System Access e 32 Programmable default assignment are Repertory Dial 3 Send All Calls Account Code Entry and Flex DSS 27 When Used As An Attendant Console e Two predefined as System Access e Six other predefin
239. nd a DXS button EIA Electronics Industries Association Emergency Transfer Unit Provides direct connection of designated Power Failure Transfer PFT registered voice terminals to the CO during a power failure or other service interruption Erlang A traffic measuring unit that expresses the load of one or more traffic handling devices 36 CCS equals 1 erlang see CCS Hundred Call Seconds Extension Number One through four digit number assigned to each voice terminal and data end point in the system Also see Personal Dial Code External Call A connection between a system user and a party on the public telephone network or on a tie trunk FRL Facility Restriction Level 11 5 Facility physical A transmission channel to another switching system to a Central Office for example By application examples are e CO Trunks e FX Trunks e WATS Trunks OCC Trunks e Tie Trunks By technical type these include loop start ground start DID automatic ringdown etc These facilities may be accessed by their facility access codes FACs Feature A specifically defined function or service provided by the system Feature Button A labeled button on a voice terminal or attendant console designating a specific feature Foreign Exchange FX A central office other than the one providing local access to the public telephone network Foreign Exchange Trunk A telecommunications channel that directly conn
240. nd keeping call rate information up to date System configuration may be changed This allows the user to inform the CAS of changes in System 25 e g dial access codes trunks or changes in charge rates System housekeeping may also be performed This includes establishing passwords deleting call records determining call processing options and performing various disk maintenance operations 4 Directory Lookup and Message Center Allows the user to look up anyone by last name first name or extension Messages can be recorded for individuals and can be printed or displayed Additional information on the SMDR call record output is provided in the SMDR feature description The following table summarizes CAS station and account code capacities AT amp T CALL ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS Refer to the CAS documentation for additional information Considerations The CAS provides customers with an efficient tool to control and manage their telephone usage and costs The information available can be used to facilitate cost allocation traffic analysis and abuse control 2 36 Interactions None Administration System e Send SMDR Records To SMDR Port Yes No Default Yes e Bill Call S Seconds After Last Digit Dialed 10 255 Default 40 Hardware Requirements Requires an AT amp T PC 6300 equipped with CAS Model 200 300 500 or 2000 applications software 2 37 CALL COVERAG E G ROUP Description Allows calls to cov
241. ndication is provided that trunks have been bridged together Data Records system prints call records associated with data calls External calls are considered data calls if they involve a data extension 2 129 The following list describes the SMDR data collected for each call and the number of characters in each field All information is right justified in its field unless otherwise indicated The record is provided in a standard 80 column format The headings for each record item are noted in bold type These headings are printed across the top of each page Page advance is determined by counting lines based on a fixed page length Each record is followed by a carriage return and a line feed The system can provide for the storage of up to 80 SMDR records If more than 80 records are received while the printer is disconnected a message Calls Lost Due To Call Records Overflow is provided when a printer is re attached The SMDR call detail Figure 2 3 contains the following information for each call record TYPE Column 1 voice calls are labeled C data calls are labeled D TYPE is not printed as a column heading Blank Column 2 DATE Columns 3 10 The date the call is originated Blank Column 11 TIME Columns 12 16 The time the trunk is seized is listed using a 24 hour clock For example 2 01 PM is listed as 14 01 Seconds are truncated Blank Column 17 CALLED NUMBER Columns 18 35 For out
242. ndset pressing SPEAKER will turn On the speaker to support the Group Listen feature Pressing SPEAKER at a terminal with the Speaker already On and the handset off hook turns Off the speaker and associated LED Note that once the user is off hook on the handset it is not possible to return to hands free operation Hanging up the handset will terminate the call whether the speaker is On or Off Note The built in speaker provides one way communication listen only The user must pick up the handset to converse Considerations The built in speaker supports group listening monitoring of calls e g while on hold and on hook dialing Interactions None Administration None Required Hardware Requirements Only 7300H series MERLIN voice terminals support this feature 2 123 SPEAKERPHONE ADJUNCT Description This adjunct provides speakerphone service The speakerphone adjunct is used instead of the handset to permit voice terminal users to place and receive calls essentially hands free The speakerphone must be turned On by pressing the speakerphone adjunct On Off switch each time it is used The adjunct is turned Off by pressing the On Off switch or by lifting the handset Receive but not transmit volume may be adjusted All voice terminal functions operate normally with the speakerphone adjunct Lifting the handset during speakerphone operation automatically turns Off the speakerphone The speakerphone may be turned
243. ng e 858A Six 4 pair modular jacks to six 110 type cut down blocks One required per six voice terminals Connects to unterminated building wiring Equivalent to six Z601A s Sections A B C and D on the SIP Panel Figure 4 24 each provide mounting for One 205A1 adapter one 210A adapter one 858A adapter or six Z600A adapters or six Z601A adapters The SIP equipment is furnished by the installer 4 60 p CABLE ADAPTER CLIP 19 ADAPTER SET ID CABLE RING HOLDER PANEL ID Figure 4 24 617A Station Interconnect Panel 4 61 Figure 4 25 shows voice terminal connections to the system cabinets via the SIP Typically voice terminals are plugged into modular wall jacks which provide a cut down block for building wiring At the SIP Z601A adapters provide a cut down point for 4 pair wire runs An octopus cable WP90780 from a station CP provides 25 pair connectorized cabling to eight 4 pair modular jacks Each jack is terminated on the SIP by a Z601A adapter An octopus cable connects a maximum of eight voice terminals to a port CP DIGITAL SWITCH STATION CIRCUIT PACK UNTERMINATED 4 PAIR BUILDING MODULAR JACKS VOICE TERMINALS ADJUNCTS LEGEND POWER UNITS OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05 858A ADAPTER SIX 4 PAIR MODULAR JACKS TO SIX 110 TYPE CUTDOWN BLOCKS FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 4 25 Typical SIP Connections 4 62 10B Emergenc
244. nication between the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor Port Circuits The port circuits are identical except for port 3 where part of the E lead maintenance circuit is located Each port circuit consists of a codec with associated input and output line transformers analog operational amplifiers a power filter loop around transistors port control comparators a relay driver an electronic power feed device an E lead test maintenance circuit and surge protection circuits The codec converts the incoming 4 wire analog signal from the tie trunk to a PCM data signal The codec converts the incoming PCM data signal from the NPE to an analog signal Outgoing and incoming line transformers provide dc isolation to the tip and ring leads Analog operational amplifiers provide amplification and buffering for the codec and network and loop around gain compensation Filtered power is provided to the codec and amplifiers The loop around transistors are under control of the port control comparators and provide a loop around path for the signal for testing purposes The relay driver buffers and inverts the relay drive signals from the port I O circuit so that a logic high input operates the appropriate relay The relays and electronic pow
245. nk LS Trunk CP TR Line CP ATL Line CP Asynchronous Data Unit Digital Tape Unit System Admin Terminal SAT Direct Extension Selector Console 4 95 APPARATUS CODE COMCODE includes J58901A1 L1 e w WP90510 WP90677 L1 21985 1 J58901A1 L2 4 ZTN 81B ZTN 82 ZTN 85 includes J58901A1 L1 e w WP90510 WP90677 L1 J58901A1 L3 ZTN 76 ZTN 77 ZIN 78 ZIN 79 D181521 includes D8W 87 Cord 14ft 73 5 ATL ADU TS 555A TS 458A 23A1 003e w D6AP Cord D8W 87 Cord KS22911L1 Power 400B2 Adapter 403954761 845416379 403957129 845416635 103810586 103965281 103965299 103965323 403954761 845416379 403957129 845416635 403961519 103965232 103965240 103965257 103965265 105105506 103786802 103975349 404079436 404079429 103969424 102937620 103786802 403242639 103848859 62510 62511 62512 62513 62514 631111 631121 631161 631171 631181 631191 631231 631301 2169 001 2169 004 21691 2720 05 DESCRIPTION MERLIN VT local power Auxiliary Trunk Interface Paging Dictation Aux Trunk Interface MOH Interface 10B ETU Analog Line CP MET Line CP DID Trunk CP Tie Trunk CP Aux Trunk CP Pooled Modem CP Tone Detector CP Data Line CP Tip Ring ADU Tip Ring ADU ADU Aux Power 25 pair 8 plug 15ft CBL APPARATUS CODE D181522 includes 7400 Adapter D6AP 87 Cord KS22911 L1 Power D181523 includes Block Conn 66E3 25
246. nly be canceled by preselection of another button or answering an incoming call Considerations With Automatic Intercom users who frequently call each other can do so by pressing one button instead of dialing a PDC In addition the station busy indication and busy to idle reminder provide additional utility to users This feature is similar to Direct Station Selection DSS except that the buttons must always be assigned in pairs 1 between two sets Hence an AUTO ICOM button cannot point to a single line set Also Automatic Intercom calls arrive at the AUTO ICOM button thereby providing calling party ID DSS calls arrive on System Access buttons Interactions Attendant Position Busy The inactive attendant is permitted to place Automatic Intercom calls Automatic Intercom calls to the inactive attendant where the AUTO ICOM button is located in one of the two rightmost button columns will not ring at the console nor can they be covered by the active attendant Call Coverage Automatic Intercom calls are considered private and do not receive call coverage Call Pickup When an Automatic Intercom call is picked up via Call Pickup the AUTO ICOM status LED on the called voice terminal lights steadily The called party can press AUTO ICOM to enter the call at any time Direct Group Calling Automatic Intercom calls cannot be directed to DGC groups Exclusion Any attempt to engage Exclusion while active on an Automatic Intercom
247. nnector Connector Modular 4 pair jack Modular 4 pair jack Modular 4 pair jack Modular 4 pair jack ADU Connection Information Plug ended M 25 pin connector on a 3 foot cable Plug ended M 25 pin connector attached to housing Receptacle ended F 25 pin connector on 3 foot cable Plug ended M 25 pin connector on 3 foot cable Jacks for single line voice terminal wall jack and Originate Disconnect switch Jacks for single line voice terminal wall jack and Originate Disconnect switch Jacks for single line voice terminal wall jack and Originate Disconnect switch Jacks for required KS 22911 L1 Power Unit Wall jack 7300H Series voice terminal and optional Originate Disconnect switch Detailed connection information is provided in the following figures e Figure 4 45 ypical ADU Connections Supporting Data Terminal And Single Line Voice Terminal ypical ADU Connections Supporting Data Terminal And 7300 Series Multiline Voice Terminal ypical Z3A1 2 4 ADU Local Power Connections As shown in Figure 4 47 local external power may be provided to the Z3A1 Z3A2 and Z3A4 ADUs via 2012D power transformer and a 248B adapter attached to 400B2 adapter with a D6AP 87 modular cord Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading later in thi
248. nsformer which plugs into a 115V ac receptacle Adjunct power supplies are described immediately following the adjunct descriptions S102A Speakerphone does not require supplemental power MODULAR CONNECTING S CORD Figure 4 17 S101A S102A Speakerphone 4 41 55 1 Key Ground Start Button A 55A Ground Start Button is required to obtain dial tone for each Power Failure Transfer station that is connected to a ground start trunk Acoustic Coupler An Acoustic Coupler 349A Adapter can be used with the 7300H series voice terminals The coupler provides acoustic coupling between the handset and acoustic modems MET Sets require a 346A Adapter AT amp T Answer Record 2500 PEC 3121 050 The Answer Record 2500 or Code A Phone 2540 PEC 3121 040 can be used as an adjunct using a 267A T adapter to single line voice terminals Note that when an answering device is bridged on to a ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line CP port the combined adjunct terminal REN must not exceed 1 20 A B Z34A Message Waiting Indicator The 234A Message Waiting Indicator provides a message waiting indication at single line sets The indicator may be used with 2500 series voice terminals that don t have message waiting lamps 4 42 Voice Terminal Adjunct Connection Information Detailed adjunct connection information is provided in the following figures Figure 4 85 Typical Adjunct Connections For 7300H Series Voice Terminals Other Than 3
249. nt Dictation System 4 88 Digital Tape Unit External Alerts Multiline Voice Terminals Music On Hold Paging Equipment Single Line Voice Terminals SMDR System Administration Terminal 4 83 4 84 Voice Terminal Adjuncts Connectivity General Connectivity Figures Console Attendant Direct Extension Selector 4 45 Direct Trunk Data Call Preindication Calls And Services Features 2 5 444221 12 2 Dictation System Access DID Trunk CP TN 753 Digital Tape Unit Direct Extension Selection Attendant 2 15 Extension Selector DXS Console External Alerting Equipment 4 56 External Alerts 2 80 Facilities Recommended Network Facility Access Restriction Feature Tables Hands Free Answer On Intercom Hardware And Software Parameters Hardware Description Hold 2 83 0 Hold Release On Abandon Hunting Station Implementation Manual 555 500 650 Indications Line Status And I Use Indicator Lamp Signals Individual Call Coverage Installation And Test Manual 555 500 100 Intercept Treatment With Reorder Tone Intercom HFAI Hands Free Answer On Intercom Automatic Peripheral Equipment Description Lightning Protection Call Accounting System Line Selection Digital Tape Unit Line Status And I Use Indications System Administration Terminal Lines Pers
250. number and not replace it with a new one You can always program a new number directly over an old one To deprogram 1 Press System Access button 2 Go off hook and listen for dial tone 3 Dial 4 4 Press the button to be deprogrammed or dial the Speed Dial code 20 26 to be deprogrammed 5 Listen for Confirmation Tone Hang up Again MERLIN terminal users may use an alternative procedure 1 Slide the Test Program switch to P 2 Lift the handset 3 Complete steps 4 through 6 above 4 Slide the Test Program switch to the center off position Considerations The Program feature allows users to assign their own Speed Dial DSS Repertory Dial numbers This is particularly useful where working arrangements or personnel responsibilities change Numbers up to 28 digits long including s may be programmed Interactions e Users cannot place or answer calls while in the program mode Incoming calls will receive Busy Tone Administration Voice Terminal Station Port e Assign Flex DSS and Repertory Dial buttons e Allow Personal Speed Dialing on a per station basis Hardware Requirements None 2 119 RECALL Description Single line voice terminal users can obtain Recall Dial Tone by pressing the RECALL button not all single line sets have a RECALL button Pressing RECALL is equivalent to briefly pressing and releasing the switchhook switchhook flash For multiline users the response to pressing RECALL de
251. o manage and monitor some system operations e Direct Extension Selector DXS Console Provides the attendant with a visual indication of the active or idle status of extension numbers assigned in the system Also allows the attendant to place calls to system users by operation of appropriate Hundreds Group Select buttons and associated DXS buttons Auxiliary Equipment e Dictation Equipment e Delay Announcement Devices e External Alerting Devices external alerts e Music On Hold Equipment e Paging Equipment Auxiliary Trunk A trunk circuit used to connect auxiliary equipment to the switch for example music or dictation equipment BLF Busy Lamp Field BPS Bits Per Second Bit Binary Digit One unit of information in binary notation having two possible states or values zero or one Bridge Bridging The sharing of the same extension by two or more voice terminals Buffer A circuit or component that isolates one electrical circuit from another Typically a buffer holds data from one circuit or process until another circuit or process is ready to accept the data Bus A multi conductor electrical path used to transfer information over a common connection from any of several sources to any of several destinations 11 2 Bus Time Division Multiplex See Time Division Multiplex Bus CCS Hundred Call Seconds A traffic measuring unit that expresses the load of one or more traffic handling devices A device
252. oice terminal e Meet Me Conference conference member places the conference on hold and pages another employee to join the conference e Transfer A user places a call on hold and then pages another employee to pick up the call Call Park allows a user to move a held call to a parked position by dialing the Call Park code 5 The call can subsequently be retrieved from any voice terminal by dialing the Call Park retrieval code 8 and the PDC of the parking station In addition any user active in a conference involving fewer than five members may park the conference so that another user may join the conference A multiline voice terminal user may invoke Call Park by pressing HOLD to place a call or conference on hold then pressing an idle System Access button and dialing 5 A single line voice terminal user may invoke the feature by pressing the switchhook to place the call or conference on hold then dialing 5 After dialing 5 the user receives Confirmation Tone and then Recall Dial Tone if the call is successfully parked If the call cannot be parked Reorder Tone is received In the latter case to return to the held call press the held call button multiline sets or flash the switchhook single line sets The parking station may return to a parked call or conference without affecting the park state The multiline voice terminal user may return by pressing the held call button The single line user may return by pressing the s
253. oice Terminal Station Port e Assign Call Pickup Group Number 1 16 None Default None Hardware Requirements None 2 48 CALL PROGRESS TONES Call Progress tones provide audible feedback on the status of calls during call set up Busy Tone A slow pulsed tone indicating that all facilities for answering the call are in use Call Waiting Camp On Tone A single short tone to a busy terminal indicating that a second call is waiting Confirmation Tone Three short tones indicating that the system has accepted the instruction entered or that your ARS queued call is being placed Dial Tone A steady tone indicating that dialing or feature activation can begin Dialing Feedback Indicates that a digit has been dialed Preferred Route Queuing Tone ARS Five short tones Indicates no facility is currently available to place your call If you remain off hook your call will be placed as soon as a facility is available Reorder Tone A fast pulsed tone indicating that all trunks are busy a dialing error has occurred or that the terminal is restricted from making this call Ringback Tone Indicates that a called terminal is ringing For additional information refer to Section 8 2 49 CALLING RESTRICTIONS Description Allows restricting designated voice and data terminals from making certain types of calls Available restrictions are e Outward Restriction e Restriction e Facility Access Restricti
254. ollowed by 60 ms of silence administerable When using dial pulse trunks End To End signaling is invoked by dialing after the last digit of the called number or waiting for about 10 seconds after dialing the last digit All subsequent dial pad button presses generate touch tones on the outside line Considerations End To End Signaling permits stations to access network services that require touch tone signals Interactions e Command Mode And Data Terminal Dialing Occasionally it is necessary to send additional tones to the remote endpoint after a data connection has been established A mark character is embedded in the dialing sequence to indicate to call processing that additional tones must be sent prior to insertion of a conversion resource pooled modem into the connection The mark character is used to indicate that all the following digits are for end to end signaling This character is used to mark the boundary between the digits dialed to reach the distant endpoint and the digits used by the distant endpoint after it answers Repertory Dialing Repertory Dialing can be programmed on the 7300H series voice terminals End To End Signaling works properly with this feature Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 77 EXCLUSION Description Allows multiline voice terminal users to keep other users with appearances of the same Personal Line from listening in on their calls Exclusion all
255. oming call If not the call will be terminated when the last inside user disconnects from the conference A single line voice terminal user after having established a three party conference can drop the second party and retain the first party by pressing the switchhook Considerations Conference Drop allows users to conference lines appearing on their terminals and then remove them from the conference when appropriate A user should only drop parties that they have added to a conference If a user tries to drop a party who previously added them to the conference other parties may also be dropped Interactions None Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 60 DATA CALLS AND SERVICES System 25 s data features provide switched data transmission at up to 19 200 bps RS 232C interface and a 212A modern compatible conversion resource capable of handling data at 300 and 1200 bps The system provides switched connections between data endpoints These endpoints include data terminals personal computers multiport computers and modems Data endpoints are either digital data endpoints or analog data endpoints Analog endpoints are connected to System 25 voice terminal or trunk port circuits through a modem in the traditional manner Digital endpoints are connected to System 25 data port circuits on the TN 726 Data Line CP A data module specifically an Asynchronous Data Unit ADU is required in place of th
256. omputers Basic terminals appear to the data port to be on line and available whenever they are turned on thus ready to enter either the Data Terminal Dialing mode or to enter the Setup mode on calls originating from a voice terminal or auto answered calls 2 62 In the case of most personal computers a communications program must be executed in order for it to communicate with its own RS 232C port or built in modem Once the communications software is running further operation will be similar to that of the basic terminal c Host Computer Endpoint A host computer endpoint is very similar to a data endpoint with keyboard except that the host has many ports and the interface is usually capable of supporting multiple speeds and more of the RS 232C control signals Front end communication software running in the host is typically supplied by the computer vendor and is not designed to support the Data Terminal Dialing feature Such software typically supports call origination through Automatic Calling Units ACUs which are not compatible with Terminal Dialing Thus the primary means of communicating with the host is by calling from data terminals or personal computers Groups of host ports with matching characteristics may be members of hunt groups referred to as host port groups d Analog Data Endpoint Data endpoints with modems are referred to as analog data endpoints Modems connected via tip ring lines and use PDCs as extension nu
257. on e ARS Restrictions Note that all these restrictions apply to stations not PDCs Outward Restriction When outward restricted a station will be unable to place any outside calls The station will be able to answer incoming calls and place and receive inside calls A station that is outward restricted will be unable to use Automatic Route Selection to place external calls except to the emergency numbers Toll Restriction Allows calls by restricted terminals to be made based on as many as the first six digits of the number called after the facility access code If a user is toll restricted the user can make outgoing calls only to those numbers which are on the Toll Call Allowed TCA Lists to which it has access TCA entries must be in the form NNX or NPA NNX exactly three or six characters The system manager can establish up to 4 individual lists A list can contain from 1 to 64 entries provided that the total of all four lists does not exceed 64 One character can be specified as a wild card character in place of the last 1 2 or 3 digits e g NN N or of the NNX code but not in the NPA code When this character is used any character in the dialed number appearing in that position is acceptable Those stations assigned Toll Restriction Class 1 have access to all four TCA Lists Class 2 stations just lists 2 through 4 Class 3 stations just lists 3 and 4 Class 4 stations just list 4 The entry of an area code follo
258. on System PDS specifications Various cords cables adapters and connecting blocks are used to facilitate the connection of equipment and associated cable and wire Major points of connectivity include the following e The system cross connect field located on a wall adjacent to the system cabinets The field provides mounting space for the Trunk Access Equipment TAE Station Interconnect Panels SIPS and Emergency Transfer Units ETUS Refer to Environmental Requirements for a typical System 25 layout including cross connect field and associated equipment layout e 25 pair connectors located on the rear of each system cabinet e Modular jacks located at each work station provide modular connections for terminals and associated adjuncts and auxiliary equipment These jacks are connected by building wiring to the SIP Several wiring options are described below Wiring Options There are three basic PECs under which building station wiring is ordered The 2772 JA1 JA2 or JC1 PECs cover new reuse and new plenum wiring respectively These PECs apply on a per wire run basis PEC 2771 JDX covers wiring on a time and materials PEC 2773 JDX covers wiring based on a PCS quote Consult the 2770 section of the Sales Manual for restrictions and requirements before ordering Trunk Access Equipment TAE The TAE provides for the connection of communications facilities such as Tie Ground Start Loop Start and DID trunks to the sy
259. on Transfer Data 2 102 2 es 1 T nal Out Of Building Stations 2 704 voice ODDS 2500 Series Outward Restriction 7101A 4 ae Adjuncts Paging Equipment Description Paging System Access Models Parts Information Off Premises Station Connection Pause On Premises Connection Peripheral Equipment Connections Out Of Building Connection On Premises Direct On Premises Switched Software Description Off Premises Direct Software Partitioning Off Premises Switched 12 3 Single Line Voice Terminals Contd Off Premises Station Connection on Premises Connection Out Of Building Connection Splitting One Way Automatic Attendant Station Features Hunting Interconnect Panel SIP Message Detail Recording SMDR Message Detail Recording And Call Accounting System CAS To Station Message Waiting Stations Extended 2 101 Off Premises Out Of Building Switched Services Software Switching Network System 25 overview Administration TDM Bus 12 4 Unit Loads 8 5 User Guides 700 Series Voice Terminals Adjunct Connection Information 4 43 Adjunct Power Supplies 234A Message Waiting Indicator
260. on separate power lines Motors without commutators generally do not cause interference Field strengths below 1 0 volt per meter are unlikely to cause interference Field strength can be measured by a tunable meter such as the Model R 70 meter manufactured by Electro Metrics Division or broadband meters such as the HOLADAY HI 3001 meter Model EFS 1 meter manufactured by Instruments for Industry Inc The field strength produced by radio transmitters can be estimated by dividing the square root of the emitted power in kilowatts by the distance from the antenna in kilometers This yields the approximate field strength in volts per meter and is relatively accurate for distances greater than about half a wavelength 150 meters for a frequency of 1000 MHz Trademark of Holaday Industries 9 5 AC Power Requirements e The System 25 power service shall be a dedicated branch circuit with no other equipment served See Figure 9 3 Each cabinet requires 500 Watts at 115V ac maximum Provide a load center of appropriate current rating ITE EQ4 typical equipped with 120V ac 15 ampere single pole magnetic circuit breaker s ITE 1 15 typical Each breaker is to protect 2 associated wall mounted 115 V ac 15 AMP receptacles HUBBELL 5262 typical Grounding of this load center is to be provided by a Green Wire ground extended from the grounding electrode conductor at the AC service entrance to the load center
261. on stripe across the top 4 1 Each cabinet is constructed of sheet metal and is 13 inches high 17 inches wide and 21 inches deep and weighs approximately 75 pounds fully loaded A three cabinet system occupies a vertical space of approximately 40 inches It is recommended that the cabinets be placed on a desk or table top They must not be placed on a floor where cleaning solutions and dirt may get into them Refer to Section 9 for equipment area considerations and associated floor plan recommendations The cabinet s front cover is secured by four screws These screws must be loosened slightly before the cover can be removed When removed access is provided to the CPs a replaceable air filter mounted just under the CP carrier frame and two cooling fans The cooling fans are mounted on an assembly which when unscrewed provides access to the power supply Air intake is at the bottom of the cabinet and exhaust is vented at the left side of the front cover 4 2 3 12 PORT CIRCUIT PACKS CABINET 2 12 PORT CIRCUIT PACKS SERVICE CIRCUIT 9 PORT CIRCUIT PACKS Figure 4 1 System 25 Cabinets J58901A Three Cabinet System CABINET 1 CALL PROCESSOR MEMORY Each cabinet has its own power supply mounted to the left of the CP carrier power supply is three inches wide and weighs approximately nine pounds Voltage and current supplied to the carrier are 5V at 35 5V at 48V at
262. onal Station Message Detail Recording 2 29 4 54 Loop Start Trunk CP ZTN 77 Personal Dial Code PDC Personal Lines Personal Speed Dialing Planning Manual 555 500 600 Maintenance Manual 555 500 105 Maintenance Software ae ea du ES Manual Signaling Facility Dial Access 235 Pooled Modem TN 758 Memory Allocation Memory CP ZTN 81B Message Waiting Attendant Preference Ringing Line Preindication Data Call Mode Command Modem Pooling Multiline Voice Terminals Allowable Cable Distances ADU Connection Connection Information Data Features Description MERLIN 5 Button 7302H01C MERLIN 10 Button 7303 01 MERLIN 34 Button 7305 01 MERLIN 34 Button Deluxe 7305 02 MERLIN BIS Set 7305 4 28 MERLIN HFAI Set 7309H01A MET 10 Button 2991 005 10 Button BIS 2993 04 4 34 MET 12 Button 7302 4 36 C 9 on Premises Connections Out Of Building Connections Models 4 14 o Station Features Music On Hold Or Delayed Access Music Source Music On Hold S101A S102A Speakerphone Safety SAT Connection Information 4 51 Service Circuit CP ZTN 85 Services Messaging 2 92 Night Service Night Service Delay Announcements 2 100 NPEs Network Processing Element Off Premises Stations OPS 2 101 One Butt
263. one CALL COVERAGE INDIVIDUAL Description This feature is very similar to Call Coverage Group The primary difference is that this is one on one type coverage An Individual Cover COVER IND button can be assigned on multiline voice terminals to cover calls to a specific single voice terminal The covering station can answer covered calls by pressing COVER IND Each button can be programmed to ring or not to ring If ringing is selected the covering station will begin ringing after a specified number of rings at the covered station When the call is answered at the covering station the call remains accessible at the call appearance button of multiline voice terminals but is no longer accessible at single line voice terminals When the specified number of rings has occurred multiline voice terminals will stop ringing Single line voice terminals continue to ring Covered calls will appear on the COVER IND button call types except Automatic Intercom calls be covered A multiline voice terminal may be equipped with a Send Calls SEND ALL CALLS button to transfer ringing to the covering stations Any covering station may also be equipped with a similar button which will cause all Cover buttons on that terminal to be considred busy by the system Pressing SEND ALL CALLS lights that button s status LED and transfers ringing immediately with no ringing or with a single burst of ringing at the called voice terminal optional on any
264. one is returned to System 25 indicating readiness to accept dialed digits Trunk type refers to the physical design of a trunk circuit The trunk types supported and a brief description of each are given below Refer to Section 3 and Section 11 for additional information Ground Start A ground signal is sent over the trunk leads Loop Start A closure signal is sent through the loop formed by the trunk leads Immediate Start No start dial signals are used On outgoing calls the system waits at least 80 ms after sending the seizure signal before sending the digits required by the distant switch This allows the distant switch enough time to attach a digit receiver to the trunk Tie and DID trunks Wink Start A momentary signal wink is sent to the distant switch Tie and DID trunks Delay Dial A steady signal is sent to the distant switch and is removed when ready to receive digits Tie and DID trunks Automatic No start dial signals are used The seizure signal sent or received is sufficient to route the call Tie trunks only 2 142 Trunk groups connecting with a local CO WATS office or office be ground or loop start DID trunk groups can be immediate delay dial or wink start Tie trunks groups can be delay dial wink start immediate start or automatic Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF signaling touch tone or dial pulse signaling can be used between the System 25 and the far end switch Sys
265. onference Drop Transfer Hold Message e Disconnect Five Feature Buttons each equipped with I Use and Status LEDs Adjuncts Three programmable Default assignments are Repertory Dial e 500A Headset Adapter e 5101 Speakerphone 4 36 HOLD TRANSFER CJ MESSAGE I USE STATUS LEDS PORGRAMMABLE HANDSET PROGRAMMABLE c3 PROGRAMMABLE c3 SYSTEM ACCESS C3 SYSTEM ACCESS TOUCH TONE DIAL PAD TONE RINGER VOLUME CONTROL DISCONNECT Figure 4 14 Twelve Button MET Set 7203M 4 37 Multiline Voice Terminal Connection Information Detailed connection information is provided in the following figures Figure 4 32 pn Premises 7300H Series Voice Terminal Connections Figure 4 33 Dff Premises 7300H Series Voice Terminal Connections e Figure 4 34 ren Button MET Set Connections Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading later in this Section Maximum con distances from the system cabinets to multiline voice terminals is provided in Section 8 Technical Specifications Voice Terminal Adjuncts The following adjuncts and associated power supplies are supported MET Headset Adapter For 10 Button MET Sets 500A 502A Headset Adapter For 12 Button MET Sets and MERLI
266. ossible and with minimum disruption to normal service This goal is supported by periodic automatic diagnostic tests and fault detection hardware System design allows most troubles to be resolved to the circuit pack level System 25 hardware and software are organized as independent units or maintenance objects Each maintenance object is normally a separately replaceable unit These units include circuit packs power units fans voice and data terminals cross connect hardware auxiliary and peripheral equipment There two general categories of system errors system detected errors and user reported problems The system can automatically detect and log errors without human intervention For system detected errors an Alarm LED on the Attendant Console is lighted if the error qualifies as a Permanent System Alarm a serious error Most alarms can be verified by checking the LEDs located on the front edge of the system circuit packs At least one Red LED will be on User reported problems are usually detected at individual voice and data terminals and are often related to alarmed conditions Alarms may be retired automatically and can also be cleared manually After a trouble has been cleared the system retests the previously faulty area If the fault is no longer present the error message and alarm if applicable is cleared It is not necessary for maintenance personnel to retire alarms after a problem has been fixed However they may
267. ower case will be sent to the SAT along with ASCII numerals and some basic ASCII symbols The device used must be capable of displaying ASCII alphabetic characters when either upper case or lower case characters are received However upper to lower case mapping or vice versa for display is acceptable since no meaning is associated with case Keyboard The administration port requires ASCII alphanumeric characters as well as some symbol characters If the keyboard generates only upper case or only lower case alphabetic characters the administration port will respond appropriately since upper and lower case input is considered identical The SAT should be capable of sending the following ASCII Characters A Z or 7 0 9 gt BACKSPACE RETURN The data transfer rate is set when a carriage return character is received by the administration port There are two supported transfer rates 1200 bps and 300 bps Refer to the System 25 Administration Manual 555 500 500 for administration procedures and additional information SAT Connection Information Detailed connection information is provided in the following figures ypical Peripheral Equipment On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet ypical Peripheral Equipment On Premises Direct Connections Greater Than 50 Feet From System Cabinet e 4 42 ypical Peripheral Equipment On Premises Switched Connections ypical Peripheral Equipment Off
268. ows users to exclude the attendant and other stations from an existing or held outside call or to drop other System 25 users from a call The Exclusion button status LED is lighted steadily when the feature is invoked When an excluded call is placed on hold the Exclusion button status LED winks with the LED of the held line Exclusion can be applied to only one line at a time Once Exclusion is invoked on a call it will remain active until the user presses the button a second time or goes on hook Considerations Exclusion allows the sharing of a Personal Line by several users while retaining privacy Note that all inside calls are automatically private Interactions Automatic Intercom Any attempt to activate Exclusion while active on an Automatic Intercom call will drop the other party Call Coverage If a call coverage receiver invokes Exclusion after answering a coverage call all other terminals including the attendant and the covered station are excluded The covered user cannot enter the call until Exclusion is pressed a second time by the covering user Conference When Exclusion is invoked all other inside parties will be dropped If a private conference is desired the user should activate Exclusion first and then set up the conference Hold A call can be placed on hold after Exclusion is invoked The status LED of the line appearance button and the Exclusion button will wink Administration Voice Terminal Sta
269. p Calling If the called party is a member of a hunt DGC or Call Coverage group and all members of the group or all receivers of the Coverage group are busy the call will not hunt or receive coverage Once camped on calls will no longer hunt or receive coverage even if the hunted to station or group member becomes idle e Direct Group Calling The attendant can camp on one call per DGC group Voice terminals in the group do not receive a burst of tone when a call is camped on If the attendant attempts to camp on a second call it is immediately returned on the RTN BUSY button e Direct Inward Dialing DID calls may be covered by the attendant and then given Camp On treatment They do not automatically receive Call Waiting Administration System e Number of seconds before a camped on call returns to the Attendant Console 1 120 seconds or No Attendant Camp On allowed 0 Default 2 30 seconds Hardware Requirements None 2 10 ATTENDANT CANCEL Description Allows the attendant to terminate an attempt to extend any incoming call if the called station does not answer or if the station answers but declines to accept the call Before pressing RELEASE the attendant presses CANCEL and is automatically reconnected to the calling party Pressing CANCEL when the Start facility is not active will be ignored Considerations Attendant Cancel allows the attendant to terminate a call transfer attempt and return to the incoming held pa
270. p Ring Type Modem Interfaces e Networking Capability Tie Trunks Endpoint in Electronic Tandem Network Tributary only not Satellite Endpoint of Enhanced Private Switched Communications Services EPSCS Endpoint of Tandem Tie Trunk Network TTTN Endpoint of Common Control Switching Arrangement CCSA 1 2 Call Handling Capabilities System 25 can be arranged as a stand alone system or can be part of a private network The system provides 256 ports to support the following e 115 simultaneous two party conversations e Traffic Handling 4140 CCS Hour Trunking Limited Busy Hour Call Capacity 2500 calls DTMF Register Limited e Up to 104 trunk ports including Central Office CO DID Tie Foreign Exchange FX and Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS and 800 Service Auxiliary Trunk interface for paging and dictation systems e Up to 240 ports that support a combination of the following Up to 200 ports for voice terminals and auxiliary equipment Up to 104 data ports providing RS 232C connections to data terminals personal or multiport computers Refer to Hardware and Software Parameters as provided in Technical Specifications Section 8 for detailed specifications Safety System 25 meets all requirements found in Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety Office Appliances and Business Equipment UL114 System Configuration shows a typical equipment configur
271. party conversations Table 3 A shows the allocation of 256 time slots Five are used for system control 15 for tones 235 for call processing and one is not used Physical Characteristics The TDM bus is an 8 bit bus The bus snakes continuously between cabinets in a multi cabinet system as shown in The total length is about 9 feet for a three cabinet system The bus is driven from any of the circuit packs in the cabinets Similarly a signal on the bus can be received by any circuit pack Within a cabinet the bus is printed on one side of the circuit pack carrier backplane while the other side is solid ground Ribbon cables are used to cable the TDM bus between cabinets in a multi cabinet system Electrical Characteristics The TDM bus is an unbalanced low characteristic impedance transmission line Paths printed over a ground plane on the carriers and the flat ribbon cables between carriers maintain this impedance level over the full length of the bus One end of the bus is terminated to ground with a bus termination circuit card and the other end is terminated by a network on the ZTN 81B Memory CP Each circuit pack connects to the bus through a custom bus driver device The bus driver is a switchable constant current source so that even in the high output state there is no bus loading to cause reflections The current output of the drivers is adjusted so that logic high is 1 5 volts compared to a low of 0 volts 3 9 TA
272. pends on the type of trunk if any the user is connected to the type of serving CO etc If the set is connected to a CO trunk Recall generates a 1 2 second flash on the trunk which may be used to activate CO features e g CENTREX or Custom Calling features Considerations None Interactions None Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 120 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION INTERFACE Description Provides dial up access to the system s administration port Both read and write capability is provided with access to all system translation and fault tables A remote administration terminal can perform the same functions as the on premises SAT Remote Administration allows remote access to the system by maintenance personnel the System Administrator and others Interactions Only one System Administration Terminal can be connected at one time Administration Depends on the connecting arrangements selected see below Hardware Requirements Requires a remote SAT Requires that port 1 of the Call Processor CP be connected to 1 a dedicated modem and dedicated facility private line or CO trunk or 2 a dedicated modem connected to a tip ring station port or 3 an ADU connected to a data line port Refer to Section 4 Administration Terminal for additional information Connectivity information is also provided 2 121 REPERTORY DIALING Description Allows multiline voice terminal us
273. r 011 signify international calls 0 plus a number other than 1 signify operator calls If the call is an international call the international routing pattern is selected and the call routed accordingly Operator calls are routed via the local CO facility Calls within the HNPA are checked against the HNPA Exception Lists There may be up to four of these lists each with an associated ARS Routing Pattern Up to 64 3 digit office codes may be divided among the four lists eight of the entries may be 7 digit numbers If a match is found the call is routed via the associated ARS Routing Pattern If no match is found the dialed number is routed via the HNPA pattern specified in the NPA Routing Table or if none is specified via the local CO facility The NPA Routing Table is simply a listing of North American Plan NPAs each having an associated ARS Routing Pattern all North American NPA s are assigned routing pattern 1 by default A dialed NPA that is listed in the table is routed using the associated Pattern Calls to NPA s not listed are routed via the local CO facility For calls outside the HNPA FNPA calls a check is made against a non administrable Special Numbers List The numbers in the list include all 800 and 900 numbers and Telex codes 510 610 710 and 810 If a match is found the call is routed via the local CO facility 2 28 For FNPA calls not the Special Numbers List the dialed numbers checked agains
274. r CP slot 5 the cabinet is identified as Cabinet 1 near slot 6 as Cabinet 2 and near slot 7 as Cabinet 3 Cabinets 2 and 3 Port Circuits Cabinet 2 and Cabinet 3 may be provided The cabinets provide mounting space for additional port CPs 12 maximum each required for larger systems The Tone Detector and Pooled Modem CPs may also be mounted in these cabinets These cabinets are simply stacked on top of Cabinet 1 Table 4 A summarizes port CP capacity of 1 2 or 3 cabinet systems 4 5 CIRCUIT PACK SLOTS PORT CIRCUITS SERVICE CIRCUIT SUPPLY MEMORY CALL PROCESSOR a CABINET 1 MOUNTING FOR 3 CONTROL amp 9 PORT CIRCUIT PACKS s CIRCUIT PACK SLOTS _ POWER N PORT CIRCUITS T U SUPPLY b CABINET 2 OR 3 MOUNTING FOR 12 PORT CIRCUIT PACKS NOTES 1 REFER TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 8 FOR CIRCUIT PACK UNIT LOAD INFORMATI ON 2 DIVIDE THE TOTAL NUMBER OF VOICE TERMINAL AND TRUNK PACKS BETWEEN THE CABINETS USED 3 MOUNT VOICE TERMINAL CIRCUIT PACKS FROM THE RIGHT TRUNK CIRCUIT PACKS FROM THE LEFT 4 COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT PACKS e MEMORY ZTN 81B 5 SYSTYEM RESOURCE CIRCUIT PACKS ALAS EROL EROR e SERVICE CIRCUIT ZTN 85 e POOLED MODEM TN 758 STONE MAXI MUM 2 PER CABINET 6 PORT CIRCUIT PACKS 1 RING LINE ZTN 78 e DATA LINE TN 726 e ATL LINE ZTN 79 e G
275. r each DDC that the voice terminal is capable of controlling Associated with each Data button is an LED that reflects the status of data endpoints as follows e Dark Data endpoint is idle e Winking Data endpoint is reserved preindicated e Flashing Data endpoint is being alerted of an incoming call Steady Data endpoint on line off hook or reserved for another user and busy Refer to the following feature descriptions for additional information Command Mode And Data Terminal Dialing Modem Pooling One Button Transfer To Data DIAL PLAN The dialing plan for System 25 is based on the concept that whenever possible calls should be placed to individuals rather than to pieces of equipment To implement this concept individuals are assigned Personal Dial Codes PDCs and are allowed to login those PDCs at other voice terminals There are two types of PDCs assigned and floating An assigned PDC is associated with each voice terminal Floating PDCs are administered at the SAT and may optionally be associated with the attendant position when not logged in Data extensions on System 25 are assigned Data Dial Codes DDCs Dial Code Assignments System 25 dial codes are as follows Assignable System 25 dial codes may have 1 2 3 or 4 digits These include voice terminal PDCs data terminal DDCs Direct Group Calling DGC Groups Paging Access Attendant Call Park Night Service Modem Request Automatic Route S
276. r inside calls Considerations Music On Hold lets the waiting party know that he or she is still connected Interactions e Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic Music On Hold is not provided when the attendant presses START e Conference outside line placed on hold when CONFERENCE is pressed will hear music if provided e Call Park Parked calls except parked conferences receive music e Direct Group Calling An incoming call to a busy DGC group that provides a recorded delay announcement will receive music after the announcement Administration Assign a port on a TN 742 Analog Line or ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line CP as required for the music message source special feature port type 254 Hardware Requirements Refer to Section 4 for additional information Connectivity information is also provided 2 96 NIGHT SERVICE Description Allows users to answer incoming attendant seeking calls when the attendant is not on duty There are two types of Night Service NS e Directed NS Redirects incoming attendant seeking calls to designated voice terminals e Trunk Answer From Any Station TAAS NS Allows users to answer incoming attendant seeking calls by dialing the Night Service access code Both types of NS may be provided specified on a per trunk basis To obtain Night Service the system must be equipped with an Attendant Console and the console administered with a NIGHT default assignment button In a s
277. r which he she is toll restricted outward restricted or facility access restricted System Speed Dialing Operation To place a call using a System Speed Dial number the user goes off hook and presses the button on the dial pad followed by the 3 digit code assigned to the desired number The system interprets the associated stored number as if it were dialed directly This includes analysis of the number for the various types of restriction pauses will be disregarded for this purpose A user can also use this feature to enter account codes After pressing ACCT ENTRY or flashing switchhook and dialing 0 the user can enter a System Speed Dial code for the account code The stored number associated with the code account code will be listed in the SMDR report Multiline voice terminals users may assign System Speed Dial codes to Repertory Dial REP DIAL buttons Personal Speed Dialing Allows users to program up to seven Personal Speed Dial numbers which are accessible only from their terminals The numbers are accessed by dialing associated access codes 20 26 Personal Speed Dialing is authorized on a per station basis at the SAT The System Administrator will inform users if they can use this feature Refer to the Program feature description for information on programming Personal Speed Dial numbers If enough storage space is available in memory to allow assignment of a Station Speed Dial number Confirmation Tone wil
278. ransfer START Attendant Camp On Attendant Cancel CANCEL Attendant Direct Extension Selection Attendant Message Waiting ATT MSG Attendant Position Busy POS BUSY Attendant Release RELEASE Attendant Return Coverage on Busy RTN BUSY Attendant Return Coverage on Don t Answer RTN DA Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic Attendant System Alarm Indication ALARM Night Service NIGHT Data Features Data Features Table 2 D support the system s switched data services Data services provide switched connections between analog and digital data endpoints TABLE 2 D Data Features Feature Name Multiline Terminal Feature Button Label Type Command Mode 5 Data Terminal Dialing 5 Modem Pooling 0 One Button Transfer to Data DATA Feature types S Standard C Custom O Optional Custom features require administration Optional features require administration and additional equipment S C Standard for single line Custom for multiline voice terminals Bracketed items are associated voice terminal feature button labels these labels are also used in feature descriptions where applicable 2 5 ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY Description Allows voice terminal users to associate an account code with incoming and outgoing calls This is accomplished by entering the account code at the voice terminal before hanging up The account code is appended to the SMDR call record and can be used later for accounting or bill
279. reatment provided to calls initially directed to the home terminal First the home terminal and its coverage station receive ringing simultaneously rather than having the coverage ringing delayed Second coverage terminals will ring for forwarded calls even if the call coverage ring options of the home terminal are no ring Both of these call coverage modifications expedite the answering of forwarded calls Once the call is forwarded to the home terminal it is removed from the away terminal This is true even if the away terminal was busy but subsequently became idle after the call was forwarded to the home terminal 2 Call Placed From The Away Terminal A call to a PDC from the station where it is logged in will be directed to the PDC s home terminal Calls Placed to a Floating PDC When a valid FPDC is dialed the call will be directed to the terminal where the FPDC is logged in and will be provided the coverage treatment administered for that terminal If the FPDC is not logged in and if the attendant position is that FPDC s home then call will be directed to the attendant position However if the FPDC call was placed from the attendant position then it will not be redirected to the attendant but will instead be provided Reorder Tone Finally if the FPDC is not logged in and if the attendant position is not that FPDC s home then the calling party will receive Reorder Tone For non DID calls if an invalid FPDC is dialed
280. reviously entered in order to avoid such errors as the assignment of the same extension number to two voice terminals An erroneous or inconsistent data entry is disallowed and an error message is provided e Causes the translation data to be downloaded on command to an optional Digital Tape Unit DTU Maintenance Software The maintenance software provides automatic periodic testing of maintenance objects within the system as well as consistency tests among the call status tables within the system In addition demand testing is initiated when the system detects a condition requiring a need for testing Software tables are provided for storing error records The records can be accessed by maintenance personnel via SAT A Permanent System Alarm a serious error causes an alarm indicator on the attendant console to light and an error record to be stored in the error table 5 1 Memory Allocation The system software like the hardware is identified by release and version number Each version identifies a particular memory configuration for the release number Main memory is located in the Common Control circuitry The operating system and error log software resides on the Call Processor circuit pack and the remaining administration and call processing software is on the Memory circuit pack Real Time Constraints Real time constraints are a function of the speed of the common control circuitry and the traffic load The switch is des
281. rked call cannot be used to avoid restriction Personal Line parked Personal Line is bridgeable by any user with a button appearance of that line Bridging on to the connection does not answer the parked call The parked call will not return to the parking voice terminal user in this case Toll Restriction see Calling Restrictions If the parking voice terminal user is toll restricted the Recall Dial tone following a successful park cannot be used to avoid the restriction Administration Attendant DXS Console Assign Call Park buttons Hardware Requirements None 2 46 CALL PICKUP Description Allows a user to answer a call ringing at another voice terminal There are two forms of Call Pickup 1 Directed and 2 Group Directed Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup allows calls to any other terminal including Automatic Intercom calls and calls ringing at coverage buttons to be picked up by a user by dialing the Call Pickup code 7 and the ringing terminals PDC Picked up calls remain accessible at the call appearance button of multiline terminals but are no longer available at single line terminals A ringing call can be answered at a busy single line voice terminal by pressing the switchhook which will place the current call on hold dialing 7 and the ringing voice terminal s PDC Group Call Pickup Group Call Pickup permits calls to another terminal in the pick up group to be answered Any call
282. rm Table in the maintenance error log Considerations The ALARM LED on the Attendant Console provides a warning as soon as the fault is detected This permits a quick response to system detected faults Interactions None Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 24 AUTOMATIC INTERCOM Description Allows multiline voice terminal users to place and answer calls to and from each other by use of a dedicated line appearance Automatic Intercom provides a private path between two designated multiline voice terminals To place an Automatic Intercom call the calling party presses the Automatic Intercom AUTO ICOM button and goes off hook The calling party hears ringback tone and the called party receives standard ringing The status LED associated with the button is steadily lighted at the calling voice terminal and flashing at the called voice terminal To answer an Automatic Intercom call the called party presses AUTO ICOM not necessary with Ringing Line Preference and goes off hook The AUTO ICOM status LED lights steadily whenever the other party is off hook This provides each party with a station busy indication for the other To activate the busy to idle reminder the user can press AUTO ICOM remaining on hook A short burst of tone is provided when the other user goes on hook Pressing AUTO ICOM to invoke the busy to idle reminder overrides Prime Line Preference Once activated the feature can o
283. rminal If on hook busy to idle reminder is set Facility is in use at another terminal or Feature has been activated Winking Facility placed on hold Flashing Flashing ff On Off Facility ringing call will be answered if user goes off hook Facility ringing call will not be answered if user goes off hook Off Facility that will be accessed upon going off hook Broken Flutter On Off Facility is being transferred or conference Considerations Line Status and I Use indications provide the user with visible indications of the status of the lines and features Interactions e Attendant Console When a line that appears at both the attendant position and a multiline voice terminal is placed on hold by the terminal user the green status LED winks at the terminal but lights steadily on the Attendant Console When the line is placed on hold by the attendant the green status LED winks on the console and on voice terminals on which it appears 2 89 e Call Coverage green Send Calls status LED lights steadily when the feature is invoked e Exclusion The green Exclusion status LED lights steadily when the feature is invoked Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 90 MANUAL SIGNALING Description Allows a user to signal another voice terminal The user may do this at any time whether on hook or off hook Multiline voice terminal user
284. rocessor CP e Auxiliary Equipment Service and feature related supporting equipment All system hardware except Cabinet 1 equipped with Call Processor Memory and Service Circuit CPs and associated cables is optional Connecting information for various equipment arrangements is provided later in this section A listing of Product Element Codes PECs Apparatus Codes and Comcodes is provided at the end of this section System Cabinets J 58901A1 The system can consist of one two or three cabinets Figure 4 1 Each cabinet contains its own power supply and cooling system A CP carrier frame is integrated into each cabinet Depending on the circuit pack complement the cabinet circuit pack configuration is as follows e Cabinet 1 always required Contains the system s Call Processor Memory Service CPs and can also contain up to nine port CPs e Cabinet 2 or 3 optional Provides mounting for up to 12 port CPs each The CPs receive power control signals and data via the carrier s backplane bus and associated 25 pair connector interfaces In multiple cabinet systems the backplane buses are linked with a bus extender cable J58901A1 L3 The Call Processor and Memory CPs are also connected via a ribbon connector cable referred to as the Front Plane Bus This cable connects the front edges of the two CPs The cabinets have a brown front cover with beige top and sides The front cover has a system identificati
285. rors in the error tables Most Recent System Errors The ten Most Recent System Errors are recorded by the system regardless of their level of severity These are stored in the Most Recent System Errors log Error Logs The three error log can be displayed via the System Administration Terminal The data in the log is useful in diagnosing and analyzing troubles particularly when the problem has not yet caused an alarm or when alarms cannot be retired by replacement of maintenance objects The error log is historical in nature It lists faults that have not been resolved as well as past alarms and provides a profile of system maintenance Automatic Maintenance Tests There are two kinds of maintenance testing initiated only by the system e Periodic e Demand Periodic tests are run by the system at fixed intervals The tests do not affect service Demand tests are run by the system when it detects a condition requiring a need for testing Demand tests are only performed when errors are detected Maintenance personnel cannot initiate these tests For additional information see AT amp T System 25 Maintenance Manual 555 500 105 7 2 8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS This section provides information on the technical characteristics and capacities of the system Some items covered here are discussed elsewhere in the manual but are repeated here for ease of reference Technical specifications are provided for Unit Loads I
286. rovided both Individual and Group Call Coverage will first ring at the Individual Coverage station and then after a second delay cycle if still unanswered will ring at the Group Coverage station Calls from a covering station to a covered station will not be covered unless the covered station has additional coverage This is an important consideration when the attendant provides coverage 2 38 Considerations Call Coverage provides a way to redirect calls to alternate answering positions The feature is versatile enough to permit suitable alternate answering arrangements for virtually every level of employee Special functions such as the Send All Calls feature accommodate the day to day variations that occur in an employee s work schedule Interactions Attendant Console If the attendant is a receiver for a Call Coverage Group and extends a call using the Start button or DXS Console which is unanswered to a member of the group the call will return on the Return on Don t Answer RTN DA button not on the attendant s COVER GRP button Automatic Intercom Auto Intercom calls do not receive call coverage Call Coverage Individual Unanswered calls to a station provided both Individual and Group Call Coverage will first ring at the Individual Coverage station and then after a second delay cycle if still unanswered will ring at the Group Coverage station Call Coverage Station Hunting A call to a busy single line voice terminal wh
287. roviding the access point to the system switching network for each circuit associated with a trunk Voice Terminal A single line or multiline voice instrument e g telephone Voice Terminal Adjuncts e 500 502 Headset Adapter 5101 5102 Speakerphone Acoustic Coupler Refer to Hardware Description for a complete list and Description of Voice Terminal Adjuncts Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS A service that allows calls to a certain area or areas for a flat rate charge based on expected usage Wink Start Tie Trunk After establishing a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call the system waits for a momentary signal wink before sending the digits of the called number Similarly on an incoming call the system sends the wink signal when ready to receive digits 11 12 Write Operation The process of putting information onto a storage medium such as magnetic tape 800 Service A service that allows incoming calls from a certain area or areas to an assigned number for a flat rate charge based on usage 11 13 10B Emergency Transfer Unit 4A Speakerphone System 500A 502A Headset Adapters 55 1 Key Ground Start Button Abandon Hold Release On Access Equipment Trunk Access Dictation System Announcements Direct Group Calling Night Service Delay ARS Restriction Asynchronous Data Unit Connections Supporting Data Term
288. rs are the digital interface between the backplane TDM bus wires system bus and the on board circuitry data bus They also receive and distribute clock and frame signals SAKI Sanity And Control Interface The SAKI is the control interface between the Common Control that sends information via the network control circuit down the TDM buses and the on board circuitry controlled by the on board microprocessor The SAKI receives control information down link messages on the first five time slots and as requested by the on board miscroprocessor transmits control information up link messages these same time slots The SAKI also performs the following functions Identifies the circuit pack to the Common Control location and vintage e Controls status indicator Light Emitting Diodes LEDs red failure green translated and yellow circuit busy e Initiates power on startup procedures e Checks the on board microprocessor for sanity and causes reinitialization in case of problems Takes NPEs out of service under control of the on board microprocessor Resets the protocol handler on the ATL Line Circuit Pack e Takes the whole circuit pack out of service on command from the Common Control or when it determines that on board interference is present in the control time slots On Board Microprocessor With External RAM The on board processor performs all low level functions such as scanning for changes and relay operations
289. rsion resources Two TN 758s are allowed per system cabinet for a total of 12 conversion resources in a 3 cabinet system 2 95 MUSIC ON HOLD OR DELAYED ACCESS Description Provides music or other audible indication to a held party on an outside line On an outside call if the user places the call on Hold or after a call into a DGC group receives the delay announcement music is provided to the calling party Music On Hold is not invoked when a conference call is placed on hold or when the attendant Start facility is used to place a call on hold When a multiline voice terminal user places a call on hold the status LED of the held line winks and music is provided to the held party The user may return to the held party by pressing the button associated with the held call The status LED lights steadily music is removed from the line and a talking connection is again established When a single line voice terminal user places a call on hold by pressing the switchhook momentarily the calling party is connected to music or a recording The station may return to the held call by pressing the switchhook a second time The music is removed from the line and the held party is reconnected to the user If a caller receives music because all members of a DGC group are busy when a group member becomes available to answer the call music is removed and calling party is connected to the DGC member Music On Hold is not provided on data calls o
290. rty a one button operation This enhances the attndant s ability to handle calls quickly and efficiently Interactions None Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 11 ATTENDANT CONSOLE The Attendant Direct Trunk Console Attendant Console is used to facilitate the completion of incoming calls place outgoing calls and manage and monitor some of the system s operation Special attendant related features simplify inward call transfer and the servicing of unanswered calls Each system may be equipped with up to two Attendant Consoles Primary and Secondary which can operate simultaneously The Attendant Console is a 34 button deluxe console all standard multiline voice terminal features are also available to the attendant Each attendant may also have an associated Attendant Direct Extension Selector DXS Console The DXS Console operation is described in the Attendant Direct Extension Selection feature description Unique feature buttons and associated status LEDs on the Attendant Console are e Start START Initiates an inward call transfer by placing a caller on hold and provides internal dial tone to the attendant Cancel CANCEL Terminates the Start operation and reconnects the attendant to the calling party Release RELEASE Releases the attendant from an active call When used on a call that the attendant is in the process of extending Release completes the transfer Return On
291. runk to a PCM data signal to the NPE The hybrid circuit converts the codec 4 wire analog signal to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the central office trunk by the line transformer The relay driver buffers and inverts the relay drive signals from the port I O circuit so that a logic high input operates the appropriate relay The relays control circuitry provides the proper signaling for ground start trunks The trunks support touch tone dialing The surge protection circuit provides overvoltage lightning surge protection for the circuit pack 3 18 CIRCUIT 0 m NPE 0 H NPE 1 T 3 PORT CIRCUIT ON BOARD E 3 MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUIT OFFICE T 4 PORT CIRCUIT 4 R 4 GROUND g DETECTOR 1 7 7 7 Figure 3 8 Unique Ground Start Trunk ZTN 76 Circuitry 3 19 Loop Start Trunk ZTN 77 The Loop Start Trunk Circuit Pack interfaces eight central office loop start trunks and TDM bus shows the following Loop Start Trunk unique circuitry e Port Input Output I O circuit e Eight port circuits Port Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders for communication between the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the in
292. s No Default No Restrict access to all other trunk pools Yes No Default No Restrict outward calls Yes No Default No ARS Facility Restriction Level Level Number 0 3 Default 3 Specify Toll Restriction Class Class Number 1 4 None Default None not restricted Automatic Route Selection Route Facility Restriction Levels Hardware Requirements None 2 51 r COMMAND AND DATA TERMINAL DIALING Allows data terminal users to originate data calls or view data port options Refer also to the overview of the system s data features provided in the Data Calls and Services description Command Mode supports digital data endpoints connected via Asynchronous Data lJnits ADUS to ports on a Data Line CP TN 726 Command Mode is invoked from a data terminal in the idle on hook mode by Terminal Optioned For Autobaud Terminal Not Optioned For Autobaud Enter Break followed by Return Enter Break The terminal then displays the Command Mode menu place Data call Options Menu items are chosen either by positioning the cursor under the desired item by typing space characters and entering a Return or by typing the upper case character in the menu field e g type D to enter terminal ialing or 0 to view options Once a user has entered Command Mode the terminal is considered off hook and busy to incoming calls until it returns to the idle mode Place Data Call Ref
293. s Processes that exceed the set interval approximately 60 seconds are terminated by the OS Archangel Driver Interface Provides an interface between the OS and Network Control NC RS 232C Driver Interface Handles the flow of information between the Call Processor Circuit Pack and the system s peripheral equipment System Administration Terminal Digital Tape Unit SMDR Output Device TDM Bus Provides an electronic link among the system port circuits including System Resources and between the Call Processor Circuit Pack and port circuits Port Circuit Packs Each port circuit pack has on board software that provides for the sending receiving of Network Control messages and data Circuit pack status messages are also sent to the Network Control software 5 3 MEMORY CIRCUIT ADMINISTRATION PACK TASK CALL PROCESSOR CIRCUIT PACK ARCH ANGEL DRIVER INTERFACE NETWORK CONTROL SOFTWARE s FEATURE CODE M UDULES STATION SMDR CALL PROCESSING PROCESSING TASK TASK MESSAGE SEND RECEIVE RS 232C DRIVER INTERFACE CONTROL CHANNEL MESSAGES pee CIRCUIT ON BOARD PACKS SOFTWARE STIMULI SYSTEM 1 0 VOICE TERMINALS CO FACILITIES DTU SMDR RS 232C DEVICES Figure 5 1 System Software Partitioning 5 4 Step By Step Call Description The following is a description of a call originated between two multiline voice terminals 1 10 11 12 13 14 15
294. s Section 4 49 Peripheral Equipment Peripheral Equipment is equipment that connects to the Call Processor ZTN 82 CP including e System Administration Terminal SAT e Digital Tape Unit DTU e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR printer or Call Accounting System CAS System Administration Terminal The System Administration Terminal SAT is a Model 703 Data Terminal It is a general purpose asynchronous full duplex printing data terminal with an RS 232C interface for data entry and retrieval It provides a paper record of all transactions When located within 50 feet of the system cabinets it can be directly connected to channel 1 on the ZTN 82 Call Processor CP Either on premises or off premises access to the administration port is supported The terminal operates at a speed of 1200 bps 1200 baud The Model 703 requires 115V ac 60 hertz commercial power from a 3 wire grounded outlet The terminal should be located on a flat surface such as a desk or table top It is approximately 12 inches wide 9 inches long and 3 inches high The Model 703 keyboard generates ASCII codes The terminal produces two audible tones to indicate the completion of activities e Short Tone A tone of less than one half second indicates the normal termination of an operation e Long Tone A one second tone indicates that an error or an abnormal operating condition has been detected The System Administration Terminal User s Manual 555
295. s can signal another predesignated multiline voice terminal by pressing an associated Manual Signaling SIGNAL button A single tone burst is provided at the signaled terminal The signaling voice terminal also receives the tone and can use this feature while in any call state No LED indication is associated with the Manual Signaling feature When the Manual Signaling feature is used while the called station is ringing on another call no audible signal is received by either the signaling or the called voice terminal The duration of the single burst of signaling will always be the same regardless of how long SIGNAL is pressed The signal is repeated each time the button is pressed Considerations Manual Signaling allows a user to signal another voice terminal without calling the terminal The meaning of the signal may be prearranged between the sending and the receiving parties Only multiline terminals may be signaled Interactions e External Alerts Manual Signaling will not activate external alerting devices associated with the signaled station Administration Voice Terminal Station Port e Assign Manual Signaling button Hardware Requirements None 2 91 5 MESSAGING SERVICES Description Lights an LED to indicate that another station or the attendant has a message for the user The Message Services provide light activation deactivation only Users must call the sender to receive their messages The system
296. scription Provides a dedicated outside line for multiline voice terminal users Unlike pooled facilities which can be accessed via dial codes Personal Lines can be accessed only via a dedicated feature button and provide both incoming and outgoing service Up to eight terminals may share a Personal Line Up to four parties may be off hook on the line at the same time the line itself is the fifth conferee When the line is busy its status LED lights at all terminals at which the line appears Ringing may be provided optionally to one or more to the terminals sharing the line For each Personal Line one station is administered as the principal owner The call coverage of that terminal determines the call coverage of the Personal Line Considerations Personal Lines provide facilities to users who desire direct access to the exchange network In addition Personal Line appearances are provided on the Attendant Console for general use LDN trunks Appearances of these lines may also be provided at selected multiline voice terminals to insure call coverage when the attendant is not available Personal Lines provide direct access for callers bypassing the attendant In some cases they may substitute for DID service Interactions Attendant Console On the Attendant Direct Trunk Console trunks are terminated as Personal Lines The Attendant Console can accommodate a maximum of 26 Personal Lines 24 is the practical limit Call Coverag
297. se noted This section also provides descriptions of Attendant Console operation the System Dial Plan and Data Calls And Services 2 2 System Features System features Table 2 A are those that affect the entire system s operation TABLE 2 A System Features Feature Name Feature Type Automatic Route Selection Call Accounting System Dictation System Access Direct Group Calling Direct Group Calling Delay Announcement Direct Inward Dialing End to End Signaling Extended Stations External Alerts Hold Release On Abandon Intercept Treatment With Reorder Tone Interdigit Timeouts Music On Hold or Delayed Access Night Service Directed and TAAS Night Service Delay Announcements Off Premises Stations Out Of Building Stations Paging System Access Pause Personal Dial Codes Pooled Facility Dial Access Power Failure Transfer Remote Administration Interface Station Message Detail Recording Tie Trunks Touch Tone And Dial Pulse Service Trunk Groups oooloolvecocloooo oouw nwwoowloonjioono Feature types S Standard C Custom O Optional Custom features require administration Optional features require administration and additional equipment 1 C O Custom for Directed Optional for TAAS Night Service Station Features The many Station Features Table 2 B available allow individual needs to be met As these needs change assigned features can also be changed Station Features
298. sers to review the options administered for their data ports 2 Interactions e End To End Signaling See above text e Modem Pooling Data calls between analog and digital endpoints require that a conversion resource TN 758 be available If one is not the NO MODEM followed by TRY AGAIN message will be displayed e Speed Dialing Speed Dial codes can be dialed from data terminals Administration Data Port See Permissible Data Port Options Table 2 above Hardware Requirements TN 726 Data Line CP to support each digital endpoint TN 758 Pooled Modem CP to support data calls between digital and analog endpoints 2 57 CONFERENCE Description Allows up to five parties including the conference originator to participate in a conference call Multiline Voice Terminals Multiline voice terminal users can add another external or internal party by pressing the CONFERENCE button The first party is placed on Special Hold indicated by a broken flutter on the line appearance button and the system selects an idle System Access button providing system dial tone The user may dial the desired number or select another facility to dial the party to be conferenced in Subsequently pressing the held line button completes the conference If the facility to be added is busy or has invoked Exclusion the conference will be denied Users can conference up to two external facilities and up to five parties in all Any attemp
299. sion number Allows the user to handle more than one call on that same extension number at the same time Multiplexed The simultaneous transmission of two or more signals over a common transmission medium NPA Number Plan Area Network An arrangement of inter and or intra location circuits designed to perform specific functions Network Interface Provided by the CO telephone company in two forms 1 RJ21X for trunk facilities other than tie trunks 2 RJ2GX for tie trunk facilities An arrangement provided by the local telephone company which permits remote Terminal Equipment to operate as though it was directly connected to the System 25 This tariffed service can only be provided for FCC registered single line voice terminals Out Of Building Station The Terminal Equipment is directly connected to the System 25 but is not located in the same building as the common equipment Special arrangements are made to protect the system and its users from lightning power line crosses etc Only the single line and 7300H series of voice terminal may be so connected MET Sets can not be connected as Out Of Building stations PDC Personal Dial Code Paging Trunk A telecommunications channel used to access an amplifier for loudspeaker paging Parameter Any set of physical properties whose values determine the characteristics or behavior of something 11 8 Peripheral Equipment System Administration Terminal SAT SMDR Outpu
300. sociated with TAAS NS and cannot be answered by dialing the NS access code Directed NS is activated under the following conditions e An attendant has pressed NIGHT on either console e Directed NS has been administered for the trunk e Stations have been administered to receive NS calls Note that at least one station must be designated as a NS receiver for this feature to work properly If only an announcement is required administer the announcement device as a station and make this station the NS receiver Refer to the Night Service Delay Announcement feature description for additional information on the delay announcement 2 97 Trunk Answer From Any Station Allows any user to answer NS calls Incoming trunk calls activate an external alerting device such as a gong bell or chime External Alerts feature A user can then dial the NS access code and answer the call Night Service is activated under the following conditions e An attendant has pressed NIGHT on either console e TAAS NS has been administered for the trunk e A NS external alert has been installed and administered Note that TAAS NS calls will not activate the delay announcement associated with Directed NS Considerations Directed NS provides a means of insuring that Night Service calls are answered by designating individual voice terminals to receive the calls In noisy environment for example NS via external alerting devices may not be practical Direc
301. ssage for them Of course other arrangements can be made as to the meaning of the signal A subsequent MSG WAIT press at either terminal turns Off both LEDs No talking path is associated with this feature Considerations This feature is functionally similar but separate from the Call Coverage Message Waiting and Attendant Message Waiting features Note that this feature does not light the Message LED the status LED next to the assigned MSG WAIT button is lighted Interactions None Administration Voice Terminal Station Port e Assign MSG WAIT on both multiline stations Note The MSG WAIT button must always be assigned to pairs of stations and works just between the two stations If station A wants to signal stations B and C station A needs a separate MSG WAIT button for each Hardware Requirements None 2 136 5 Description Provides users of the 7300H series voice terminals the ability to test their terminals Placing the Test Program T P switch in the position causes all red and green LEDs to light alternately The terminal also rings during the test Considerations Test assures users that all LEDs are working and that the built in speaker is functional The Test switch on some voice terminals is spring loaded upon release the switch returns to a normal on line position On other terminals the switch must be manually returned to the center normal on line position Interactions
302. ssible from any terminal Personal Speed Dial codes can only be accessed from the terminal where originally programmed A Personal Speed Dial number can include a System Speed Dial code only as the first four characters but nowhere else Personal Speed Dial numbers cannot include Personal Speed Dial codes System Speed Dial numbers cannot include any Speed Dial codes Administration System Assign System Speed Dial Numbers 0 9 Voice Terminal Station Port Allow Deny Personal Speed Dialing on a per station basis Hardware Requirements None 2 126 STATION HUNTING Description Provides terminal circular or combinational hunting sequences for calls to busy single line voice terminals and data terminals Calls to a busy single line voice terminal may hunt to only one other single line terminal however up to five single line voice terminals may hunt to the same voice terminal Although hunting is not available to or from multiline terminals single line terminals may have their calls covered by a multiline terminals Station Hunting takes precedence over Call Coverage Calls to a single line voice terminal that is assigned both Station Hunting and Call Coverage will first hunt If no hunted to station is available the call then goes to coverage The following are examples of the three types of hunting allowed Terminal Hunting Example Voice terminals x y and z are arranged for terminal hunting as follows 1
303. ssignments may be changed it is strongly recommended that Ringing Line Preference be retained It is recommended that Prime Line Preference not be assigned to the Attendant Console Preselection allows users to override line preference features already administered for the terminal and to activate the busy to idle reminder feature Interactions e Attendant Console If a line rings at the Attendant Console while the attendant is on another call Ringing Line Preference will be invoked when the attendant hangs up Ringing Line Preference Ringing line preference overrides Prime Line Preference and Preselection when a call is ringing at an on hook voice terminal Administration Voice Terminal Station Port e Prime Line Preference Assign Prime Line Preference Default Sytem Access button e Ringing Line Preference Assign Ringing Line Preference Yes No Default Yes Hardware Requirements None 2 88 Description LINE STATUS AND I USE INDICATIONS Provides users with a visual indication of the status of feature buttons and lines appearing at a their multiline terminals A green status LED and a red I Use LED are provided for each programmable button on most multiline voice terminals The following table summarizes LED states and associated translations for line appearances Line Status Green LED I Use Red LED Meaning Facility is idle Off Off On On If off hook facility is in use at this te
304. ssor bus interface and four interface ports The ports provide the following interfaces Port 1 System Administration Terminal SAT Port 2 SMDR equipment Port 3 Digital Tape Unit Port 4 Reserved for future use The Call Processor also provides 48V dc control on ports 7 and 8 for Emergency Transfer Units The Call Processor CP must be mounted in slot 2 of Cabinet 1 ZTN 81B Memory The ZTN 81B one per system provides 512K of read only memory The Memory CP provides for the software associated with system operation including call processing administration and maintenance The ZTN 81B provides a built in TDM bus terminator an earlier version ZTN 81 did not The Memory CP must be mounted in slot 1 of Cabinet 1 ZTN 85 Service Circuit The ZTN 85 one per system provides four Touch Tone receivers generates all system tones and supplies the system clocks The ZTN 85 can support up to 75 Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF dialers such as 2500 type voice terminals and touch tone incoming tie trunks The Service Circuit CP must be mounted in slot 3 of Cabinet 1 Optional Circuit Packs The following CPs are optional and may be mounted in any other CP slot System Resource Circuit Packs TN 748 Tone Detector Provides four Touch Tone receivers The TN 748 is required in addition to the ZTN 85 Service Circuit when more than 75 Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF dialers are to be provided in a system
305. stem Access A DID call may access a paging zone This allows the user to dial in and utilize the Paging feature Dial restricting the paging code will block this interaction Personal Dial Codes DID calls will be redirected to PDCs logged in at other terminals in the system DID calls to an unassigned PDC or a FPDC that is not logged in will be either redirected to the attendant or receive Reorder Tone e Pooled Facility Access Access to pooled facilities via DID is permitted This includes access to WATS FX Tie trunks private lines dictation equipment and paging systems This access is provided by selecting facility access codes so that they will match DID numbers Administration System e Send misdirected DID calls to the Attendant Console Yes No Default Yes e Set number of DID digits matched against dial codes 2 4 None Default 3 Trunk Port e DID trunk type Immediate Dial Wink Start Delay Dial e Number of digits to be received from CO on this trunk Default 3 Hardware Requirements Each DID trunk requires a port on a TN 753 DID Trunks CP 2 73 DIRECT STATION SELECTION DSS Description Allows one button access to another voice terminal a pooled facility paging zone or DGC Group This feature requires a button assignment on a rnultiline voice terminal There are two types of DSS buttons Flexible DSS buttons are programmed at the voice terminal DSS buttons are programmed at the SAT The user s
306. stem s trunk ports Up to three trunk CPs except Tie Trunk CPs may be connected to a three way splitter cable OR6016 which concentrates the CP interfaces into one 25 pair cable Up to two Tie Trunk CPs may be connected to a two way splitter cable OR6015 which concentrates the CP interfaces into one 25 pair cable Each splitter cable connects to an interface block at the TAE Cables are cut down or plug into the TAE blocks and plug into the telephone company provided network interface RJ21X or RJ2GX Trunks and tie lines are cut down by the Telco at the interface 700 or 157B Blocks are usually used for the TAE connections furnished by the installer 4 58 700A NETWORK 1 INTERFACE BLOCKS 110 OR 66 DIGITAL SWITCH FACILITIES LOOP AND GRD START TRUNKS ops DID TRUNKS CO TRUNK FACILITIES PORT CP s CO TRUNK FACILITIES PORT 5 CENTRAL OFFICE ANALOG LINE CP TN 742 TIE TRUNK FACILITIES PORT CP s LEGEND A SINGLE ENDED 25 PAIR CONNECTOR CABLE 4250 3 TO 1 SPLITTER CONNECTORIZED CABLE 086016 2720 06X 2 TO 1 SPLITTER CONNECTORIZED CABLE 086015 2720 05 OPS OFF PREMISES STATI ON SIP STATION INTERCONNECT PANEL D OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P E INSIDE W RE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 4 23 Trunk Access Equipment TAE Connections 4 59 Station Interconnect
307. t Position Yes No Default Yes e Assign number of seconds before an unanswered Camped On Call returns to the Attendant Console 1 120 seconds or No Attendant Camp On 0 Default 30 seconds 2 13 Attendant Console Station Port e Special Programmable Buttons Night Service Position Busy Attendant Message Waiting assigned by default NOTE The following buttons or LEDs are predefined on the Attendant Console and are not administrable Alarm LED Return On Don t Answer Return On Busy Start Cancel Release e Trunk terminations The following is required for each trunk terminated on the console administered as Personal Line appearances Trunk Number Make This The Principal Station owner of the trunk Yes No Enable Ring Yes No DIRECT EXTENSION SELECTION Description Permits the attendant to extend calls to stations by pressing a single button instead of pressing START and dialing the PDC or DDC The primary and secondary Attendant Consoles each may have an associated Direct Extension Selector DXS Console The DXS Console has an array of 100 DXS buttons plus seven Group Select buttons Pressing a Group Select button causes the DXS buttons to be associated with PDCs from an associated hundreds group Default assignments for the Group Select buttons are 200 299 300 399 etc up to 800 899 Group Select buttons can be assigned any h
308. t to add a sixth party will be denied This limit is for the conference as a whole Other conference stations are also prohibited from adding a third outside party or sixth party Single Line Voice Terminals The single line voice terminal user can establish a conference by momentarily pressing the switchhook which puts the first party on hold receiving Recall Dial Tone and then dialing a second party After connection to the second party another press of the switchhook establishes the conference A third press of the switchhook will drop the second party restoring the original call The user cannot put a conference which he she has established on hold Other internal conferees multiline or single line may then add additional parties to the conference up to the five party two outside line maximum Considerations The Conference feature allows voice terminal users to set up conference calls without the assistance of the attendant Interactions e Account Code Entry If more than one user attempts to associate an account code with a Conference Call the first to activate the feature will prevail Attendant Message Waiting Pressing the Attendant Message Waiting ATT MSG button while on a conference call will be ignored Call Park Call park may be used to place a conference on hold if it contains fewer than five parties Parked conference calls do not return to the parking station They remain parked Extended Stations An Exten
309. t device such as a SMDR Printer or a Call Accounting System Digital Tape Unit DTU Personal Dial Code Each system user is assigned a PDC and is allowed to login the PDC at any voice terminal in the system optional feature as they move about the premises The PDC be 1 2 3 or 4 digit number There are two types of PDCs e PDCs assigned to voice terminals Associated with each voice terminal in the system e Floating Assigned to users and visitors who will be moving about the premises Floating PDCs may be associated with the attendant position or may be logged in by the user at a system voice terminal Calls to the floating PDC will ring at the terminal where logged in Pickup Group A group of individuals authorized to answer any call directed to an extension number within the group Port An interface circuit between System 25 and associated auxiliary and peripheral equipment Typical references include e Terminal port station port e Facility port trunk port e Auxiliary equipment port Private Branch Exchange A switching system that provides switched communications access amongst its terminals and facilities e g System 25 Private Network A network used exclusively for handling the telecommunications needs of a particular customer Private Network Office Code RNX The first three digits of a 7 digit private network number These codes are numbered 220 through 999 excluding any codes that have
310. t the FNPA Exception List Up to 32 entries maybe assigned to the list Each entry must consist of a 3 digit NPA code 3 digit CO code and two additional digits 8 digits The last two digits may be which match any digit Each entry has an associated ARS Routing Pattern If a match is found the call is routed using this pattern If no match is found the call is then checked against the NPA Routing Table A dialed NPA that is listed in the table is routed using the asociated Pattern Numbers that don t match are routed via the local CO facility ARS Routing Pattern Table provides a block diagram of an ARS Routing Pattern Up to eight of these patterns may be administered in the system Each pattern consists of two subpatterns that may be chosen based on the time of day Each pattern consists of two subpatterns A and B each of which can contain up to three allowed routes If all routes in a subpattern are busy a CO overflow flag when set allows the call to be routed via the local CO facility otherwise the call will queue on the first route in the subpattern Administrable Start and Stop times Hour and Minute for Routing Subpattern A specify when Subpattern A should be used to route calls Subpattern B is used to route calls at all other times Each route is specified by its trunk group facility access code and an associated FRL An FRL is typically lower for the first route in a subpattern and increases with each additional rout
311. ted NS provides a solution to the noise problem Also Personal Line calls to executives can receive special handling by providing Directed NS Calls continue to ring at the attendant position or Personal Line appearances when NS is activated They also ring the external alert TAAS or designated NS station Trunk Answer From Any Station provides the capability for any user to answer NS calls Interactions e DID Trunks DID trunks are not assignable to NS A DID call will ring at the appropriate station whether NS is activated or not Administration Trunk Ports e Assign trunk Class of Service with Night Service 8 15 e Assign Directed Night Service trunk Yes No Default Yes Voice Terminal Station Port e Directed NS Add Night Service trunk number to station list e Assign External Alert for TAAS NS Attendant Console Station Port e Assign Night Service button to primary console e Assign Night Service Access Code 2 98 Hardware Requirements TAAS NS requires an associated external alert see the External Alerts feature description for additional information Each alert requires a port on a ZTN 78 Tip Ring Line or a TN 742 Analog Line CP Refer to Section 4 External Alerting or Recorded Delay Announcement Equipment for additional information Connectivity information is also provided 2 99 NIGHT SERVICE DELAY ANNOUNCEMENTS Description Provides a recorded announcement for incoming
312. tem These forms are filed in the Administration Records Binder and provide the basis for on going record keeping Modification of initial assignments can be made to meet changing customer needs The system provides an RS 232C interface to a System Administration Terminal SAT the primary means of entering and modifying translations Refer to Hardware Description Section 4 System Administration Terminal for a description of the SAT and its interface requirements Maintenance and associated diagnostic procedures for analysis and testing can also be done by Systems Technicians through the SAT a maintenance password is required System 25 administration consists of e Centralized Administration Configuration of the system and assignment of feature related paramets including assignment of feature buttons on voice terminals Centralized Administration is performed via the SAT e Station Administration Programming of voice terminal Repertory Dial Buttons Direct Station Select Buttons Station Speed Calling Numbers Procedures for performing Centralized Administration are provided in the Administration Manual 555 500 500 Procedures for performing Station Administration are provided in System 25 Single Line and Multiline User Guides 555 500 702 and 555 500 703 respectively 6 1 7 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The primary objective of System 25 maintenance is to detect report and clear troubles as quickly as p
313. tem 25 can send or receive either type of signaling required by the distant switch DID trunks can only receive dial pulse signals The type to be used is specified when the associated trunk group is administered An incoming call can be connected to another trunk a voice terminal a data endpoint an attendant console or an announcement When the call is answered an off hook indication is sent to the serving office This signal may be used to initiate the recording of call details normally used for billing Trunks in a two way trunk group should be translated at the SAT in the same order that the serving office hunts when searching for an idle trunk System 25 will then hunt in reverse order This reduces the probability that both switches will attempt to seize the same trunk at the same time Considerations Trunks of the same type and Class Of Service may be assigned a Pooled Facility Access Code This provides users with dial or button access to the trunk pool Trunks may be dial access restricted to reserve them for button access only Refer to Recommended Network Facilities Section 8 for an estimate of CO trunk requirements based on traffic considerations See the Pooled Facility Access feature descriptions for additional information Trunks may be reserved for incoming calls e g sales or service department calls by specifying this in the administered Class Of Service code Interactions e Direct Group Calling ea
314. tendant e Calls to Floating PDCs FPDCs not logged in when administered to route to attendant e Calls on incoming facilities that terminate on that console System users and DID callers may reach a particular attendant by dialing that attendant s PDC A POS BUSY button can be assigned to each console this permits selection of one of two modes of operation 1 simultaneous operation or 2 only one Attendant Console active However only one console is allowed to be inactive at any given time An associated POS BUSY status LED is lighted when the console is inactive Ringing is disabled on all trunk terminations on the busy console s rightmost two columns of buttons Ringers disabled on a busy console will be enabled on the active console for those trunks with dual appearances appearances on both consoles All other features on all buttons including those on the associated Attendant Direct Extension Selector DXS Console will continue to function normally even though the console is inactive The Attendant Position Busy feature description provides additional information Administration System e Assign Primary and Secondary Attendant Positions e Assign number of rings before unanswered calls return to the Attendant Position 1 31 Default 5 rings e Send DID calls to unassigned numbers to the Attendant Position Yes No Default Yes e Send calls to Floating Personal Dial Codes that are not logged in to the Attendan
315. tendant presses RTN DA if not selected by Ringing Line Preference The call may be reextended via the START button or DXS Console In either case the button is RTN DA button is idled as soon as the attendant releases Considerations Attendant Return Coverage On Don t Answer allows the attendant to service calls not answered within specified time intervals This provides the calling party better service and results in fewer lost calls Interactions e Attendant Console As long as an Attendant Console remains active the call will return to the attendant who transferred it e Call Coverage Whenever the attendant is a call coverage receiver for a particular call coverage group and a call is placed from the attendant position via the Start button or the DXS Console to a voice terminal in that group the Call Coverage Group COVER GRP button on the Attendant Console will not track the call COVER GRP button status LED will not flash If the call remains unanswered it will return to the Attendant Console on the RTN DA button rather than the COVER GRP button Administration System e Assign number of rings before call return to the Attendant Position 1 31 Default 5 Rings Hardware Requirements None 2 22 ATTENDANT SPLITTING ONE WAY AUTOMATIC Description Allows the attendant to converse privately with a called party while the calling party is split away on hold When the attendant presses START or a DXS button to e
316. the DOSS Configurator must be used to select equipment requirements For existing installations you will need to determine what equipment is already installed You should not order equipment directly using the PECs in these figures The octopus cable PEC 2720 05P for example supports eight terminals you do not order one per terminal A list of related PECs Apparatus and Comcodes is included at the end of this section sure to check the Sales Manual and or DOSS before ordering since this information changes frequently Symbols Used in Figures Modular jacks are shown by the triangle symbol 25 pair connectors are indicated by shaded blocks Generally only one leg of an Octopus cable is shown Unterminated wiring requiring cut down or other termination do not have symbol designations The 103A Connecting Block is a typical modular wall jack that provides cut down connections for building station wiring Voice Terminal And Adjunct Connections Figures 4 29 through provide connection information for single line and multiline voice terminals The single line terminals may be located on premises off premises or out of building 7300H series multiline voice terminals may be used for out of building service but must be within 1000 feet of the system cabinets Off premises service is not available Figures 4 35 through Figure 4 37 provide connection information for multiline voice terminals equipped with adjuncts 34 Button Del
317. the following special characters The characters and SPACE may be used to improve legibility These characters are ignored e The or characters may be used to cause a 1 5 second pause in dialing multiple characters can be used The mark character indicates that the remaining digits are for end to end signaling e UNDERLINE or BACKSPACE characters may be used to correct previously typed characters on the same line e The character may be used to delete the entire line and start over with a new DIAL prompt Each line of dialing information may contain up to 27 characters Note that all of the dialing information including pauses and ignored characters must be typed on a single line following the DIAL prompt and terminated by Return Dialing Correction The backspace character BS key or Ctrl H keys or underscore _ may be used to cancel the previously entered character More than one entered character may be deleted by using multiple backspace or underscore characters The character may be used to delete the entire line of entered characters Pause To assist the completion of off premises calls the pause characters 96 or may be used A pause character may be used to help ensure the receipt of dial tone before continuing to dial Each or causes a fixed delay of one and one half 1 5 seconds Pause characters may be used consecutively if a longer pause is required
318. the six port circuits has an associated Digital Signal Processor DSP NPE to DSP interface circuitry a DSP restart circuit and an interrupt filter Port circuits 2 and 6 are general purpose tone detector ports Port circuits 3 and 7 provide digital loop back testing of each NPE on the circuit pack The NPE serializes TDM bus signals which are connected to the DSP in serial form from the NPEs by the DSP interface circuit Serial clock and data signals connect directly from the NPE to the DSP The system framing signal is synchronized and connects to the DSP The DSP restart circuit controls the DSPs When the on board microprocessor is not functioning properly the DSP restart circuit takes all of the DSPs out of service It restarts each individual DSP under control of the port I O and sanity check circuit The touch tone DSPs under control of the on board microprocessor write data synchronously to the NPEs The interrupt filter detects valid touch tone signals and allows end to end transmission while blocking end to end touch tone signaling 3 43 PORT CIRCUIT BUS LEADS BUFFERS PORT CIRCUIT a TOUCH TONE PORT CIRCUIT lt a 4 e e PORT CIRCUIT 5 5 CIRCUIT ON BOARD PORT PACK MICRO 1 0 ADDRESS PROCESSOR CIRCUIT LEADS PORT CIRCUIT GENERAL 2 PURPOSE SANITY TONE LEDS CHECK PORT CIRCUIT Ha d eT CIRCUIT 6 Figure 3 20
319. then the calling party will receive Reorder Tone If a DID call does not match any assigned number in the dialing plan it will be directed to the attendant or to Reorder Tone as administered Considerations The Personal Dial Code PDC feature provides flexibility for users and visitors Visitors once assigned a FPDC can inform callers and the attendant Calls can then be directed to the voice terminal where the FPDC is logged in Calls to FPDCs not logged in may be directed to the attendant 2 109 22 Interactions e Call Coverage Calls to a logged in FPDC receive the call coverage of that terminal Unanswered calls to a PDC at an away terminal return to the home terminal and receive the home terminal s call coverage treatment They do not receive the away terminal s call coverage Direct Inward Dialing In systems with DID service PDCs FPDCs DGC group numbers DDCs codes and facility access codes may match the last 2 3 or 4 digits of DID numbers For example the code matching DID number 234 2345 may be 45 345 or 2345 depending on the system dial plan Direct Station Selection If an attempt is made to program a FPDC rather than a PDC Reorder Tone is received Administration System e Send DID calls to unassigned DID numbers to the Attendant Default Yes e Send All Calls To Not Logged In FPDCs To The Attendant Default Yes e Add Delete FPDCs Hardware Requirements None 2 110 PERSONAL LINES De
320. tible DTE e Increases the distance RS 232C signals may travel over standard twisted pair wiring Refer to Technical Specification for distance limitations e Data and control signals may be transmitted 2 000 feet in asynchronous full duplex mode at speeds up to 19 200 bps The transmission speed automatically matches that of the attached RS 232C device e DC isolation via opto couplers ensures high noise immunity resulting in very low error rates e A variety of Z3As with different connectors allows easy connection to RS 232C terminals printers and host computers see Table 4 D e Most Z3As be powered from the RS 232C interface If this power is not sufficient a low voltage power transformer and adapter s must be connected Z3A5 ADUs always require supplemental power An analog single line voice terminal 2500 or 7100 series or a 7300H series multiline voice terminal Z3A5 ADU required rnay be connected to the ADU allowing the voice terminal and DTE to share a common wall jack and 4 pair cable run back to the SIP NOTE Neither off premises nor out of building service can be provided with ADUs For additional information see Z3A Asynchronous Data Unit User Manual 555 401 701 RS 232C CONNECTOR INTERFACE TELEPHONE JACK OPTIONAL ORIGINATE DISCONNECT SWITCH Figure 4 20 Asynchronous Data Unit ADU 4 48 TABLE 4 D 23 Asynchronous Data Units ADUs Z3A Wall Jack RS 232C Model Co
321. tics Frequency Response Station To Station or Station To CO Trunk relative to loss at 1 kHz FREQUENCY LOSS 60 Hz 200 Hz 300 3000Hz 3200 Hz 3400 Hz Insertion Loss CONNECTION TYPE LOSS On Premises Station to On Premises Station On Premises Station to Off Premises Station Off Premises Station to Off Premises Station Station to Trunk Trunk to Trunk Overload Level 3 dBm0 Crosstalk lt 70 dB Intermodulation Distortion FOUR TONE METHOD 2nd Order Tone Products 3rd Order Tone Products Quantization Distortion SIGNAL LEVEL DISTORTION LEVEL 2 to 30 0 40 dBm0 45 dBm0 8 18 Analog Transmission Characteristics Contd Sampling Rate 8 kHz Terminating Impedance 600 ohms Trunk Balance Impedance 600 ohms or Complex Z selectable Echo Return Loss The echo return loss of the switching equipment is infinite The echo return loss of the station equipment can be engineered for greater than 18 db over the range of 500 Hz to 2500 Hz Loop Resistance e TN 742 Loop resistance of up to 1300 ohms including the station e 7 78 resistance of up to 100 ohms not including the station 2000 feet with No 24 AWG Connection Bandwidth 64 Kbits Steady State Noise Level The steady state noise level presented to any busy path does not exceed 23dBrnc during the busy hour Impulse Noise 8 impulse noise is 0 count hits in five minutes at 55dBrnc dur
322. tion Port e Assign Exclusion button Hardware Requirements None 2 78 EXTENDED STATIONS Description Allows single line voice terminals to be located at distances greater than 2000 feet from the system cabinets Extended stations have the same feature capability as other voice terminals These stations count as an outside party on conference calls Transmit and receive levels are increased by 3 dB at extended stations Considerations A single line voice terminal must be administered as an extended station before this feature is activated Interactions e Conference An Extended Station counts as one of the two outside parties allowed on conference calls Administration Single Line Voice Terminals Station Port e Assign port on Analog Line TN 742 CP e Make This An Extended Station Yes No Default No Hardware Requirements The Extended Station must be a single line voice terminal Requires a port on a TN 742 Analog Line CP 2 79 EXTERNAL ALERTS Description Provides standard station ringing for activating external alerting devices such as bells gongs horns and lights External Alerts support the Trunk Answer From Any Station form of Night Service The feature may also be used in conjunction with voice terminals located in noisy environments large areas such as warehouses etc The alerting device is activated whenever the associated station is alerted Considerations External Alerting en
323. to logged in floating PDCs on the other hand receive the same coverage treatment as any other calls to the logged into station They of course have no home station to return to Personal Lines Personal line calls receive the coverage of the principal owner station for that line Other line appearances even if administered to ring will not receive coverage Tie Trunks Tie Trunk calls directed at a user with call coverage receive normal call coverage treatment 2 39 Administration System e Provide Call Coverage ringing on internal calls Yes No Default Yes Covered calls will flash but not ring at covered stations on internal calls if No e Number of rings before call coverage ringing starts on no answer 0 31 Default 2 Call Coverage button s status LED on covering terminal begins flashing immediately in all cases Voice Terminal Station Port e Coverage Sender group number 1 3 Default 1 e Provide Call Coverage ringing on no answer Yes No Default Yes otherwise flashing LED is the only indication received at the covering station e Provide Call Coverage ringing on busy Yes No Default Yes otherwise flashing LED is the only indication received at the covering station e Call Coverage Receiver button Group Number 1 32 Allow Ring At Destination Yes No Default Yes otherwise flashing LED is only indication received at the covering station Hardware Requirements N
324. ton because the PDC or FPDC is logged in at the Console or because the FPDC is not logged in For these calls the status LED on the DXS Console will not light If the attendant extends a call to a station and that call returns to the attendant then the station s status LED on the DXS Console will flash and then light steadily when the call is answered by the attendant This is true regardless of the login status of the PDC If the attendant extends a call to a FPDC and that call returns to the attendant then the FPDC status LED on the DXS Console will not light Interactions e Attendant Position Busy The DXS Console functions normally when the associated Attendant Direct Trunk Console is in the inactive mode e Attendant Return Coverage Busy Or Don t Answer If a call to a FPDC is returned to the attendant on RTN BUSY or RTN DA button the FPDCs status LED on the DXS Console will flash during ringing and light steadily when answered e Call Coverage the attendant receives a coverage call for a FPDC the associated status LED on the DXS Console will not light e Direct Extension Selection When all stations is DGC group are busy the status LED on the DXS Console lights Administration Special Feature Ports e Assign Group Select button hundreds groups and Call Park codes e Requires a port assignment on a ZTN 79 ATL Line Circuit Pack CP for each DXS Console Hardware Requirements Requires an Attendant DXS Console an
325. ts 8 3 Hardware And Software Parameters Contd Traffic Data Simultaneous 2 Party Conversations 115 eCall Capacity CCS Hour 4140 Busy Hour Call Capacity 2500 Reliability eMean Time Between Outages MTBO 4 Years Power Consumption ePer Cabinet Maximum 500 Watts Total Ports also includes trunk and station ports Software Limits hardware maximum 36 CPs System Resources eOne Service Circuit CP includes 4 TT Receivers 8 ports allocated CP eTwo Touch Tone Receiver CPs 4 TT Receivers CP 8 ports allocated CP e Pooled Modem Max 6 CPs 4 ports allocated CP two modems per CP Trunks e Trunk Ports Tie Trunks Auxiliary Trunk Ports Paging Access Dictation Access Station Ports Data Ports e Voice Ports Single Line Voice Terminals 200 Multiline Voice Terminals 96 eDXS Console 2 e34 Button Sets 40 Attendant DT Consoles 2 eNon 34 Button Sets 96 8 4 Unit Loads A cabinet can supply no more than 80 unit loads of 48 volt power a unit load is defined as 44 mA Unit loading is determined by the terminal connected to the port circuits following table lists unit loads for various terminals NOTE Equipment not listed above 1 UNIT LOADS Note EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT UNIT LOAD PACK PER PORT 2500 Voice Terminals ZTN 78 7101A Voice Terminal 5 7302 01 79 10 10 7303 01 34 Btn 7305 01 HFAI 7309H01A BIS 7
326. tures Built in Speaker Speaker Ringer Volume Control Six Predefined Buttons e Conference e Drop e Transfer e Hold e Speaker e Recall Five Feature Buttons each equipped with I Use and Status LEDs e Two predefined as System Access e Three programmable default assignments are Repertory Dial Note that this set does not have a Message button or LED Adjuncts None 4 20 I USE STATUS LEDs HANDSET SYSTEM ACCESS TEST PROGRAM SWITCH LN SPEAKER RING VOLUME CONTROL PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS CONFERENCE r3 TRANSFER C3 DROP HOLD SPEAKER Figure 4 6 Five Button Voice Terminal 7302H01C 4 21 Ten Button Voice Terminal 7303 01 3161 172 The 10 button terminal Figure 4 7 can be desk or wall mounted and is approximately 7 inches wide 5 1 4 inches high and 8 1 2 inches long The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Dial Pad not I Use and Status LEDs Test Program Switch T Used to test the operation of LEDs and ringer P Used to program features Built in Speaker Speaker Ringer Volume Control Seven Predefined Buttons Conference Drop Transfer Hold Speaker Message Recall Ten Feature Buttons each with I Use and Status LEDs Adjuncts e 502A Headset Adapter PEC 3163 HFU 5102 Speakerphone PEC 3164 Two predefined as System Access Eight programmable default assignments are
327. ue circuitry e Ringing application circuit Port Input Output I O circuit e Eight port circuits 3 PORT CIRCUIT 0 ELECTRONIC HYBRID BATTERY FEED OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION NPE 0 1 La PORT CIRCUIT ON BOARD CIRCUIT MICRO 3 PROCESSOR Tn ANALOG RINGING 1 4 TIP RING APPLICATION PORT VOICE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT TERMINALS R 4 POWER SUPPLY 1 7 PORT CIRCUIT 1 R 7 Figure 3 14 Unique Analog Line TN 742 Circuitry 3 30 Ringing Application Circuit This circuit receives ringing voltage from the power supply It monitors ringing voltage and current generates signals to the on board microprocessor indicating zero ringing voltage and current and detects a terminal user lifting the receiver during ringing This prevents the application of ringing to the port circuit when a terminal user lifts the receiver during the ringing phase Maintenance circuitry is also included The maintenance circuitry detects when a terminal is connected to the port circuitry and checks for faults in the ringing application circuitry Port I O Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders connecting the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor Port Circuits The eight port circuits are identical Ea
328. uilt in TDM bus termination resistors Address and Data Buffers The address and data buffers interface the Memory circuit pack to the address and data lines on the front plane ROM Array The memory array consists of sixteen ROM devices of 32k 8 bit bytes each for a total capacity of 512K ROM The ROMs are organized into pairs allowing the Call Processor to access 16 bit words ROM Select The memory selects the proper pair of ROMs according to address information Timing and Control Logic Circuit Controls the access speed of the ROM no wait states by returning a Data Transfer Acknowledge signal at the proper time Termination Resistors These resistors are required for proper operation of the TDM bus The ZTN 81B provides the proper termination for one end of the bus and a plug in TDM bus termination circuit card plugs into cabinet backplane is used to terminate the other end For this reason the ZTN 81B CP must always be located in slot 1 of Cabinet 1 3 6 FRONT PANEL MEMORY BUS TO CALL PROCESSOR CIRCUIT PACK TOM RESISTORS BUS ADORESS AND DATA BUFFERS mme AND CONTROL Figure 3 3 Memory ZTN 81B Circuitry 3 7 Switching Network System 25 uses distributed processing techniques to provide switched voice and data services The switch operates at 64 Kbps The switching network consists of the following Time Division Multiplex TDM bus e System Resource Cir
329. undreds group in the dialing plan Pressing a DXS button when off hook on an incoming call is equivalent to pressing START and dialing a station Such action will busy out the Start facility until the call is released When the attendant is already active on the START button the system will ignore a DXS button press The DXS LED associated with a particular station will flash when 1 a station calls the attendant 2 a call extended to a station returns on the Return On Busy RTN BUSY or Return On Don t Answer RTN DA buttons 3 an extended call is directed to a Cover button on the Attendant Console The LED stops flashing when the call is answered On Return On Busy or Return On Don t Answer calls the LED status will return to the state that reflects the stations current busy idle status when the call is answered by the attendant An outside call may be parked via the DXS Console by pressing one of the eight Call Park buttons that may be programmed on the Console On the Attendant Console the facility status LED of the parked call winks to indicate that the call is held and the status LED on the DXS Console lights steadily A call parked via the DXS Console and not picked up within two minutes will return to the RTN DA button A call parked via the DXS Console may be picked up at any voice terminal by dialing the Call Park retrieval code 8 and the number of the DXS button used to park the call The rightmost button on the bottom
330. uxe sets and MET Sets require local power when equipped with adjuncts Attendant Console Connections Figure 4 38 provides connection information for the system s Attendant Direct Trunk Console Figure 4 39 shows the connections required for the Direct Extension Selector DXS Console A DXS Console may be associated with each Attendant Console 4 67 Peripheral Equipment Connections Figures through provide information for connecting the System Administration Terminal SAT Digital Tape Unit DTU and Station Message Detail Recording SMDR printer or Call Accounting System The following types of connection are supported e On premises direct connection within 50 feet of the system cabinets and sharing the same AC outlet e On premises direct connection at a distance greater than 50 feet from the system cabinets or not sharing the same AC outlet e On premises switched connection e Off premises direct connection e Off premises switched connection Note on Figure 4 41 that local power from a 20120 transformer is required for Z3A4 ADU An EIA Crossover cable M7U 87 and an ADU Crossover Cable D8AM 87 are also required On Figure 4 42 the peripheral equipment establishes a connection with the Call Processor port by dialing the data extension DDC associated with Port X on the Data Line CP As shown on Figure 4 44 the peripheral equipment may be connected as either an Off premises Station or over a CO dial up lin
331. verage for and that station does not answer call coverage will not be invoked This is one of the reasons why announced transfer is recommended e Call Pickup A transferred call may be answered via Call Pickup e Calling Restrictions non restricted user typically the attendant can transfer a CO trunk to an outward restricted or toll restricted station giving the station outward service The toll restriction class of the transferring station will apply for calls over a transferred trunk 2 140 e Hold An outside call placed on hold during call transfer receives music on hold if available A user attempting to return to a held internal call that has been abandoned will hear nothing A user attempting to return to a held CO trunk call that has been abandoned hears CO dial tone or receives CO intercept treatment until the CO disconnects Trunk To Trunk Transfer A trunk may be transferred to another trunk following the rules for Trunk To Trunk Transfer Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 141 TRUNK GROUPS Description Allows each trunk in the system to be assigned to one of up to 16 trunk groups Trunks link two switching systems such as System 25 and the local CO or System 25 and another PBX Trunks can be grouped together in trunk groups sometimes referred to as pooled facilities when all the trunks in the group perform the same function This grouping provides resource pooling wh
332. w which call appearance will be selected when the handset is lifted or which call appearance is active when a user is off hook Intercept Tone An alternating high and low tone indicates a dialing error or denial of the service requested Interface A common boundary between two systems or pieces of equipment Internal Call A connection between two users within the system LDN Listed Directory Number LED Light Emitting Diode Loop Start Trunk After establishing a connection with the distant switching system for an outgoing call System 25 waits for a signal on the loop formed by the trunk leads before sending the digits of the called number On incoming calls the received request for service is sufficient to cause the call to route to a predetermined destination normally the system attendant group No digits are received MET Multibutton Electronic Telephone Modem A device that modulates and demodulates signals transmitted over a communications path Used to connect Data Terminal Equipment to the system s analog ports The system provides a pooled modem conversion resource 12 resources maximum per system 212A compatible 11 7 Modem Pooling Provides shared use conversion resources that eliminate the need for a dedicated modem when an analog data end point accesses or is accessed by an analog line or trunk Multiline Voice Terminal A terminal equipped with several call appearance buttons for the same exten
333. wed by on a TCA List allows access to all office codes in that area To allow calls within a customer s local area individual office codes are entered this allows the customer to restrict toll calls within the local calling area NPA NNX entries allow specific office codes to be called within an area Note NPA only entries are not permitted use NPA Note that stations that are toll restricted are only toll restricted on CO trunks type 701 and 801 or when they use the ARS feature They will not be toll restricted when they dial access or button access any other type of trunk e g FX WATS or Tie trunks Facility Access Restriction Any station may be denied dial access to the local CO and or to all other pooled facilities as a group A station so restricted may only access those facilities via the Automatic Route Selection feature provided the FRL of the station is equal to or greater than that of the ARS route ARS Restriction Special restrictions on each station may be imposed when the call is routed by the ARS feature Facility Restriction Levels FRLs are used to restrict access to trunk groups An is a single digit 0 1 2 3 A terminal assigned of 0 has the least privileges a terminal assigned an FRL of 3 the most An FRL is also assigned to each route in each 2 50 ARS routing pattern The terminal s must be equal to or greater than the routes in order to use that facil
334. witchhook When the single line user goes on hook the parked call is removed from the terminal and cannot be reentered To retrieve a parked call a user must obtain system dial tone dial 8 and then dial the PDC of the station that parked the call If the call is not retrieved within 2 minutes the call will return to the user that parked the call A call may be parked by the attendant using the same procedure as a multiline voice terminal In addition if the Attendant Position is equipped with a DXS Console up to eight additional calls may be parked by dedicating any eight of the console DSS buttons to the call park function A call may be parked using the DXS Console by pressing one of the dedicated Call Park buttons The status LED of the parked line on the Attendant Console winks and the status LED of the Call Park button on the DXS Console lights steadily A call parked by the attendant using the same procedure as a multiline voice terminal will return to the Attendant Console s System Access button if it is not picked up within 2 minutes A call parked with the DXS Console which is not picked up within 2 minutes will return to the RTN DA button on the Attendant Console in the same manner as any other unanswered call 2 45 A call parked with the DXS Console is retrieved by dialing 8 and the access code assigned to the dedicated DXS Console Call Park button Each voice terminal user except the attendant can only park one call at a
335. xtend an incoming call to a called party the calling party is automatically split away from the connection and placed on hold This allows the attendant to talk privately with the called party before extending the call The attendant can then press RELEASE to complete the transfer or CANCEL to drop the called station and return to the incoming call Considerations Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic allows the attendant to 1 announce a call 2 determine privately whether the called party is available to receive the call and 3 obtain information if necessary to redirect the call or take a message Interactions e Music On Hold Music on hold is not provided to the calling party while they are on hold Administration None Required Hardware Requirements None 2 23 SYSTEM ALARM INDICATION Description Provides an Alarm on the Attendant Console to alert the attendant to problems detected by the system software The ALARM LED on the Attendant Console will light whenever a detected fault persists longer than four minutes or if more than five transient faults per hour are detected The alarm indication should be reported immediately to your AT amp T Systems Technician The alarm type that causes an alarm indication is referred to as a Permanent System Alarm These alarms are faults that may cause degradation of service and require immediate attention These alarms are recorded in the Permanent System Ala
336. y Transfer Unit The 10B Emergency Transfer Unit ETU supports up to five Power Failure Transfer PFT sets and a DID make busy function Up to four ETUs can he supported for a maximum of 20 PFT sets The sets can be connected to selected Loop Start or Ground Start trunks PFT sets must be FCC registered single line sets If Ground Start trunks are used a ground start button must be provided at each PFT sets In the event of a Power Failure Transfer switch has lost power or a major fault has occurred a contact closure is provided to the Central Office CO over a dedicated pair of wires The CO then makes busy all DID trunks When power is restored the closure is removed and the CO restores DID service External alarm contacts are provided on the front of the ETU for use as required Note It is recommended that customers with DID service make provisions with their CO to provide this arrangement The ETUs are mounted on the cross connect backboard Connections are via 25 pair receptacle ended CO and SIP and plug ended switch line and trunk connectors Modular jacks are provided for the 48V control signal from the CPU Call Processor Unit and for additional ETUs Screw terminals are provided for the connection of external alarms When calculating Unit Loading see Section 8 all ETU loading counts against Cabinet 1 The 10B ETU is mounted on the cross connect field as shown in Environmental Requirements ETU Power Failure
337. y five PFT stations three of the voice terminals are wired straight through the ETU and are not switched during service interruptions A similar condition exists for the 25 pair cable D from the CO Trunk CP to the Trunk input of the ETU Three of the eight trunk port appearances are wired straight through the ETU to the CO and are not switched Trunk ports connected by legs 2 and 3 of the splitter cable are wired directly to the TAE Block SYSTEM 25 ETU TO SWITCH TRUNK ETU TO CENTRAL OFFICE 25 PAIR 25 CPU CALL PROCESSOR TO ADDITIONAL ETUs ADDITIONAL ETU ETU TO SWITCH LINE OCTOPUS CABLE 25 PAIR STATION PORT PART OF SIP UP TO FIVE POWER FAILURE TRANSFER PFT STATIONS REGISTERED SINGLE LINE a ETU CONNECTIONS DASHED LINES NORMAL OPERATION NO PFT TRUNK SUPPORTS STANDARD CO CALLS ETU CENTRAL OFFICE 48V REMOVED STATION b ETU CONNECTIONS DASHED LINES ON PFT Figure 4 27 Emergency Transfer Unit Connections 4 65 INTERFACE BLOCK DIGITAL SWITCH 66 OR 110 TRUNK co Bx TRUNK co TRUNK CP co TRUNK CP co TRUNK CP co TRUNK CP ANALOG STATION CP CALL PROCESSOR PART OF OCTOPUS P ADAPT q 7210 ADAPT lt ADAPT 5 7601 STATION VOIC
338. ystem with two Attendant Consoles both consoles may be assigned a NIGHT button Either attendant can press NIGHT to activate Night Service The LEDs of both NIGHT buttons will light to indicate that the system is in the Night Srvice mode Pressing NIGHT a second time by either attendant deactivates Night Service and turns Off both LEDs Directed NS Allows an incoming trunk call to be directed to up to four designated voice terminals Different trunks may be directed to different voice terminals When the attendant presses NIGHT incoming calls on trunks administered to receive Directed NS treatment will automatically be routed to the designated voice terminals all designated NS stations ring simultaneously Calls not answered within a specified number of rings will receive a Night Service delay announcement if available While at the announcement they may be bridged onto by going off hook at a station with a line appearance The announcement is dropped at this point If all Directed NS stations for a given trunk are busy both System Access buttons busy on multiline sets calls go to the announcement immediately Directed NS calls do not hunt or receive call coverage but they can be picked up via the Call Pickup feature Personal Line calls that are directed to NS will also ring at the Personal Line appearances and receive normal call coverage Incoming calls receiving Directed NS treatment will not activate external alerting devices as

AT&T System 25 r1v1 Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

AT&amp;T System 25 r1v1 Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

AT&T System 25 r1v1 Reference Manual